)

~ ii
,t, NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
)
I)
I PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES

I~ ' Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks:

I
I ) SA Lifts
)

' )

\
)

)
)
)

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

)
 CONTENTS
-J
I.Jj
1
),
FOREWORD 3 )
SCOPE 5 )
2 TERMINOLOGY 5 )
3 GENERAL ... 10 )
4 PLANNING AND DESIGN GUIDELINES ... 12
)
5 LIFT ARRANGEMENTS AND PLANNING DIMENSIONS ~ ... 20
)
6 CIVIL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS ... 25
7 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS ... 48
)
8 MINIMUM TECHNICAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ... 52 )
9 SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS .. . 6 1 )
I 0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR LIFTS ... 69 )
11 SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUPER HIGH RISE BUILDINGS ... 69 )
12 LIFT ENQUIRY OR INVITATION TO TENDER ... 71
13 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER AND SUBSEQUENT PROCEDURE ... 72 '!
14 COORDINATION OF SITE WORK ·... 73 > I
)
15 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE FOR LIFTS ... 75
16 MAINTENANCE OF LIFTS ... 76 )
ANNEX A TYPICAL CHECKLIST OF VISUAL AND FUNCTIONAL ... 82 )

CHECKS INVOLVED IN THE INSTALLAT~ON OF LIFTS )

ANNEX B TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF CHECKS TO BE TAKEN INTO .. . 9 1
) :
ACCOUNT IN MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS )j
ANNEX C EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN ... 95
)
ANY RISK ASSESSMENT FOR MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
)
LIST OF STANDARDS .. . 96 )
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)

)
2 NATIO NAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6

)
 • I

__,.._._-

National Building Code Sectional Committee, CEO 46

l ) FOREWORD
This Code (Part 8/Subsection SA) deals with the installation requirements for planning, design, installation,
operation, maintenance and inspection of lifts (passenger lifts, goods lifts, hospital lifts, service lifts and dumb
waiter) so as to ensure safe movement of people with satisfactory performance.
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983 and 200S. This Section covers the
)
requirements for installation and maintenance of lifts and escalators in buildings. This Section shall be read with
) Part 4 'Fire and Life Safety' of the Code fro m fire sa fety requirements point of view. The major changes in the first
\ revision of 1983 were addition of outline dimensions of different types of lifts and requirements of escalators in
buildings. Emphasis was laid on coordination between the engineer/architect and the lift manufacturer to arrive at
the number and position of lifts for attaining optimum efficiency in serving the building with safety.
The significant changes incorporated in the last revision in 2005 included addition of new clauses/recommendations
on Building Management System; addition of new clauses on fireman 's lift, infrared light cm1ain safety and
Braille button for blind people and updation of provisions as per the revised standards on lifts on which this
section was based.
As a result of experience gained since implementation of2005 version of the Code and feedback received as well
as revisions of Indian Sta-ndards on which this Section was based, a need was felt to revise this Section. In this
revision, the erstwhile Section 5 on Lifts and Escalators has been divided into two subsections namely:
SA Installation of Lifts
5B Installation of Escalators and Moving Walks
This revision has, therefore, been formulated to take care of these. The significant changes incorporated in this
revision (Subsection SA) include the following:
a) Definitions of a number of terms relating to performance measurement of lifts, and seismic and maintenance
aspects of lifts have been included, apa11 from other modifications in the terminology clause.
b) Requirements for high speed lifts and lifts for tall buildings including elaboration oflifts fo r fire-fighting
and emergency evacuation have been included.
) c) Considerations for machine room less (MRL) lifts have been covered.
d) The clause on preliminary design has been expanded to cover the requirements for various building
functions.
e) Provisions re lated to des tination control system have been included.
f) Various special requirements have been detailed in a separate clause.
g) Provisions for seismic resistance aspects in lifts have been included .
h) Performance measurements for lifts have been included.
)
j) A new clause on operation and maintenance o f lifts has been included.
k) The provisions have been updated as per the revised Indian Standards on lifts on which this Subsection
is based.
m) The list of Indian Standards as good practices/accepted standards has been updated.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the fo llowing Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
1466S Electric Traction Lifts
(Part I) : 2000 Guidelines for outline dimensions of passenger, goods, service and hospita l lifts
) (Part 2/Sections I Code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance, Section I Passenger and
) and 2: 2000 goods lifts, Section 2 Service lifts

) PART !l BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION S INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 3

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
 IS No. Title
(Part 3/Sections 1 Safety rules, Section 1 Passenger and goods lifts, Section 2 Service lifts
and 2): 2000
(Part 4/ Sections 1 Components, Section 1 Lift buffers, Section 2 Lift guide rails and guide shoes, Section 3
to 9): 2001 Lift carframe, car, counterweight and suspension, Section 4 Lift safety gears and
governors, Section 5 Lift retiring cam, Section 6 Lift doors and locking devices and
contacts, Section 7 Lift machines and brakes, Section 8 Lift wire ropes, Section 9
Controller and operating devices
(Part 5 : 1999) Inspection manual
IS 14671 : 1999 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of hydraulic lifts
IS 15330 : 2003 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of lifts for handicapped persons
IS 15785 : 2007 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of lift without conventional machine
rooms
Assistance has also been derived from the following publications for the formulation of this Subsection:
EN 81-20: 2014 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Lifts for the transport of
persons and goods - Part 20: Passenger and goods passenger lifts
EN 81-77: 2013 Safety rules for the construction and installations of lifts. Particular applications for
passenger and goods passenger lifts. Lifts subject to seismic conditions
EN 81-50: 2014 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Examinations and tests -
Part 50: Design rules, calculations, examinations and tests of lift components
ISO 18738-1 : 2012 Measurement of ride quality- Patt 1: Lifts (elevators)
)
ISO 7465 : 2007 Passenger lifts and service lifts - Guide rails for lift cars and counterweights- T-type
)
ISO/TS 18870: 2014 Lifts (elevators) - Requirements for lifts used to assist in building evacuation
)
ISO 3008-2 : 2014 Fire-resistance tests - Patt 2: Lift landing door assemblies
)
ISO 3864-1 : 2011 Graphical symbols- Safety colours and safety signs- Part 1: Design principles for
)
safety signs and safety markings
)
ISO 4190-1 : 2010 Lift (Elevator) installation- Part 1: Class I, II, III and VI lifts
) I
ISO 4190-5 : 2006 Lift (Elevator) installation - Part 5: Control devices, signals and additional fittings
) I
CIBSE Guide D: 2015 Transportation Systems in Buildings 2015, The Chartered Institution of Building
Services Engineers, London, U.K. J
} .
CTBUH 2004 Emergency Evacuation: Elevator Systems Guidelines, Council on Tall Buildings and
Urban Habitat, Illinois, USA
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Subsection, are subj ect to
•
)
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Subsection are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
).
the most recent editions of the standards.
)
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Subsection is complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960 )
'Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)'. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off ).
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Subsection.
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
. 4 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 )

)
 )

\
')
I NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
l
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
) Section 5 Installation of lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks:
) 5A Lifts
)

1SCOPE 2.1.4.1 Oil btifler - A buffer using oil as a medium

)
1.1 This Code (Part 8/Subsection 5A) covers the
) requirements for planning, design, installation,
operation, maintenance and inspection of lifts
)
(passenger lifts, goods lifts, hospital lifts, service lifts
) and dumb waiter) so as to ensure safe movement of
) people with satisfactory performance.
1.2 This Subsection gives information that should be
exchanged among the architect/engineer, the consulting
)
engineer and the lift manufacturer from the stage of
) planning to installation including maintenance.
NOTE - The provisions given in this Subsection are primarily
for electric traction lifts; however, most of these provisions are
also applicable to hydraulic lifts {see good practice [8-SA( I)]} .
) load until the spring is compressed solid.
2 TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this subsection, the following
)
definitions shall apply.
) 2.1 Gene.-al Terms Relating to Lifts
) 2.1.1 Automatic Rescue Device (ARD) - A device
meant to bring a lift stuck between floors due to loss of
) power, to the nearest landing level in either direc~ion
and open the doors in order to allow trapped passengers
to be evacuated. Such a device may use some form of
internal auxiliary power source for such purpose,
complying with all the safety requirements of the lift
) during normal run. The speed of travel is usually lower
) than the normal speed. On reaching the level, in case
of manual door 1i fts, the device shall allow the door to
)
be opened and in case of power operated door lifts the
) device shall automatically open the door.
) 2.1.2 Bottom Car Run-by- The distance between the
) car buffer striker plate and the striking surface of the
car buffer when the car is in level with the bottom
terminal landing.
) mechanical part, equipment or device installed beneath
2.1.3 Bottom Counterweight Run-by - The distance
) between the counter weight buffer striker plate and the
)
striking surface of the counterweight buffer when the
car is in level with the top tenninallanding.
)
2.1.4 BLifler- A device designed to stop a descending
) car or counter weight beyond its normal limit of travel
) by storing or by absorbing and dissipating the kinetic
energy of the car or counterweight.
)
)
PART 8 BUlLDING SERVlCES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND
) MOVlNG WALKS: SA LIFTS
which absorbs and dissipates the kinetic energy of the
descending car or counterweight.
2.1.4.1.1 Oil buffer stroke - The oil displacing
movement of the buffer plunger or piston, excluding
the travel of the buffer plunger accelerating device.
2.1.4.2 Spring buffer- A buffer which stores in a spring
the kinetic energy of the descending car or
counterweight.
2.1.4.2.1 Spring buffer load rating_- The load required
to compress the spring by an amount equal to its stroke.
2.1.4.2.2 Spring btifler stroke - The distance, the
contact end of the spring can move under a compressive
2.1.5 Call Indicator - A visual and audible device in
the car to,indicate to the attendant the lift landings from
which calls have been made.
2.1.6 Car Bodywork - The enclosing bodywork of
the lift car which comprises the sides and roof and is
built upon the car platforll_l.
2.1. 7 Car Door Electric Contact- An electric device,
the function of which is to prevent operation of the
driving machine by the nonnal operating device of the
lift unless the car door is in the closed position.
2.1.8 Car Frame- The supporting frame or sling to
which the platfonn of the lift car, its safety gear, guide
shoes and suspension ropes are attached.
2.1.9 Car Platform -The part of the lift car which
forms the floor and directly supports the load.
2.1.10 Clearance
2.1.10.1 Bottom car clearance- The clear vertical
distance from the pit floor to the lowest stmctural or
the car platfonn, except the guide shoes, rollers, safety
jaw blocks and platfonn apron or guard located within
300 mm, measured horizontally from the sides of the
car platform when the car rests on its fully compressed
buffers.
2.1.10.2 Top car clearance - The shortest vertical
distance between the top of the car crosshead, or
between the top of the car where no crosshead is
5

)
il
 . f"'l!;

I
) '
)
provided, and the nearest part of the overhead structure 2.1.13 Deflector Sheave -An idler pulley used to
change the direction of a rope lead. )
or any other obstruction when the car floor is level with
the top terminal landing. ) I
2.1.14 Door (Lift Landing Door and Lift Car Door)
2.1.10.3 Top counte1weight clearance - The shortest ) I
2.1.14.1 Door, centre opening sliding- A door which
vettical distance between any part of the counterweight
slides horizontally and consists of two or more panels )
structure and the nearest part of the overhead structure
which open from the centre and are usually so )
or any other obstruction when the car floor is level with
interconnected that they move simultaneo~sly.
the bottom terminal landing. )·
2.1.14.2 Do01; mid-bar collapsible - A collapsible
2.1.11 Control - The system governing starting, ) '
door with vertical bars mounted between the normal
stopping, direction of motion, acceleration, speed and
vertical members. )
retardation of moving member.
2.1.14.3 Door, multi-panel - A door arrangement )
2.1.11.1 Single-speed alternating current control- A
whereby more than one panel is used such that the
control for a driving machine induction motor which is
panels are connected together and can slide over one
l
arranged to run at a single-speed. )
another by which means the clear opening can be
2.1.11.2 Two-speed alternating current control- A maximized for a given shaft width. Multi panels are used )
control for a two-speed driving machine induction in centre opening and two speed sliding doors.
motor which is arranged to run at two different )
2.1.14.4 Door, single slide - A single panel door which
synchronous speeds either by pole changing of a single )
slides horizontally.
motor or by two different armatures.
)
2.1.14.5 Dom; two speed sliding- A door which slides
2.1.11.3 Rheostatic control - A system .of control )
horizontally and consists of two or more panels, one of
which is accomplished by varying resistance or
which moves at twice the speed of the other. )
reactance or both in the armature or field circuit or both
of the driving machine motor. 2.1.14.6 Dom~ vertical hi-parting- A door which )
slides vertically and consists of two panels or sets of
2.1.11.4 Variable voltage motor control (generatorfield )
panels that move away from each other to open and are
control) - A system of control which is a<;complished
so interconnected that they move simultaneously. )
by the use of an individual generator for each lift
wherein the voltage applied to the driving machine 2.1.14.7 Dom; vertical lifting - A single panel door, )
motor is adjusted by varying the strength and direction which slides in the same plane vertically up to open.
)
of the generator field.
2.1.14.8 Do01; swing- A swinging type single panel ) I

2.1.11.5 Electronic devices - A system of control door which is opened manua lly and closed by means
) I
which is accomplished by the use of electronic devices of a door closer when released.
for driving the lift motor at variable speed. J
2.1.15 Door Closer - A device which automatically
2.1.11.6 Alternating current variable voltage (ACVV) closes a manually opened door. )
con trol - A system of speed contro l which is
2.1.16 Door Operator - A power-operated device for )
accomplished by varying the driving and braking torque
opening and closing doors.
by way of voltage variation of the power supply to the ) I

driving machine induction motor.
2.1.11.7 Alternating cwnnt variable voltage variable
frequency (ACVVVF) control - A system of speed
control which is accomplished by varying the voltage
and frequency of the power supply to the driving
machine induction motor.
2. 1.11.8 Solid-state d.c. variable voltage control- A
so lid-state system of speed contro l w hich is
accomplished by varying the voltage and direction of
the power supply to the mmature of driving machine
d.c. motor.
2.1.12 Counte1weight - A weight or seri es of weights
to counterbalance the weight of the lift car and part of
the rated load.
2.1.17 Dumb Waiter- A lift with a car which moves )
in guides in a vertical direction; has a net floor area not i
) I
exceeding I m 2 , to tal inside height of 1.2 m, whether
or not provided with fi xed or removable shelves; has a
I
)
capacity not exceeding 250 kg and is exclusively used
for carrying materials and shall not carry any person.
)
) I
2.1.18 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock- A device
provided to prevent s imultaneous operation of both up
and down relays or power contactors. }
2.1.19 Electro-Mechanical Lock- A device which )
combines in one unit, e lectrical contact and a
)
mechanical lock jointly used forth~ landing and/or car
doors. )
2.1.20 Floor Levelling Switch - A sw itch for bringing

6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

'
) the car to level at slow speed in case of double speed
I
or variable speed machines.
2. 1.2 1 Floor Selector- A mechanism formi ng a part
of the control equipment, in certain automatic lifts,
) designed to o perate controls which cause the lift car to
) stop at the required landings.
) 2. 1. 22 Floor Stopping Switch - A swi tc h o r
combination of switches arranged to bring the car to
rest automatically at or near any pre-selected landing.
2.1.23 Geared Machine - A machine in which the
power is transmitted to the sheave throug h worm and
worm wheel or spur reduction gearing.
2. 1.24 Gearless Machine - A lift machine in which
the motive power is transmitted to the driving sheave
from the motor without intermediate reduction gearing
and has the brake dru m mounted di rectly on the motor
shaft.
)
2.1.25 Goods L(ft - A lift designed primarily for the
) may cause movement of the car towards the landing.
transport of goods, but which may carry a lift attendant
) or other personnel necessary for the loading o r
unloading of goods.
2.1.26 Guide Rails - The members used to guide the
movement of a li ft car or counterweight in a vertical
direction.
2.1.27 Guide Rails Fixing- The complete assembly
comprising the guide rails bracket and its fastenings.
2.1.28 Guide Shoe - An attachment to the car fra me
or counterweight fo r the purpose of guiding the lift car
or counter weight frame.
2.1.29 Hoisting Beam- A beam, mounted immediately
below the machine room cei li ng/machinery s pace
ceiling, to which lifting tackle can be fixed for raising
or lowering parts of the lift machine.
l 2.1.30 Hospital L(ft - A lift normally installed in a
l hospital, dispensa ry or c lin ic a nd designed to
accommodate one bed or stretcher along its depth, with
) sufficient space around to carry a minimum of th ree
attendants in addition to the lift operator.
)
2. 1.31 Landing Calf Push - A push button fitted at a
lift landing, either for calling the lift car, or fo r actuating
) the call indicator.
) 2. 1.32 Landing Door - T he hinged or sliding portion
o f a lift well enclosure, controll ing access to a lift car
at a lift landing.
2.1.33 Landing Zone - A space extending from a
) horizonta l plane 400 mm below a landing level to a
) plane 400 mm above the landing level.
) 2. 1.34 Levelling Devices
) 2.1.34. 1 Levelling device, 1(/i car - Any mechanis m
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTIONS INSTA LLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND
) MOVING WALKS: SA LI FTS
)
which either automatically or under the control of the
operator, moves the car w ithin the levell ing zon e
towards the landing only, and automatically stops it at
the landing.
2.1.34.2 Levelling device, one way automatic - A
device which corrects the car level only in case of under
run of the car but will not maintai n the level during
loading and unloadi ng.
2. 1.34.3 Levelling device, two-way automatic
maintaining - A device which COITects the car level
on both under IUn and over-run and maintains the level
during loading and unloading.
2.1.34.4 Levelling device, two way automatic non-
maintaining - A device which corrects the car level
on both under run and over run but will not maintain
the level during loading and unloading.
2.1.35 Levelling Zone - The lim ited distance above
or below a lift landing within which the levelling dev ice
2.1.36 Lift - A n appliance designed to transport
persons or materials between two or more levels in a
vertical or substantially vertical direction by means of
a guided car. The word 'elevator' is also synonymously
used for ' lift'.
2.1.37 Lift Car - The load carrying unit with its floor
or p latform, enclosing bodywork, and car door.
2.1.38 Lift Landing - That portion of a building or
structure used for discharge of passenge rs or goods or
both into or from a lift car.
2.1.39 Lift Machine- T he part of the lift equipment
comprising the motor and the control gear therewith,
reductio n gear (if any), brake(s) and winding drum or
sheave, by which the lift car is ra ised or lowered.
2.1.40 L~fi Pit - The space in the lift well below the
level of the lowest lift landing served.
2.1.41 Lift Well - The unobstruc ted space within an
enclosure provided for the vctiical movement of the
li ft car(s) and any counterweig ht(s), including the lift
pit and the space for top clearance.
2.1.42 L(/i Well Enclosure - A ny structure which
separates the lift well from its sunoundings.
2.1 .43 Operation - The method of actuating the control
of lift machine.
2.1.43.1 Automatic operation- A method of operation
in which by a momentary activation of a call button the
lift car is set in motion and caused to stop automatically
at any required lift landing.
2.1.43.2 Non-selec tive collective automatic
operation - Au tomatic operati o n by m eans of one
7
)

)
) button in the car for each landing level served and one 2.1.43.6 Car switch operation- Method of operation
l
) button at each landing, wherein all stops registered by by which the movement oflift car is directly under the
the momentary actuation of landing or car buttons are operation of the attendant by means of a handle.
)
made irrespective of the number of buttons actuated or
2.1.43.7 Signal operation - Same as collective
) of the sequence in which the buttons are actuated. With
operation, except that the closing of the door is initiated
this type of operation, the car stops at all landings for
) by the attendant.
which buttons have been actuated making the stops in
) the order in which the landings are reached after the 2.1.43.8 Double. button (continuous pressure)
buttons have been actuated but irrespective of its operation- Operation by means ofbuttons or switches
direction of travel. in the car and at the landings any of which may be used
to control the movement of the car as long as the button
2.1.43.3 Selective collective automatic operation -
or switch is manually pressed in the actuating position.
Automatic operation by means of one button in the car
for each landing level served and by up and down buttons 2.1.44 Operating Device- A car switch, push button
at the landings, wherein all stops registered by the or other device employed to actuate the control.
momentary actuation of the car made as defined under
2.1.45 Overhead Beams - The members, usually of
non-selective collective automatic operation, but wherein
steel, which immediately support the lift equipment at
the stops registered by the momentary actuation of the
the top of the lift well.
landing buttons are made in the order in which the
landings are reached in each direction of travel after the 2.1.46 Over Speed Governor - An automatic device
buttons have be.en actuated. With this type of operation, which brings the lift car and/or counter weight to rest
all ' up' landing calls are answered when the car is by operating the safety gear in the event of the speed in
travelling in the up direction and all ' down' landing calls a descending direction exceeding a predetermined limit.
are answered when the car is travelling in the down
2.1.47 Passenger Lift - A lift designed for the transport
) direction, except in the case of the uppermost or
of passengers.
lowermost calls which are answered as soon as they are
) reached irrespective of the direction of travel of the car. 2.1.48 Position and/or Direction Indicator - A device
) which indicates on the lift landing or in the lift car or
2.1.43.4 Single automatic operation - Automatic
both, the position of the car in the lift well or the
) operation by means of one button in the car for each
·direction in which the lift car is travelling or both.
landing level served and one button at each landing so
arrapged that if any car or landing button has been 2.1.49 Rated Load (Lift) -The maximum load for
) actuated, the actuation of any other car or landing · which the lift car is designed and installed to carry safely
) operation button will have no effect on the movement at its rated speed.
of the car until the response to the first button has been
2.1.50 Rated Speed (Lift) - The mean of the maximum
completed.
speed attained by the lift car in the upward and
2.1.43.5 Group automatic operation - Automatic downward direction with rated load in the lift car.
) operation of two or more non-attendant lifts equipped
2.1.51 Retiring Cam - A device which prevents the
with power-operated car and landing doors. The
landing doors from being unlocked by the lift car unless
operation of the cars is coordinated by a supervisory
it stops at a landing.
operation system including automatic dispatching
) means whereby selected cars at designated dispatching 2.1.52 Roping Multiple- A system of roping where,
points automatically close their doors and proceed on in order to obtain a multiplying factor from the machine
) their trips in a regulated manner. to the car, multiple falls of rope are nm around sheave
) on the car or counterweight or both. It includes roping
Typically, it includes one button in each car for each
anangement of 2 to I, 3 to I, etc.
floor served and up and down buttons at each landing
(single buttons at terminal landings). The stops set up 2.1.53 Safety Gear - A mechanical device attached to
)
by the momentary actuation of the car buttons are made the lift car or counterweight or both, designed to stop
) automatically in succession as a car reaches the and to hold the car or counterweight to the guides in
) corresponding landings irrespective of its direction of the event of free fall, or, if governor operated, of over-
travel or the sequence in which the buttons are actuated. speed in· the descending direction. Any anticipated
) The stops set up by the momentary actuation of the impact force shall be added in the general drawing or
) landing buttons may be accomplished by any lift in the layout drawing.
group, and are made automatically by the first available
) 2.1.54 Service Lift- A passenger cum goods lift meant
car that approaches the landing in the corresponding
to can·y goods along with people.
direction.
)

)
8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6

!
I
 )
)
NOTE- Typica lly in an office building this may be required 2.2.2 Acceleration- Rate of change of z-axis velocity,
to carry food or stationeries, in a residential building to carry
attributed .to lift motion control. )
luggage or accommodate a stretcher and in a hotel to be used
for food trolleys or baggage. There is a need in such lifts, to 2.2.3 Axis of Measurement - Orthogonal reference )
take care of the dimensions of the car and the door clear axes for the measurements as follows:
openi ng in line with the type of goods that may have to be )
carried based on mutual discussion between the supplier and a) X-axis - Axis perpendicular to the plane of )
the customer. Also, such lifts shall have buffer railings in the car fro nt door (that is back to front),
the car at suitable height to prevent damage to the car panels )
w hen the goods are tran sported . Typically such lift s, if b) Y-axis - Axis perpendicular to X and Z (that
provided with a n a utomatic door, may use some means to is side to s ide), and
detect trolleys and stretcher movement in advance to protect
the doors agains t damage. The car floor load calcu lations c) Z-axis- Axis perpendicular to the car floor )
and car area of such a lift is as in the case of a passenger lift (that is vertical). )
except that these are not meant to carry heavy concentrated
loads . 2.2.4 Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (LAeq) - )
Average A-weighted sound pressure leve l, using
2.1.55 Sh eave - A rope wheel, the rim of w hich is )
frequency weighting A and time weighing 'fast',
grooved to receive the suspension ropes but to which
determined within defined boundaries. )
the ropes are not rigidly attached and by means of which
power is transmitted from the lift machine to the 2.2.5 Jerk- Rate of change of z-axis acceleration, )
suspension ropes. attributed to li ft motion control. It is expressed in metre
)
per second cube (m/s 3).
2.1.56 Slack Rope Switch - Switch provided to open )
the control circuit in case of s lackening of rope(s). NOTE - The passenger perception of vertical ride quality
during jerk is represented by the assessment of vertical vibration )
2.1.57 Suspension Ropes - The ropes by w hich the during non-constant accele ration.
car and counter weight are suspended. )
2.2.6 Lift Ride Quality - Sound levels in the car, and
2.1.58 Terminal Slow-Down Switch - A switch when vibration of the car floor, relevant to passenger )
actuated shall compulsorily cut off the high speed and perception, associated with lift motion. )
switch on the circuitry to run the lift in levelling speed 2.2.7 Peak to Peak Vibration Levels - Sum of the
before reaching on terminal land ings. )
magnitudes of two peaks of o pposite s ign separated by
2.1.59 Terminal Stopping Switch Normal- Switch a s ingle zero crossing. )
for cutting off all the energizing current in case of 2.2.8 Sound - A-weighted sound pressure level )
car travelling beyond the top or bottom terminal measured in decibels (dB).
land ing or a switch that cuts off the energizing current >I
2.2.9 Sound Pressure Level (Lp.A) - Ten times the

~I
so as to bring the car to a stop at the top or bottom
terminal landing level in the respective direction of logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of the square of
trave l. the sound pressure measured (p A) to the square of the
reference sound pressure (p0). )
2.1.60 Terminal Stopping Device Final- A device
w hich automatically causes the power to be removed Lr.A = 10 log (pA 2/p 02) dBA )
NOTE -The reference sound pressure level (p0 ) is 20 J!Pa
from an electric lift driv ing machine motor and brake, )
(2 x 10 5 Pa). The measured sound pressure, pA, is in Pasca ls,
independent of the functio ning of the normal terminal ·using freque ncy weighting A.
stopping device, the operating device or any emergency )
tenninal stopping device, after the car has passed a 2.2.10 V95- Value of velocity within defined
tcrminallanding. boundaries or limits, in which 95 percent of observed
values fa ll. This value is used statistically to estimate
2.1.61 Total Headroo111 - The vetiical distance from typical levels.
the level of the top lift landi ng to the bottom of the
machine room s lab. 2.2 .11 Velocity - Rate of c h ange of z-ax is
) '
displacement, attributed to lift motion control.
2.1.62 Tra vel - The vertical d istance between the )
bottommost and topmost lift land ings served by the lift. 2.2.12 Vibration - Variatio n with tim e of the
) :
magni tude of acceleration, when the magnitude is
i
2.2 Terms Relating to Performance Requirements alternately g reater and smaller than a reference level. ) r
for Lifts It is expressed in m/s 2 . j
2.2.1 A95- Values of accelerati on or vibration within
defined boundaries or limits, in which 95 percent of
observed values fall. This value is used statistically to
2.3 Terms Relating to Planning and .Design of Lifts
2.3.1 Door Closing Time (tc) - Time period measured
)I·
) I

estimate typical levels. from the instant that car doors start to close until !he
doors are locked.

PART 8 BU ILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 9

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
2.3.2 Door Opening 7ime {!,,) Time period measured
from the mstant that car doors start to open unti I they
arc open 800 mm.
2.3.3 Door-to-Door Time ( T)- Time period measured
from the mstant that car doors start to close to the instant
that thc car door~ arc open 800 mm at the next adjacent
floor.
2.3.4 llandling Capacity (HC) - The number of
passengers that a htt system can theoretically transport
during the up-peak traffic condition with car occupancy
of 80 percent of the actual capacity expressed as a
percent of the total building population.
2.3.5/nterm/ (/iVT)- Time period between successive
car arrivals at the main terminal floor with cars loaded
to any value.
2.3.6 Nominal Traw.>l Time (NTT)- The nominal travel
time is dctined as the time it would take to run a distance
of the total tra\ cl at the rated speed of the lift without
takmg into account the acceleration and deceleration
of the car or the intermediate stops of real runs.
2.3.7 Pa\senger Arrival Rate- Percentage of a
building's population arri\ing \Vi thin a 5 min period.
2.3.8 Passenger Average Transfer Time (tp)- A\erage
period of ttme required for a single passenger to enter
or leave the lift car.
2.3.9 Passenger Average Waiting Time (Awn -
A\ erage period of time from the instant a passenger
registers a landing call or joins a queue, until the
responding lift begins to open its doors at the boarding
floor. AWT 1s not the same as INT.
2.3.10 Round Trip Time (RTn - The average time
taken by a single lift to make a trip from the main
terminal back to the main terminal, starting from the
time the car doors open at the main terminal until the
car doors re-open at the main terminal after serving all
demand along the v.. ay.
2.3.11 Single Floor Flight Time Un)- Period of time
measured from the instant that the car doors are locked
until the lift is le\Cl at the next adjacent floor.
2.3.12 Single Floor Tran~it Ttme (tJ- Period of time
rcquirl!d to transit two adjacent floors at rated speed.
2.3.13 Sh Lobh1•- A ~ky lobby is the main floor
for local groups 111 the upper part of a \ery tall
build mg.
2.4 Terms Relating to Seismic Operation of Lifts
2.4.1 De\ign Acn•/eration (a11 ) - The horizontal
ucccl!!rat10n to be used for calculation of forces
(moment-; act111g on lift ... ystcms and an sing from
scism1c C\'Cnts ).
tO
NO I J I he value of ( o4 ) shall h~.: ohtamcd by the lift
manul.tcturu from the huddmj! envmc~.:r ~tructural engmecr
2.4.2 'Vormal Operation Operation mode m whtch
the lift performs\\ hen not m setsmic mode or m scism 1c
stand-b) mode.
2.4.3 Retaining Delice - Mechanical device securely
fixed to a structural member of the lift car
counterweight frame designed to retain the lift car and'
counterweight within its gUJde rails during seismic
activity.
2.4.4 Seismic Mode- Special mode in which the hft
operates after detection of seismic trigger level.
2.4.5 Seivmic Stand-By Mode- Special mode in which
the lift operates after detection of primary earthquake
wave without the activation of the seismic detection
system.
2.4.6 Seismic Trigger Level - Seismic acceleration
which is used to activate a seismic detection system.
2.4.7 Snag Point The point of interference between
flexible clements (for example, ropes. chains. travelling
cable, etc) and fixed elements (for example. by guide
rail brackets. guide rail clip bolts, fishplates. vanes.
and stmilar de\ ICes).
2.5 Terms Related to Maintenance of Lifts
2.5.1 Competent Maimenance Person- Designated
person. suitably trained, qualified by knowledge and
practical experience, prO\ ided with necessary
instructions and supported within their maintenance
organization to enable the required maintenance
operations to be safely carried out.
2.5.2 Installation - Completely installed passenger
lift or good passenger lift or accessible goods only lit!
or service I i ft.
2.5.3 Installer Natural or legal person who ta~es
respons1bihty for the design, manufacture, installatiOn
and placing on the market of litls.
2.5.4 .\-laintcnunce Organi=tllion- Compan) or part
·
of company where competent mamtenanc e person(::.)
·
carry out maintenance operation on behalfof the 0 '' ncr
of the 111stallat ion
3 GE:\ER\L
3.1 Conformit~ nith Lifts Act and Rules
b arned out Ill
3.1.1 The installation ~hall gcncrall) e c the' are
. h I .1·rt / f cts an d Rtlfe,· · ''here' er .
. \\11
con fonmty
in force
, of th•'
· .,. 0 fthc 0" 11 "'r
3.1.2 It i~ the rcspon~1b1 Jty . ,d to obtaiO
1
pn.:nHscs v. here th~, 1'1f't '" 1II be Jllsta l. c •b ·fon: an d
.
ncccs..,ary lwnn1sston r·rom the Authont) "'
, f 1'01 \2016
' \ 110' \I Bl II l)l'iG ('()J)t. 0
~
) 1
) after the installation of lifts and for subsequent
(
) operation of lifts.
) 3.1.3 A licence fo r public use is a safety provision,
issued by state authorities under Lijis Acts and rules
) wherever they are in force, and shall be obtained as
) per the laid down statutory requirement.
) shall be appropriately designed and protected
3.2 Conformity with Tlte Electricity Act, 2003 and
) Rules/Regulations Thereunder
) All electrical work in connection with installation of
lifts s hall be carri ed out in accordance wi th the
) depending on speed, stops/travel height and
provisions of The Indian Electricity Act, 2003 as
) ame nded up-to -d a te along w ith the rules a nd
regulations framed thereunder and shall also compl y
}
with the othe r provisions of Part 8 'Building Services,
) Section 2 Electrical and Allied Install ati ons' of the
Code.
) 3.3 Conformity with Indian Standards
All m ate ri a ls, fittings , appliances, etc, used in
:t e lectrical installation shall confonn to Indian Standard
s pecification s wherever these ex is t. In case of
materials for which Indian Standard specifications do
not exist, the ma terials shall be app roved by the
competent authority. For de ta iled specification for
li fts, reference shall be made to accepted standards
(8-5A(2)].
) cleaning, lubrication, adjustment and adequate
3.4 Conformity to Accessibility Requirements
A ll I i fts ins ta lled for public use shall meet th e
) access ibility requirements in acco rdance w ith 13
) of Part 3 'Development Control Rules and General
Building Requirements' of the Code.
3.5 Conformity with Fire Regulations
The installation shall be carried out in conformity with
Part 4 'Fire and Life Safety' of the Code and the state
fire acts/ local fire regulations, wherever they arc in
force.
3.6 Considerations for Selection of Lifts
) The considerati ons for selectio n of lifts shall be based
) on the follow ing criteria:
J a) Intended use o.flift- The number of lifts and
the ir capaciti es ( that is, load and s peed)
required for a given building shall be sui tably
dec ided to meet the intended requirement. The
passenger lifts s hall meet the requirements of
handlin g capac ity an d wait ing t ime fo r
) passenger, depending o n the lift's expected
usage and building type.
)
b) System pe1jomwnce - System perfo rmance
c rite ri a s hall be based o n bu il ding type
)
)
PART 8 BUILDI NG SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTA LLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND
) MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
(res idential, commercial, hotel, hospital, etc).
c) Accessibility requirements - see 3.4.
d) Environmental conditions - Lifts directly
exposed to atmospheric conditions, that is,
weather (for example, those meant for external
applications), or any other adverse cond ition
for that particular condition.
e) Type ofmain drive for l(ft- Wh ether electric
trac tion, geared or gearless or hydraulic
capacity requirement.
f) Civil engineering requirements - Machinery
location that is, machinery to be located in
machi ne room or machinety to be kept inside
lift well thereby e liminating conventiona l
machine room.
g) Seismic considerations- Whether the lift is
to be protected against se ismic forces or
whether the lift is to be rescued to a landing
on detection of earthquake or both.
3.7 Maintenance
The considerations relating to maintenance shall be as
fq llows:
a) The lift in stallation s hall rece ive regular
servicing by au thorized competent persons at
such intervals as per type of equipment and
frequency of service demand. It is desirable
and normal for the lift supplier to be entrusted
with the servicing during the guarantee period
of new li ft.
b) In order that the lift installatio n is maintained
at all times in a safe condition, a proper
maintenance schedule shall be drawn up in
consu ltation with the lift manufacturer and
ri gidly fol lowed. The provision of a log book
to record all items relating to general servicing
and inspection is recommended for a ll li fts.
c) Any acc ide nt ari s ing out o f operation or
maintenance of the lifts shall be du ly reported
to the authority in accordance with the ru les
laid down.
d) Lifts are required by statu tory regul ations to
be examined at regular intervals as s pecified
by lift acts, by a competent person.
e) The company entrusted w ith maintenance
contract shall have val id licence to main ta in
the lifts. The persons assigned for mai ntenance
work sha ll be app ropriately qualified and
experi enced as required by Lift Acts and Rules.
11

3.8 Energy Efficiency and Sustainability
Design options like space restrictions, reliability and
safety, riding comfort have been the major market and
technological driver. The following should be
encouraged for reducing power consumption and
promoting sustainability in buildings.
a) Energy efficient a.c. variable voltage variable
frequency (VVVF) motor drive or equivalent.
Lifts with 1-speed and 2-speed motor control
are not recommended for passenger lifts
because of high power consumption, poor
passenger comfort and tripping hazard.
b) When the lift has answered the last call and
stopped at a landing and no futiher landing
call is registered, the car and landing doors
shall close. If there is no further landing call
after pre-determined period but not less than
90 s, the light and fan inside the car shall both
be automatically switched off. Car lights and
fan shall switch on automatically before the
lift doors start to open or the lift is set in
motion.
c) Under normal operating status, at least one
lift car of a lift bank shall operate under a
standby or sleep mode during off-peak period
when the traffic demand on the vertical
transportation system is low. During low
demand periods, even completely shutting
down one or more lifts within a group can be
a good energy sav ing option, without
compromising quality of service.
d) Where a number of lifts are installed together,
their controls are interconnected to optimize
their operation. By efficiently delivering
passengers with the least amount of trips, statts
and stops, the energy consumed is significantly
reduced.
e) Energy saving LED lamps for car lighting in
place of conventional lamps.
f) Gearless type machines to reduce transmission
losses.
g) Improvement in total power factor of the
motor drive of a lift at the isolator connecting
lift to the building's e lectrical supply circuit.
h) Regenerative drives to recycle energy rather
than wasting it as heat. The regenerated energy
may be used for charging batteries, staircase
-lighting, lobby lighting, etc.
j) Use of hig h effic iency motors s uch as
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors, or
Induction motors having minimum efficiency
c lass equi vale nt to IE2 a s per accepte d
standard [8-5A(3)].
12
)
i
k) Adoption of materials and practices that are
)
environmentally friendly and sustainable shall
be promoted. )
4 PLANNING AND DESIGN GUIDELINES )
)
4.1 The planning guidelines, design considerations, and
precautions to be exercised during design of passenger )
and goods lifts operated by electric traction are
provided hereunder. Manufacturer may be consulted
for other types of lifts such as hydraulic, home, 1
automobile lifts, etc. )
Design oflifts necessarily calls for coordination among )
various parties concerned, namely the client, the
)
architect/engineer, the consulting engineers and the lift
manufacturer. These guidelines give the information ).
from the stage of planning till the design that should be ) '
exchanged between parties. It is essential that all the
parties involved in the planning should have a clear )
understanding of the basis and the theory of planning. )
All parties involved need to recognize that it is highly
impractical to correct badly planned lifts in a building )
as no changes can be carried out to the building core, if )
the number of hoist-ways is inadequate or of wrong ) l
size or wrongly positioned.
)
These provisions spec ify requirements for the
architects/engineers, builders/ developers and tenderers )'
while finalizing specification of lifts. Two bas ic ) I
considerations, namely, the quantity of service required
and the quality of service desired, determine the number
and type of lifts to be provided in a particular building. )
The quantity of service factor, that is, how many people
) .
might use the lift system over a defined period oftime
is represented by the handling capacity. The quality of )
service factor, that is, how well the lift system deals )
with its passengers is represented by passenger waiting
time and lobby queuing. These factors are interrelated )
and depend, among other things, on the type ofbuilding )
and its use and on the type of occupier. Both these
)
factors require proper study into the character of the
building, extent and duration of peak periods, frequency )
of service required, type and method of control, type
of landing doors, etc.
Figure 1 shows the flow chati to arrive at a reasonable
vetiical transportation solution for a building. )
The adequacy of the lift group in a building is a major )
contributing factor to the success or failure of a
building. Users of lifts would be intolerant of long
)
queues apd long waiting times. The planning and
selection of the vertical transportation equipment is a )
specialized activity. Although the basic calculations are
relatively simple, the theory on which they are based is
complex. The difficulty in planning a lift installation is )
not only in calculating its probable performance but
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
~
)
)
. l also in estimating the passenger demand and usage This Subsection defines the calculation approach for
I ) patterns. The architect/engineer doing the planning conventional two button dispatching and does not
) work should establish the lift system at a very early define ca lculation methods for destination control
stage in consultation with the lift manufacturer/ systems or hybrid systems. It also does not define an
) consulting engineer and not after the rest of the building approach to simulation methods as consensus on how
) has been designed. to apply simulation has not been established.
)
)
)
TYPE AND LOCATION OF BUILDING
~--------l -NUMBER OF FLOORS
- FLOOR PLANS
- TOTAL POPULATION

SET THE TA RGET PARAMETERS AS PER THIS CODE AND

THE R ELEVANT INDIAN STANDARD (HANDLING CAPACITY,
) INTERVAL, AVERAGE W AITING TIME, AVERAGE TRANSIT
TIM E, ETC)
)
.···=" -,

)
)

)
OPTION TO M EET THE TARGET
) t-._---i HANDLING CAPACITY AND INTERVAL

SIMULATION TO DECIDE OPTIMUM OPTION TO M EET THE

TARGET AVERAGE WA ITING TIME AND AVERAGE T RANSIT TIME

)
)
)
O PTIMUM DES IGN INCLUDING FACTORS LIKE NUMBER OF
) LIFTS, SPEED, CAPACITY, GROUPING, DISPATCH CONTROL

VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION DESIGN PARAMETERS [LOCATION

OF HOISTWAY(S), OVERHEAD PIT, MACHINE ROOM DETAILS,
FIRE LIFT, PROTECT ED LOBBIES]

)
)
)
F IG. 1 T YP ICAL FLOWCHART ON PR ELIM INARY DESIGN OF L IFTS

)
PART 8 BU ILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 13
) MOVING WA LKS: SA LIFTS
)
 )
4.2 PreUminary Lift Planning used, and is outlined in 4.2.2 to 4.2.10 as a general
approach to lifting. )
4.2.1 Two models can be used for lift traffic analysis
and design: Subsequently, traffic conditions other than up peak are )
examined as also building types other than office. It is )
a) The first mode l uses a calculation method
recommended that calculations based on the classical
based on mathematical formulae. This )
model should be carried out in order to obtain an
classical model uses the p ure up-peak )
understanding of the various factors. A simulation may
condition as this provides a wel l-defined,
then be performed in order to cover special situations
simple traffic pattern amenable to
or to obtain information not provided by the calculation
mathematical analysis. These calculations can h
method. I
be carried out manually, using a spreadsheet
)
or by using computer based programme. 4.2.2 Population
)
b) The second model is based on discrete digital T he first point to be ascertained from the owner/
simulation of the movement of lifts in a developer or proposed occupier is the total building )
building and the passenger dynamics. This population. If a definite population figure is not )
simulation mode l allows very complex available, then an estimation should be made using floo r
situations to be analyzed and is generally areas, more specifically, the net usable area (NUA). )
capable of better evaluations. However, The NUA excludes circulation areas (stairs, corridors, )
simulation approaches and algorithms vary foyers, etc), structural intrusions (columns, ducts, etc) ) ;
wi th software ranging from crude to very and facilities (pantry, kitchens, toilets, conference
sophisticated. With the varied approaches and rooms, training rooms, server rooms, storage areas, etc). >'
lack of consensus on simulation approaches )
The number of people occupying the net usable area
and how to apply simulation this standard does
can vary according to the usage pattern or building type. )'
not define standards for simulation.
Because of the criticality of establishing the population,
Generally, if a lift system (using a conventional landing it is recommended that the architect/engineer should )
call system) is sized correctly for the up-peak traffic prepare a rypical test fit to establish an estimate of the )
pattern, all other traffic patterns should be adequately population. The test fit estimates can be validated from
served. The notable exceptions to this, are: population counts from buildings with similar usage
)
patterns and types. )
1) Hotels where check-in/check-out clashes with
meal times; The designers need to understand the clear circulation )
2) Hospitals; and movement pattern of the occl!nants (and goods) of ) .
3) Buildings that open at specified times a building and design to facil itate the circulation and
movement. Table 1 gives typical values fo r the density )
(Example, stock exchanges, movie theatres,
stadiums); of population. )
4) Buildings with 24x7 operation and shift )
Table 1 Occupancy Area Pet· Person in Office
changes (Example, BPO/ITES buildings);
Buildings )
5) Buildings with amenities located at higher
(Clause 4.2.2) )
floors (Examp le, roof top restau rant,
cafeterias, health clubs); Sl Building Open Plan/ Cellular Pla n/
No. Type Hall Seating Cabins )'
6) Residential buildings (sometimes two-way
(I) (2) (3) (4) )
traffic is considered);
2
7) Buildings with multiple entry levels; i) Premium 10m 12m2 )
ii) Regular 8m2 10m2
8) Parking towers; iii) Low end 5 m2 8 m2 )
9) Schools where students c hange floors or )
buildings at the beginning and end of classes; For cettain specialized building functions such as BPO,
and areas ranging fro m 6 m 2 to I 0 m2 per person may be
10) Mixed-use buildings. considered. )

Methods of calculating the traffic handling capabilities 4.2.3 Quantity of Sen,ice )

of lifts were first devised for office buildings. In due
It is measured in tetms ofthe total number of passengers
course detailed modifications were devised to suit other
handled during the peak 5 min period of the day. This )
applications without altering the basic principles. The
is calculated by determining the number of trips made
application to office buildings is the most frequently )
by the lifts over the peak 5 min period and then
)
14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016 )
J.
)
 multiplying it by the average number of passengers Table 4 Recommended Quality.of Service
canied in each trip. The target handling capacity as a in Office ·Buildings (Based on Average
percentage of the building population is usually the Waiting Time)
estimated value of passenger atTival rate for the 5 min (Clause 4.2.4)
up-peak period. The minimum recommended quantity
SI Class of Building Average Waiting Time
of service is given in Table 2. No. s
This would vary depending on various factors like (I) (2) (3)
starting time (fixed or flexi-time), nearness to fast i) Premium <25
ii) Regular 25 to 35
access routes like mass rapid transport systems, express
ways, major roads, etc.
4.2.5 Traffic Analysis Equations
Table 2 Recommended Quantity of Service in
The classical method to size a lift installation requires
Office Buildings
the determination of the time, in second, that it takes
(Clause 4.2.3)
for a single lift to make a round trip around the building
Sl Type of Occupancy Quantity of Service during the up-peak traffic condition. This is called the
No. Percent round trip time and is given by:
(I) (2) (3)
RTT=2Ht. +(S+I)(T-tJ+2Ptr
i) Multi tenancy 10 to 15
ii) Single tenancy .15 to 25 where
N number of floors above main terminal floors,
4.2.4 Quality of Service
H average highest reversal floor
It is very difficult to get real indi<?ations of passenger
N- 1
waiting time ancl lobby queuing from the classic
calculation models. Therefore, interval is considered =N-L(iiN/,
i=l

n
as the measure. During pure up-peak traffic, the interval
or the average time between successive atTivals of the ·S = average no of stops

~N[t-(1-;
lift cars at the main lobby is generally considered as an
indicator of passenger waiting time. Table 3 gives the
..'
)
quality of service based on interval.
P average passengers canied
~ If interval is used as an indicator of quality of service,
it should be noted that passenger average waiting time 0.8 x maximum actual car capacity,
)
:) depends on the car occupancy, the handling capacity
vis-a-vis the passenger alTival rates, the control systems,
tv single floor transit time = average inter floor
distance/rated speed,
) etc. The average waiting time approximates 75 percent
T door operating time Ctc+t0 ) + single floor
to 85 percent of the interval for average car occupancy
'> of 80 percent of the actual li ft capacity provided the
flight time t 1( I), and
) handling capacity is equal to or better than the peak tP = passenger transfer time.
) arrival rate. Beyond 80 percent car loading passenger The derivation of the round trip time equation assumes
average waiting time increases exponentially and the following:
)
cannot be approximated from interval. Table 4 gives
a) Traffic pattern co!Tesponds to a pure up-peak.
) the recommended quality of service measured as
average waiting time. b) Passengers arrive according to a rectangular
probability distribution.
Table 3 Recommended Quality of Service in c) Lifts, on an average, fill to 80 percent of the
Office Buildings (Based on Interval) actual car capacity by numbers irrespective
(Clause 4.2.4) of the weight of each passenger or the space
that maybe occupied
Sl Quality of Service Interval
} No. s
d) All floors are equally populated.
)
(I) (2) (3) e) Rated speed is achieved in a single floor jump.
i) Excellent Less than 25 f) Interfloor heights are equal.
) ii) Very good 25 to less than 30
iii) Good 30 to less than 35 g) Door d we ll time does not exceed the
iv} Fair 35 to less than 40 calculated passenger transfer time.
v) Poor 40 to less than 45
vi) Unsatisfactory 45 and above
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 15
) MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
In ten a!. !NT R IT l. where l is the number oflirts 4.2.9 Configura/lOll of Lifts: /,ayout
1n a smglc group. The shape and SI/C of a passenger lift car bears a d1stinct
300 " P x L x I00 t Population relat1on to 1ts etlicJcncy in traffic handlmg. A ~tudy of
5 min handling -
capacity, IIC RTT the most suitable proportions for passenger lifts reveals
that the width of the lift well entrance is the basic
or clement in the dctcrrnmauon of the best proportions.
300 x P x I 00 Population In other words, the w1dth of the car is determined by
the width of the entrance and the depth of the car 15
/NT
regulated by the loading per square metre permissible
The down peak round trip time is estimated as: under this standard.
RTT.Jo,mrw:o~. = Nt, + (0.5S + I)(T -t,) + 2Ptr Centre opening doors are the most practicable and the
most efficient entrance units for passenger lifts. Given
The mid-day round trip time is estimated as: the same door speed, the centre opening is much faster
RTTm,d...t•) =2Ht, + 2S(T -t, )+4Ptr than the side opening type. For passenger lifts, w1der
cars arc preferred as the ingress and egress efficiency
An estimation of intcrfloor performance can be is higher. For service/freight! stretcher lifts deeper cars
obtained using: ~
are preferred, so as to easily carry the stretcher/goods.
While sizing the hoist-ways, the possible construction
A WT
•n•<rll<><w
= /NT
urpcak
+ 0.22 + I. 78 A.nC...-rflOt•
H inaccuracies have to be considered. Further where high
urpc:ol speeds lifts arc being considered the hoist-ways need
where Amter11oor is the. number of passengers arriving to be designed to address the impact of the wind tunnel
during the interfloor period. effect.
4.2.6 Configuration of Lijis: Number
4.3 Planning for Sp ecific Building Features
Determination of number of lifts depends on the
required quality and quantity of service. It should be 4.3.1 Special Building Facilities
noted here that grouping oflifts and location should be Facilities like cafeteria, food courts, restaurants,
given adequate attention. gymnasia, etc, in the building impact the circulation
If a bank of two lifts or more is required to meet the patterns in a building and should be considered for lift
anticipated traffic requirements, they have to be traffic design.
oriented to facilitate grouping. Individual lifts will not
achieve the required quantity and quality of service. 4.3.2 Basement Service
4.2.7 Configuration of Lifts: Capacity Buildings are sometimes designed with car parks or
Determination of car capacity depends on the required other faci lities at basement levels below the terminal
quality and quantity of service. A larger car, while floor. Such floors, if they are served by the mam lifts
improving the handling capacity might adversely impact have an adverse impact on the up-peak, down-peak and
the quality of service. mid-day traffic patterns. During up-peak conditions,
4.2.8 Configuration ofLijts: Speed this may cause lifts to arrive at the main terminal already
In addition to the speeds derived from the calculations partly full causing confusion. In such a situation people
for handling capacity and interval, the nominal travel time have a tendency to push both up and down buttons
is used for selecting suitable rated spa.-ds. The higher the resulting into deterioration of the lift service.
building. the faster lifts arc needed. The recommended
1f basement floors are served by only a part of a l"ft 1
values for nominal travel time in case of an office,
group, passengers experience difficulty in selecting the
commercial or hotel building are given in Table 5. correct lifts out of a group that will serve the basement.
Table S Recommended Nominal Travel It is therefore better to provide basement service to the
5035
Time for Office, Commercial or main lobby by a separate group of ·shuttle' lifts
. capabJhl)
Hotel Buildings to avoid compromising the traffic han dl mg
(Clause 4.2.8) of the main lift group.
Sl Lnel Nomln1l Tr nel Time 4.3.3 Multiple Entry Le1•els
No. I . t more than
tI) (2) Some buildings haH! main entl) pollltS a at 1s
nain tcnnln
one level. The effect of more than one 1 Jauon
1) EJO;cellem 15 to 25 . tli
disrupttve and adverse!\. Impacts c c ctin: ctrcu .... ncc
ne en1"'
II)
Ill) Sattsfa.:IOI)
-.. 25 l<l 35
'>)5h>45
•
and movement. 1f there arc more than °
• Of I' DJ \2016
16 1\-\TI ONAL BUILDI' G CO DE
-r
I levels, means should be provided to bring all the routes zoning, a tall building is effect ively divided into )
r
)
')

! to a single terminal floor. If this is not possible, then horizontal layers or stacks. RTT, quality and quantity

I the lift system planning should take into account the

extra times incurred stopping and loading at multiple
of service can be an·ived at separately for each zone.
The desired level of service can be attained by adjusting )
I entry floors. Another difficulty is in deciding whether
the building population will usc each entrance equally.
two parameters in this case- the number of lifts and
the number of floors in the zone. The round trip time
In the absence of any guidance, the solution is to assume for each zone is given by:
an entrance bias with an additional tO percent and size
RTT = 2Htv + (S + 1) (T - tv)+ 2PtJl+2[texprcss- f~ l ))
th e li fts to meet the additional required handling
capacity.
The loss of lift efficiency because of multiple entry
where t express is the fl ight time from the main terminal
to the express zone terminal/sky lobby. ) '
levels could be as high as 15 percent per additional The round trip time for shuttle lifts serving only )
entry level. Both basement service and multiple entry 2 floors - main termi nal and sky lobby is given by: )
leve l buildings with lifts serving all floors also can
impact the security of the building. )
RTT= 2T+2Ptp
4.3.4 Non-Smoking Buildings )
4.4 Planning For Specific Building Types
When buildings are defined as non-smoking buildings, )
4.4.1 Residential Buildings
designers need to factor in the additional load put on )
the lifts on account of the additional trips that smokers The peak traffic condition occurs during the morning )
make to go outside the building. It is appropriate to down-peak when many adults and children are leavi ng
provide pressurized smoking zones at the fl oor level for work and sc hool at the same time. Popu lation )
rather than require smokers to make additional trips. assumptions would also need to consider the service )
staff, drivers of cars, etc. For high rise buildings the
4.3.5 Reserved Lijis )
deli very of newspapers and mi lk and di sposal of
When Iifts have to be reserved for V lP personal garbage are also required to be considered. )
movement, designers should not consider these lifts as
part of the lift group.
In the luxury housing segment, where the number of )
ratio of service staff to residents is fa irly high, separate )
4.3.6 Zo ning (Ver ticaf)/ Sky Lobbies in Ve1y Taft service lifts may be requi red for door deliveries and
Bu ifdings service staff. Typical average daily population for a )
residential building is given in Table 6. )
As the number of floors served increases, the values of
H and S also increase, adversely impacting the round The passenger handling capacity shall be as given in )
trip time and performance of the lift system. This has Table 7. The intervals shall be as per v~ lues in Table 8.
led to the concept of zoning in tall bui ldings. In stacked )
Table 9 gives the recommended qua lity of service
)
)
Table 6 Typical Average Population for Residential Buildings
(Clause 4.4.1) )
)
Sl Type of Apartment Number of Bedrooms Per Apartment
No. )
3 With 4 With or
2 3
Se1vant Quarters Without Se1vant Qum1ers )
( I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7}
)
i) Hi gh end apa11ments:
a) Residents 2 to 3 3 to4 5 5 5 to 6 )
b) Resident service staff 0 0 0 I I
c) Floating se1v ice staff I 2 to 3 3 to4 3 to4 4 to 5 )
ii) Mid end apartments: )
a) Residents 3 4 5 5 5 to 6
b) Resident service staff 0 0 0 I I )
c) Floating service staff I I 2 to 3 2 to3 3 to 4
)
iii) Low end apartments:
a) Residents 4 to 5 5 to 6 NA NA NA )
b) Floating service staff 0.5 0.5 NA NA NA
NOTE - Unless separate lifis are provided for service staff, due consideration for scJvicc staff shall be given whi le calcu lating the J
required number of lifts. ·
)

PART 8 BU ILDING SERVIC ES - SECTION 5 INSTA LLATION OF LIFTS, ESCA LATORS AND 17 )
MOVING WALJ<S: SA Li fTS )
)
 )
)
measured as average waiting time for residential 4.4.2 Hosp itals
buildings and Table 10 gives the nominal travel times.
) Factors to be considered include number of staff and
Sizing of lifts should consider the requirement to shift shift patterns, number of visitors and v isiting hours,
the stretchers, heavy material, etc and it is recommended location of operation theatres, facilities, delivery of
that at least one lift in each building should be a deep housekeeping supplies, waste disposal, evacuation
car whic h can accommodate a regular ambulance procedures and segregation of sterile areas. When
stretcher. carrying out traffic analysis for hospitals, designers
should consider establishing average car loading by
Table 7 Recommended Handling Capacity for volume rather than by weight. Arrival rates may
)
Residential Buildings approximate 10 percent to 15 percent and interval may
) (Clause 4.4.1) be 30 s to 50 s.
) Handling Capacity The sizing of the lift car and doors should be such that
Sl O ass of Building
No. Percent a standard hospital stretcher and attendant can be easily
)
(I) (2) (3) accommodated. Where the hospital bed is likely to be
i) High end building >8 moved the lift car should be able to accom modate the
ii) Mid end building 6 to8
5 to 7 standard hospital bed including the auxiliary support
iii) Low end building
equipment like oxygen cylinders, etc.
In large hospitals it is recommended that the lifts for
Table 8 Recommended Quality of Service for the patients/hospital beds (o r stretchers) should be
) Residential Buildings separated from the li fts for staff/visitors . .
) (Based on Time Interval)
NOTE - For hospital buildings, designers should also consider
(Clause 4.4.1) that in an emergency a number of patients would require to be
)
evacuated on stretchers.
Sl 'Class of Building Interval
) s
No. 4.4.3 Hotels
) (1 ) (2) (3)
The most demanding time is during the check-in and
) i) High end building .5 60 check-out period and two-way traffic occurs during this
ii) Mid end building 61 to80
iii) Low end building 8 1 to 100 period with guests go ing to a nd from room s and
restaurants and in and out of the hotel. Calculations
should be made assuming an equal number of up and
Table 9 Recommended Quality of Service in down stops during this period. Average room occupancy
Residential Buildings may range from 1.5 to 2 persons and atTival rates from
)
(Based on Average Waiting Time) 10 to 15 percent. Security considerations need to be
) (Clause 4.4.1) taken into account whilst establishing the circulation
and lift requirements . Escalators should be employed
) Sl Class of Building Average W aiting Time
No. s for heavy short range movements such as from the lobby
(1) (2) ' (3) to banquet/ function level. Adequate number of service
i) High end building .5 30 lifts need to be provided for service movement of
ii) Mid end building 3 1 to 45 housekeeping and room serv ice staff as well as
) iii) Low end building 46 to60 movement of material.
)
4.4.4 Retail - Malls with Multiplexes
) Table 10 Recommended Nominal Travel Time Pedestrian movement in retail establishments like malls
) for Residential Buildings is generally centered on escalators, and lifts do not play
(Clause 4.4.1) a major part. However, provision should be made for
)
Sl Level Nominal Travel Time moveme nt o f s hopp ing tro lleys , w h eel cha irs,
No. s perambulators and persons with limited mobility from
(I) (2) (3) one level to another. A commonly applied solution is
)
i) High end building 25 to 35 the installation of inclined moving walks. Where lifts
) ii) Mid end building 36 to 45 are provided, assumptions of lift car sizing should take
iii) Low end bui lding 46 to 60
) into accou nt space occupied by trolleys and shopping
NOTE - In case of super lligh rise buildings considering limit
) bags. Where multiplexes are located on the upper floors,
of lift speed as 10 m/s, the travel time may be longer than
speci tied above. the last movie of the day gets over after the mall is
) closed at which time the escalators might not be
) available. In such cases the lift provision has to be

) 18 NATIONAL BUILDI NG CODE OF IND IA 201 6

)
 )'
)
)
adequate to handle the egress of the total multiplex 4.4.9 Buildings witlr 24 x 7 Operations )
population.
In buildings operating 24 x 7 (round the clock), the )
4.4.5 ;Ji!ports/Railway Statio/IS peak traffic conditions would not be a typical up peak
but will occur du ring shi ft changes. The handl ing )
While moving wa lks and escalators greatly improve
capacity should take into acco unt the incom ing as well )
the building circul ation, the use of lifts has to be
as outgoing traffic. Calculations shall be made assumi ng
considered for persons with limited mobility and for )
both up and down stops during this period. Particular
movement ofbaggagc trolleys from one level to another.
attention s hould be pa id wh ile designating the drop off )
The RTT equation of 4.2.5 may be used, but care may
points, these should be assigned to a level so as to not )
need to be taken in the assumptions of lift car occupancy
increase the burden on the system . Designers need to
levels taking into account space occupied by trolleys. )
consider that the lifts in such buildings would have a
4.4.6 Multi-Level Car Parking significantly higher number of starts/stops per hour than )
a conventional building.
Multi-level car parks may be standalone public car )
parks or attached to office, retail or res ident ial 4.4.1 0 ObservatOI )'
)
complexes. These car parks may be full y automated
The height at which the observato ry is located and the )
where dri vers would leave the cars inside or on a trolley
number of people expec ted at the observatory level
at the entry fl oor and the car is parked and retrieved )
shall decide the speed and the number of lifts. The
automatically. The other alternati ve would be for the
circulation logic is crucial in locating the observatory )
use of car lifts and/o r ramps.
lifts. Also, if the observatory is connected with lounge/
)
When the movement of the cars is dependent on car cafe/souvenir shops, etc, separate service lifts may need
lifts, detailed study has to be carried out to establish to be prov ided. )
the requi red number of car lifts ensuring that average
4.5 Other Considerations )
car retrieval/parking time docs not exceed 2 min. The
sizing of the car lifts has to be adequate to (it the largest Designers need to be aware that the door opening and )
vehic le that is intended to be transported as well as closing times, acceleration and deceleration times, etc, )
adequate space to enable openi;1g of the doors to enable would vary between the suppliers and equ ipment types
evacuation o f passengers in the eventua lity of an )
and can impact the overal l lift perfo rma nce. The
entrap ment. Designers w ill also need to take into dispatch algorithms and controller responses would also )
acco unt the probabili ty of queues deve loping and vary between the suppliers and the equipment types
provide for holding lanes. )
and can impact the actual operational results.
)
4.4. 7 Multi-Level Car Parlci11g Passe11ger Trqjlic Lifts wi ll breakdown as well req uire to be shut-down
for regular ma intenance and repa irs. Lift avail ability )
When car lifts or ramps are the means for parking the
cars, then means would need to be provided for the mi ght be hampered duri ng renovat ion o f the bui !ding )
movement of passengers from and to the parking floors. as a lift might be take n up for movement of material
)
If the main bui lding lifts a lso serve the parking floors, and debris. Designers should take into consideration
it is to be noted that, performance will be adversely the im pact of s uch non-availabi lity of lifts. The )
impacted due to multi ple entry fl oors. Additional entry provision of well-located and easi ly accessi ble stairs )
floors will also affect the security of the building. It is can considera bly lessen the demands on the lifts and
)
therefore recommended that separate li fts should be· therefore architect/engineer should consider this aspect
considered to move passengers. If separate park ing Iitts in the layo ut. )
are provided, the basic RTT equation of 4.2.5 may be 4.5.1 Liji Speed )
used. Average vehicle occupancy may be considered
as 1.5 per car for office car parks, 4 for airports and For pa ssenge r li fts in a building, the ge nera l )
retail and 2 elsewhere. recommendations as given in Table II may be followed. )
4.4.8 Schools and Other £dw..:ational !11.stitutions 4.5.2 Quiet Operation of L(fis )
In schools and other educational institutions, the traffic Every precaution shou ld be take n with passenger lifts )
flow would consist of peak demand for short duration to ensure quiet operation of the lift doors and machinc1y.
)
that would ex ist j ust before the start or after fini shing The insul ating of the lift mach ine and any motor
of a class or lectu re. It is unlikely that an economical generator from the floor by rubber cushions or by a )
so lution ca n be imp lemented for such hi gh peak precast concrete slab with rubbe r cushions, prevents )
requirements. Therefore the des ign of the building has trans miss ion of most of the noise. In this connection,
to be such that heavy stai r usage is faci litated. sec also good practice [8-5A(4)] and Part 8 'Bui lding
Services, Section 4 Acousl ics, Sound Insulati on and

PART 8 BU I LO I ~G SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLAT IO N OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 19 )

i\ IOV ING WALKS: 5.\ LIFTS

)
)
'
)

.
)
)
Noise Contro l ' of th e Code for some useful lifts necessary to give adequate lift service in
recommendations. the proposed building;
) b) Provision of adequate access to the mach ine
Table 11 Lift Speed room;
(Clause 4.5.1)
c) Loads which the lift will impose on the
Sl No. ofFloors Speed building structure, and the holes to be left in
No. m/s the machine room floor and cut-outs for wall
(I) (2) (3)
boxes for push-buttons and signals;
i) Upto6 0.6 to 1.0
d) Necess ity for and type of insulation to
ii) 7 to 15 1.0 to 1.5
iii) 16 to 20 1.5 to 1.75 minimize the transmission of vibration and
) iv) 21 to 30 1.75 to 2.5 noise to other parts of the building;
v) 31 to 45 3.0 to4.0
) 4.0 to 6.0
e) Special requirements of local authorities and
vi) 46 to 60
vii) Above 60 6.0 and above other requirements set out in the 'planning
) permit';
NOTES
) 1 Above table is considering buildings with average floor f) Need for the builder to maintain accuracy of
height of3.0 m. ·
2 For office buildings average floor height is 4.2 m building as to dimensions and in-plumb;
)
(see Table 5 and Table l 0). g) Periods of time required for preparation and
) 3 Finalizing the lift speed for any building depends on
detailed traffic analysis because number of floors, area per
approval of relevant drawings for
) floor, area per person and class of building are crucial manufacturing and the installation of the lift
factors, which serve as inputs for such traffic analysis. equipment;
) 4 Finalizing the speed for hotel depends on the number of
keys per floor and similarly for an observatory depends on h) Requirements for fixing guide brackets to the
the number of expected footfall. building structure;
5 For any building, the speed of the lifts will have to be
j) Time at which electric power will be required
validated against the total population and travel height of the
building. before completion to allow for testing;
k) Requirements for electrical supply feeders,
5 LIFT ARRANGEMENTS AND PLANNING etc;
.,
) DIMENSIONS m) Requirements for scaffolding in the lift well
The appropriate aspect of lift installation shall be and protection of the lift well prior to and
)
discussed during the preliminary planning of the during installation of equipment; and
)
building with all concerned parties, namely, client, n) Delivery and storage of equipment.
) architect, consulting engineer and/or lift manufacturer.
5.1.2 Information to be provided by Architect or
This enables the lift manufacturer to furnish the
) Engineer
architect and/or consulting engineer with the proposed
layout or vice-versa. As a result of preliminary discussions, the drawings of
the building should give the following particulars and
5.1 Exchange of Information finished sizes:
5.1.1 The guidelines laid down together with Fig. 2 a) Number, type and size of lifts and position of
will enable the preliminary scheme for the installation lift well;
) to be established. Figure 2 shows only some of the
b) Particulars of lift well enclosure;
typical arrangements and variations are possible with
) c) Size, position, number and type of landing
respect to number of lifts and the layout of lifts
doors;
) especially when destination control system (DCS) is
used instead of conventional group control system d) Number of floors served by the lift;
)
e) Height between floor levels;
Although the recommended outline for the various
f) Number of entrances;
classes of lifts enable the general planning details to
be determined by the architect/engineer, these should g) Total headroom;
) be finally settled at the earliest possible stage by h) Provision of access to machine room;
detai led investigation with the purchaser's j) Provision of ventilation and, if possib le,
representative reaching agreement with the lift natural lighting of machine room;
manufacturer (where necessary) before an order is k) Height of machine room;
finally placed. This will enable a check to be made and
) m) Depth of lift pit;
information to be exchanged on vital matters such as:
) n) Position of lift machine, above or below lift
a) Number, capacity, speed and disposition of the well;
)
) 20 NAT ION AL BUILDING C ODE OF INDIA 2016

)
)
 )

2A STRAIGHT LINE 29 ALCOVE ARRANGEMENT

ARRANGEMENT FOR THREE LIFTS FOR FOUR LIFTS

) ·•j
;·l

) Ill
2C ARRANGEMENT FOR SIX LIFTS 20 ARRANGEMENT FOR EIGHT LIFTS ~~
FIG. 2 TYPI CAL A RRANGEMENT OF L IFTS

I~
p) Size and position of an y trimme r joists or
stanchions adjacent to the lift well at each
floor;
It is preferable that the lift lobby is not used as a
tho roug hfa re. If unavoidab le the lift conidor shall take
into acco unt space for people who are moving.
I 'tl
~

q) Size and position or s upporting steel work at 5.3 The architect/ engineer s hould ad v ise the I i ft
roof leve ls; man u factu re r, if th e Autho rity h as a ny s pecia l 'II
>I
r) Size and position of any footings or grillage re quirements rega rdin g li fts in bu ild ings in th e ) 'j
fo undations, if these are adjacent to the li ft admi nistrative area concerned.
)
pit; and
5.4 T he architect/e ng inee r s hould info rm the li ft
s) In the case of passenger lifts whether the lift
manufacturer of the dates when the erection of the lift ) ~
cage is req uired to carry household luggage,
such as refrigerator, steel alm irah, etc.
may be commenced and is to be completed so that )u
,.
sufficient time is a llowed fo r the man ufactu re and ) l'i
> I~
5.2 The lift lobby should be designed appropriate ly erection of the lift.
s ince thi s has bearing on the traffic hand li ng espec iall y
w hen more number of lifts are invo lved . In a dual line
arrangement (lifts opposite to each other) the lobby
5.5 When submitting application fo r a bu ild ing perm it
to the local Authority, the build ing plans sha ll inc lude )l
should be between 1.5 times and 2.5 times the depth of
the detai ls of lifts (number of lifts dul y numbered, > I(
locati on, type, type of doors, passenger capacity and
one car. Typ ically, the greater the number of lifts, the
speed).
) 1
bigger the mu ltiplier to be used. As an example, a ) ~
quadruplex may use 1.5 to 2, where as an octoplex will 5.6 Positioning of Lifts I
need 2 to 2.5. For in-line (single line) arrangements, ) )
the lobby ca n be typ ica ll y ha lf of the above A thorough investi gation shou ld be made for assessing )
recommendat ions. the most sui table position fo r li ft(s) w hile planning the
)
I'ART 8 BUILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 21 )
MOV ING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
 )
building. It should take into account future expansions,
if any. Though each building has to be considered
individually for purposes of location of lifts, factors
influencing the locations of passenger and goods lifts
are given in 5.6.2 to 5.6.4.
5.6.1 Arrangement ofLifts
\ The lifts should be easily accessible from all entrances
I
to the building. For maximum efficiency, they should
be grouped near the centre of the building. It is
preferable not to have all the lifts out in straight line
and, if possible, not more than four lifts should be
atTanged in this manner. If more than 4 lifts have to be
grouped together in a straight line, then destination
control systems would require to adopted. Further, the
corridor should be wide enough to allow sufficient
space for waiting passengers as well as for through
) passengers.
In some cases when there are more than three lifts, the
a lcove arrangement is recommended. With this
arrangement, the lift alcove leads off the main corridor
so that there is no interference by traffic to other groups
) or to other pmts of the ground floor. This arrangement
permits the narrowest possible corridors and saves
) space on the upper floors. Walking distance to the
individual lift is reduced ang passenger standing in the
centre of the group can readily see a ll the lift doors and
)
landing indicators. The ideal atTangement of the lifts
) depends upon the paiticular layout of the respective
building and should be determined in every individual
case. Some typical recommended arrangements are
given in Fig. 2.
5.6.2 Passenger Lifts
) and weight, so the operation of loading and unloading
5.6.2.1 Low and medium class flats
Where a lift is arranged to serve two, three or four flats
per floor, the lift may be placed adjoining a staircase,
with the lift entrances serving direct on to the landings.
Where the lift is to serve a considerable number of flats
having access to balconies or corridors, it may be
conveniently placed in a well -venti lated tower
)
adjoining the building.
) capital cost of the lift, building work and electrical
5.6.2.2 Office buildings, hotels and high class flats
In general the arrangement as recommended in 5.6.1
\
' should be followed. However, in case this is not possible,
it is desirable to have at least a battery of two lifts at two
or more convenient points of a building. If this is not
)
possible, it is advisable to have at least two lifts side by
side at the main entrance and one lift each at different
) sections of the building for inter-communication. When
two lifts are installed side by side, the machine room
)
shall be suitably planned with sufficient space for housing
)
the machine equipment. The positioning of lifts side by
)
side gives the following advantages:
) 22
)
a) All machines and switch gear may be housed
in one machine room,
b) Lifts can be inter-connected more
conveniently from an installation point of
view, and
c} Greater convenience in service owing to the
landing openings and each floor being
adjacent.
5.6.2.3 Shops and departmental stores
Lifts in shops and stores should be situated so as to
secure convenient and easy access at each floor.
5.6.2.4 For buildings with more than 12 floors, where
passenger and service lifts are provided in one lobby,
it is recommended to have group control for all the
lifts.
5.6.3 Goods Lifts
Th~ location oflifts in factories, warehouses and similar
buildings should be planned to suit the progressive
movement of goods throughout the buildings, having
regard to the nature of position of the loading platforms,
railway sidings, etc. The placing of a lift in a fume or
dust laden atmosphere or where it may be exposed to
extreme temperatures, should be avoided, wherever
possibl~. Where it is impossible to avoid installing a
lift in an adverse atmosphere, the electrical equipment
should be of suitable design and consttuction to meet
the conditions involved.
Normally goods lifts have lower speeds than passenger
lifts for the same travel because traffic conditions are
less demanding, and more time is required for loading
and unloading. As loads for goods lifts increase in size
becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is usual to require
greater accuracy of levelling as the capacity of the
goods lift increases.
A large capacity goods lift operating at high speed is
often a very uneconomical solution. The inherent high
cost is enhanced due to the very small demand for such
equipment, much of which is custom made. The high
supply equipment usually shows a much smaller return
as an investment than more normal sizes of lifts.
5.6.4 Hospital Bed Lifts
Hospital bed lifts should be situated conveniently near
the ward and operating theatre entrances. There shall
be sufficient space near the landing door for easy
movement of stretcher/bed. It is convenient to place
the passenger lifts in a hospital, near the staircases.
5.7 General Arrangement Drawings (GAD)
The general arrangement drawings should be prepared
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
 ----------------~~~----. ...w~~
)

by the lift manufacturer. The lift manufacturer requires 2) Governor tripping speed where spring )
sufficient information for the preparation of working buffers are used. )
drawings and is usually obtained from architect's NOTE- The gravity stopping distance based on
)
drawings supplemented by any information obtained the gravity retardation from any initial velocity
from the site and by collaboration with the other may be calculated according to the followi ng )
formula
contractors. )
General atTangement drawings showing the layout oflifts
where ~
duly numbered, details of builders work, for example,
holes in walls for guide fixing, holes in machine room
S = free fa ll, in mm (gravity stopping d istance), )
and
floor for ropes and conduits, recesses for landing sills, V = initial velocity, in mls. )
supports for lift machine and loads imposed on the
d) 600 rnm. )
building should be submitted by the lift manufacturer to
the architect/engineer for written approval. Where there is a projection below the ceiling of the )
well an d the projectio n is more than 500 mm, )
5.8 Additional Requirements for Passenger, Goods measured horizontally from the centre line of the
and Service Lifts cross-head but over the roof of the car, a minimum )
5.8.1 Bottom Car Clearance vertical clearance not less than that calculated above )
shall also be available between the roof of the car and
When the car rests on its fully compressed buffer )
the projection.
there shall be a vertical clearance of not less than )
600 mm between the pit floor and the buffer striker Provided that the vertical clearance between any
plate or the lowest structural or mechanical part equipment mounted on top of the car and the nearest )
equipment or device installed. The clearance shall overhead obstruction shall be not less than the sum of )
be availab le beneath the w hole area of the platform the three items (a), (b) and (c) as calculated above
plus 150 mm. )
except for,
)
a) guide shoes or rollers, safety jaw blocks, 5.8.3. Bottom Run-by for Cars and Counterweights
platfonn aprons, guards of other equipment )
The bottom run-by of cars and counterweights shall be
located within 300 mm measured horizontally not less than the fo llowing: )
from the sides of the car platform; and
a) 150 rnm, where oil buffers are used. )
b) compensating sheaves. b) Where spring-buffers are used; )
Provided that in all the cases, including small cars, a 1) 150 mm for controls as in 2.1.1 1.4
)
minimum clearance of 600 mm is available over a to 2.1.11.8, and
horizontal area of 800 mm x 500 mm. 2) Not less than the following for controls
Provided also that in all the cases, when the car rests as in 2.1.11.1 to 2.1.11.3: )
on its fully compressed buffers, there shall be a vertical Rated Speed Run-by )
clearance of not less than 50 mm between any part of mls mm
the car and any obstruction of device mounted in the )
Up to 0.125 75
pit.
5.8.2 Top Car Clearance
0.125 to 0.25
0.25 to 0.50
150
225
,
l

The vertical clearance between the car cross-head and 0.50 to I 300 )
the nearest overhead obstruction within 500 mm )
measured horizontally to the nearest part of the 5.8.4 Maximum Bottom Run-by
crosshead when the car platform is level with the top )
In no case shall the maximum bottom run-by exceed
landing, shall be not less than the sum of the following:
the following:
a) Bottom countetweight nm-by.
a) 600 rnm for cars; and
b) Stroke of the counte1weight buffer used.
b) 900 mm for countetweights.
c) One-half of the gravity stopping di stance
5.8.5 Top Counterweight Clearances I \
based on,
1) 115 percent of the rated speed where oil The top counterweight clearance shall be not less than
buffers are used and no provision is made

'
the sum of the following four items:
to prevent the jump of the car at
counterweight buffer engagement; and a) Bottom car run-by.
}
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 23
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
')
)
b) Stroke of the car buffer used. repairs to rope connections at the
c) 150 rnm. counterweight at the car ends or at the
d) One-half the gravity stopping distance based suspension points.
on, 5.9.4 Run-by for Cars and Counterweights
) 1) 115 percent of the rated speed where oil
a) Minimum bottom run-by- The bottom ..run-
buffers are used and no provision is made
) by for cars and counterweights shall not be
to prevent jump of the counterweight at
car buffer engagement; and less than 150 mm.

) 2) governor tripping speed where spring b) Maximum bottom run-by- In no case shall
buffers are used. the maximum bottom run-by exceed 300
5.9 Additional Requirements for Dumb Waiters mm.
)
5.9.1 Top Car Clearance 5.10 Planning for Dimensions
)
The top car clearance shall be sufficient to avoid any 5.10.1 General
protruding part fixed on the top of the car coming in
The dimensions of lift well have been chosen to
direct contact with the ceiling or diverting sheave.
accommodate the doors inside the well which is the
The clearance shall be calculated taking into account normal practice. In special cases, the door may be
the following and shall not be less than the sum of the accommodated in a recess in the front wall, for which
following four items: prior consultation shall be made with the lift
a) Bottom counterweight run-by. manufacturer.
b) Stroke of the counterweight buffer used. 5.10.2 Plan Dimensions
c) Dimensions of the portion of the diverting
All plan dimensions of lift well given hereunder, are
sheave hanging underneath the ceiling in the
lift well. the minimum clear plumb sizes. The architect/engineer,
in conjunction with the builder, shall ensure that
d) 150 rnm for compensating for gravity stopping
adequate tolerances are included in the building design
distance and future repairs to the rope
so that the specified minimum clear plumb dimensions
) connections at counterweight and at the car
or at the suspension points. are obtained in the finished work.
NOTE - The words 'clear plumb dimensions' should be noted
5.9.2 Bottom Car Clearance
) particularly in case of high rise buildings.
The bottom car clearance shall be maintained in such a
Rough opening in concrete or brick walls to
way that the counterweight shall not come in contact
accommodate landing doors depend on des ign of
) with the ceiling or any part hanging underneath the
architrave. It is advisable to provide sufficie nt
ceiling, whe n the car completely rests on fully
) allowances in rough opening width to allow for
compressed buffers, provided the buffers are spring
) alignment e rrors of opening at various landings.
type mounted on solid concrete or steel bed.
When more than one lift is located in a common
In case of wooden buffers the bottom car clearance shall well, a minimum allowance of 150 mm for separator
) be maintained in such a way that the total downward beams s hall be made in the widths shown in Tables 1
travel of the car from the service level of the immediate to 4 .
) floor near the pit, shall not be more than the top
) counterweight clearance, when the wooden buffers are Where the governor operated counterweight safety is
completely crushed. required under conditions stipulated in good practice
) [8-5A(5)], the tabular values s hould be revised in
5.9.3 Top Counterweight Clearance
consultation with the lift manufacturer.
The top clearance for the counterweight can be
For outline dimensions of lifts having more than one
calculated taking into account the following and shall
not be less than the sum of the following three items: car entrance, lift manufacturers shall be consulted.

) a) Car run-by. 5.10.3 Outline Dimensions

) b) Compression of the buffer spring or height of 5.10.3.1 The outline dimensions oflift shaft, machine-
the wooden block used as buffer. room, pit depth, overhead and raw door opening size
c) 150 mm to compensate for gravity stopping for lifts to which this Subsection applies are specified
distance for counterweight and any future in Tables 12 to 23 as indicated below:

24 NATIONAL BUILDING C ODE OF INDIA 2016

)
)
 N
0\
Table 12 Recommended Dimensions of Passenger Lifts and Service Lifts
(Clause 5. 10.3.1)
All dimensions in millimetres.

, ... WACHINE-1!0011 WIDTH ~I

c
t"' HOISlWAY BELOW ~I

J:
If
~ ~ ~
"'
w
:E .:1 )oo

%
z; 'i !
1/)

• 15
;r;
"' ~
...
1/) j!;
~

...z~
I

lilill I \ I I m
~
If
z
~
......
~
...~

2
~
-
0
2
MACWNE- ROO¥ PLAN

-r~
j!;

>
r"

s=
r"
I
.,
-
e
2
c
BOTTOiol
IQ 10 .:II ~

~
(')
0 ~
eto'~
•'
~
g LiiiBi
1.. ENTR~CE .I s
EI.EYATIQN
2
E.
... I.. CAR ~DTH .. 1
... ~OTAL PLU~B I
-
<:>
o-
f1NISHEO

HOISTJrAY
HOISlWAY WIDTH

PLAN
 6 CIVIL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
a) Machine room lifts:
FOR LIFTS
I) Recommended Table 12 6.1 Civil Requirements
dimensions of Lift well enc losures, lift pits, machine rooms and
passenger lifts and
machine supports besides conforming to the essential
service lifts
requirements given below sho uld form part of the
2) Recommended Table 13
building construction and comply with the lift
dimensions of hospital
manuf'ach1rer's drawings.
bed/stretcher Iifts
3) Recommended Table 14 6.1.1 Requirements of Liji Well Enclosure
dimensions of goods The requirements of lift well enclosures are as given
lifts with machine hereunder:
room a) Totalfy enclosed well - Lift wells shall be
4) Recommended Table 15
totally enclosed by imperforate walls, floor
dimensions of machine
and ceiling, constructed for protection against
room height, overhead,
all weather and of dust free surface material
pit depth for passenger,
or s hould be pain ted to mi n imize dust
goods,
stretcher/hospital lifts circulation on to moving apparatus and from
with machine roo m being pumped by the car movement in to
) 5) Recommended Table 16 . machine room or on to landings and sha ll be
dimensions of 120 min fire-resistant.
)
automobile lifts with The lift well may have openings for landing
~ machine room
Through type car
doors, inspection and emergency doo rs,
vent openings for escape of gases and
6) Recommended Table 17 smoke in case of fi re, vent ilation openings,
) dimensions of openings in the machine room floor for
dumbwaiter lifts con nec ting lift components such as ropes,
1 cables, etc.
) b) Machine room-less lifts: b) Partially enclosed well- In c'!se o(part ially
) enc losed lift wells used for app lications for
I) Recommended Table 18
} example, observation lifts in con nection with
dimensions of
passenger lifts MRL galleries or atriums, etc, the we ll does not
} 2) Recomm.ended Table 19 need to be totally enclosed, provided the
) dimen sions of height of the enclosure at places no rmally
stretcher/hasp ita l lifts access ible to persons is sufficient to prevent
) such persons:
MRL
I) being endangered by moving parts of the
( 3) Pit depth
passenger/
for Table 20
lift; and
strctcher/hospita I lifts
~
2) interfering wi th the safe operation of the
MRL li ft by reaching lift equipment with in the
) 4) Overhead height for Table 21 well either di rectl y or with hand held
passenger and objects.
stretcher/hospital lifts
The height of the enclosure shall be mi ni mum
MRL
3.5 mat the landing door s ide. The height of
5) Recommended Table 22
)
dimensions of goods enclosure at other sides s ha ll be 2.5 m
~) li fts MRL min imum when the ho ri z onta l di s ta nce
between the moving pa rts of the lift and
! 6) Recommended Table 23
) enclosure is 0.5 111 minimum . The height of
dimensions of
I enclosure at other sides may be reduced to
) automobile li fts MRL
I 1.1 111 progressively if the horizontal distance
) 5.10.3.2 Minimum floor to floor heiglrt between the moving parts of the lift and
I
) Minimum floor to fl oor height for landings on same enclosure increases to 2m. The enclosure shall
I ge located within 150 mm of the edge of the
) side fo r horizontally slidi ng door isf+750 mm, where
floor. The enclosure shall be imperforate and
I 'f is clear entrance height, in mm.
) made of non combustible materia l.
I
)
I PART 8 BU ILDING SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTAL LATION 01' LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 25
) MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
I

t)
 1

~~ Table 12 - (Concluded)
O;;::J
::;-; Sl No. of Rated Car Size COPD Passenger and Senice Lifts with Machine Room: Shaft Sizes
zoo
C) co No. Passengers Load Door
:$!S Rated speed 1.0 mls ~ 3.0 rnls ~Rated 4.0 rnls ~ Rated Rated Speed = 7.0 m/s ~Rated 9.0 m/s~
> t"' <I m/s 6.0 m/s
rO Rated Speed !> Speed ~ 3.5 Speed!> 5.0 Speed~ 8.0 Rated Speed
r:::Z 2.5 m/s m/s m/s m/s ~ 10.0 m/s
~C)
VlrJl Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size
> r'l
r:-';:;:1
-'=l < - ko Width Depth Width Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth
0
-l (j
'-"M ( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) ( 10) (I 1) (12) (13) (14) ( 15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
rJl

I i) 4 272 I 100 700 800 1 900 1 300 1 900 1 300

"'r'l
n ii) 6 408 I 100 I 000 800 I 900 I 700 1900 1700
....;
iii) 8 544 I 300 I 100 800 I 900 1 900 I 900 1900
0z
iv) 10 680 1 300 I 350 800 I 900 2 150 I 900 2 150
Vl

z
t/)
v) 13 884 2 000 I 100 900 2 600 I 900 2600 I 900
vi) 14 952 I 600 1400 900 2 200 2 100 2 200 2 100 2 200 2 150 2250 2 150 2250 2 250 2 300 2 300 2 300 2450
~
t"' vii) 16 I 088 I 600 I 600 I 000 2 300 2 300 2300 2 300 2 300 2 350 2 300 2 350 2300 2450 2 300 2500 2 300 2650
t"'
> viii) 18 1 224 2 000 1400 1 100 2 600 2 100 2 600 2 150 2 600 2 150 2 600 2 250 2 700 2 300 2 700 2450
::l 1 360 2 000 I 500 I 100 2 600 2 100 2 600 2250 2600 2 250 2 600 2 350 2 700 2400 2 700 2 550
0 ix) 20
z x) 22 I 496 2 100 I 600 I 100 2 700 2 300 2 700 2 350 2 700 2 350 2 700 2450 2 800 2 500 2 800 2 550
0

.,""....;
xi) 26 I 768 2 350 I 600 1200 3 000 2300 3 000 2 350 3 000 2 350 3 000 2450 3 050 2 550 3 050 2 550
t"'
xii) 29 1 972 2 350 I 700 I 200 3 000 2500 3 000 2 500 3 000 2 550 3 050 2 600 3 050 2 700

·"'l-l NOTES
rJl I All dimensions given above for lifts ha..,ing centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with counterweight at rear, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners.
n
>
r"
Any variations murually agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in,

~ a) car inside dimensions shall be within the minimum and maximum area limits specified in accordance with accepted standards [8-5A(6)].
0 b) entrance width on higher side is permitted.
:;o
t/)
c) entrance width on lower side is permitted up to I 00 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
>
z
0 2 The minimum size of the lift car and all other requirements relating to accessibility, in all public bui ldings shall be in accordance with 13 of Part 3 ' Development Control Rules and General Building
Requirements' of the Code.

N
.....

---- ------~-----~------~-----------
._)" .._I ._I ._, ....I .._,
~
.....r-..}__:,_7
.._ - '-' ._... '-' '-' ........ "-' ._. "'-"" .._.. '-' .,_,... ""-' '-"' '-"' ...__. '-" - ,_~ '-" ·. _... ...._, .._.. ._, ..._,.. ._-' ...._.. - .._.,. .._, .......... - -.." ,_, .._,/ .._.. ......, - ._I - .._., .._; .......,.- ..._

N
oc Table 13 Recommended Dimensions of Stretcher/Hospital Lifts
(Clause 5.10.3.1)
All dimensions in millimetres.

I WACHINE-ROOW: WIDTH I
c
,. HOISTWAY ~ELO'Ir I

]-
~

;e
8
'"'
8
-
~
"'....

;e
z
~
'
~
i;
!!l

z VACHJNE-ROOM PLAN
~
0 ~ - ~
F'
z
~

'I
>
r"
1-
!!l
='
c:: £
r:: Ql §
~
"' :3
zC) BO"M"OW: FLOOR
~ + - "'
Q

.
~
0
~
1'"J
~
~

.~
..
~
1-
I....
...,0 lC
El.eyADON
"" ~
z I EliTR~tNCE I
-
~
>
I
I cliikm .1
I
-
....
0
Cl'l
c
lOTA!. F1NISHED PLVIIIB HOISlWAY 1MDTH

HOISTWAY PLAN

..,
 ·~

3':~ Table 13 - (Concluded)

z~~cc
C')~;:j
Sl No. of Rated Rounded Car Size 2P Hospital Bed I Stretcher Lifts with Machine Room: Shaft Sizes
No. Passengers Load off Rated TSPD
~s Load Door
>r Rated Speed 0.6 mls ::; Rated 3.0 m/s::; Rated 4.0 rnls ::; Rated Rated Speed 7.0 m/s::; Rated 9.0 mls::; Rated
ro =6.0m/s
@z
•• C"l
::; 1 m/s Speed
::; 2.5 m/s
Speed
::; 3.5 mls
Speed::; 5.0 mls Speed ::; 8.0 m/s Speed::; 10.0
m/s
til~
>tr:~ Shaft Size · Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size
~~

Sete7~
;j(=5
~trl Depth Width
~
(1) (2) (6) (7) I) 12) )
I
~
trl i) 15 2400 800 I 800 3 000 1 800 3 000
(":)
....,
ii) 20 2400 1200 2300 3000 2 350 3 000 2 350 3000 2 350 3000 2500 3 000 2500 3 000
~
til
iii) 26 2550 1200 2 500 3 050 2 500 3 050 2 500 3 050 2 500 3 050 2 600 3 150 2 650 3 150

z
[/)
iv)
v)
29
36
1972
2 44& I
2 000
2 500
2 700
2 700
1400
1400
2 650
2 800
3200
3 150
2600
2900
3 200
3200
2600
2 900
3 200
3 200
2 600
2 900
3200
3 200
2 700
3 000
3 200
3 200
2 700
3 000
3 200
3 200
~
r
r
~ NOTES
02! 1 All dimensions given above for lifts having two panel telescopic doors (2P TSPD) with counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any
variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in:
0
~ a) car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with accepted standards [8-5A(6)].
r
::;:;
...., b) entrance width on higher side is permitted .
Y' c) entrance width on lower side is permitted up to 100 rom subject to minimum of700 rom.
trl 2 Car depth of 2 I 0(} mm may be considered in residentiaVcommercial buildings, where use of only ambulance stretcher is envisaged. The hoist-way depth maybe reduced accordingly.
f!i
>
r
~
0
G5
>
2!
0

N
\0

_____ __,..._, ___ _

'-"' .__. ........... ..........
-------- _, ._, - - ._ , ._1 __, _,I ._./"· ' - ' _,. - ·
)
)
)

)
)

)
Hld30 AVt.USIOH On nld 0 3HSINI.l 1V101
) s HLdlO ft00H-3NIH~vn
'I I" a
0
ll(1J:;(EI ~Vli.LSIOH "'I H.W30 liV:l
~ - .. . . I" B 'I
<U
) .s u
~~.
_m

~
~

)
-=C<l
(,j l.JII

~ "" 1
)
......c:.... ~
~
-
~
u ~ IJ
) :.. ~ !
)
.:::"'
~
,"'
.,;
"'
!:::
0
ii!I
~
f1l
0
:c
I I I
..- T

! i ..... ..1lr
[
r
- "' l
) ,.....,. .§ n
0
0 M
:::I
'El ~ fl--...._
C-"
i
X
) 0
.!:!
Ito< .......
0 v)
) "'= c:u
"'~
Vl

}
.!: ~ Q
.9
"'=
<U D.__,
"'Q ~IN DOW/EXHAUST \\INDOW/£XHAUST

.§ .§"'
,
"0
Q
~
1Hlli3 H r«X>N 3NIHOVn

, <U '1&\Vli.L
)
=
<U

) a5
0
(,j
)
~
) ~

-
...c
<U
} . .Q

) ~

)
)
)
)
)
)

) 30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
)
 ~

:;:--'
o> Table 14 - (Concluded)

-
<~
z oo
C'lo:i
SI
No.
Rated
Load
Car Size COPD
Door
0.6 mls :S Rated
Speed :S 2.5 mfs
3.0 mls s; Rated
Speed :S 3.5 mfs
4.0 mfs s; Rated
Speed :S 5.0 mls
Rated Speed
=6.0 mfs
7.0 m/s s; Rated
Speed :S 8.0 m/s
9.0 mfs :S Rated
Speed :S 10.0 mls
~s
>t""
rl:l
~~
.. 0 Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft Size
Ul~
>M
r::o kg Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth Width
:;;;S
~(j
~t'l (I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)_ (10) (1 1) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
~

I i) 1 000 1400 1 800 2P-tel-1200 2 300 2 350

~
t'l
(j ii) 1 500 1700 2000 4P-1500 2 750 2550
~
0 . iii) 2000 1700 2500 4P-1500 2 800 3050 2 800 3 050 2900 3 050 3 000 3 050 3 000 3 050 •3 000 3050
z
Ul
iv) 2 500 2 000 2500 4P-1700 3 000 3·050 3 000 3 050 3 100 3 050 3 200 3 050 3 200 3 050 3 2 00 3 050
2
~ v) 3 000 2 000 3 000 4P-1700 3 000 3 550 3 000 3 550 3 100 3 550 3 200 3 550 3 200 3 550 3200 3 550
~
t""
vi) 4000 2 500 3 000 6P-2100 3 700 3 650 3 700 3 650
~ vii) 5 000 2500 3 600 6P-2100 3 850 4250 3 850 4250
0 NOTE - All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with counterweight at side, are reco=ended dimensions primarily for architects and building
z
0 planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the goods lift shall be based on a load of not less than
"'1 3.45 kN/m2 of the net inside car area.
r
.....
"'1
;1
t'l
~
(j

~
~::0
~

- __ ___ _
~

.......,._....._
---------------- ------------~~--~~-J-
.
--~------~--------~-------------~---~-------- -
~ Table 15 Recommended Dimensions of Machine Room Height, Overhead, Pit Depth for Passenger, Goods, Stretcher/Hospital Lifts with Machine Room
(Clause 5.10.3.1)
All dimensions in millirnetres.

For speed up to 3.5 m/s

Sl No. of Rated Dimensions of Pit Depth, Overhead Height (HR) and Machine Room Height (MR.)
No. Passengers Load
0.7 mls 1.0 m/s 1.6 m/s 2 rnls 2.5 mls 3 m/s 3.5 mls

Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR

kg Depth Depth Depth Depth Depth Depth Depth
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (I2) ( 13) (14) (15) (16) (17) ( I8) ( I9) (20) (2I) (22) (23) (24)
i) 4 272 I 350 CH + 2 500 1 500 Cij + 2 500 1 600 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500
1 900 1 950 . 2 400 2 800
ii) 6 408 I 350 CH+ 2 500 l 500 CH + 2 500 1 600 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500
1900 I 950 2400 2 800
iii) 8 544 1 350 CH + 2 500 l 500 CH+ 2 500 1 600 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500
I 900 1950 2400 2 800
iv) 10 680 I 350 CH + 2 500 l 500 CH + 2 500 1 600 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH+ 2 500
I 900 I 950 2400 2 800
v) 13 884 1350 CH + 2 500 I 500 CH+ 2 500 1 600 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500
1 900 I 950 2400 2 800
vi) 14 952 1 500 CH + 2 500 1 800 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500 2 500 CH + 2 500 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 500 CH+ 3 000
I 950 2 400 2 800 3 000 3 000 3 450
vii) 16 1 088 I 1 500 CH + 2 500 1 800 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500 2 500 CH + 2 500 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 500 CH+ 3 000
l 000 I950 2 400 2 800 3 000 3 000 3 450
viii) 18 1 224 l 500 CH + 2 500 1 800 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500 2 500 CH + 2 500 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 500 CH + 3 000
2
1 950 2400 2 800 3 000 3 000 3 450
~ ix) 20 I 360 I 500 CH + 2 500 1 800 CH + 2 500 2 200 CH + 2 500 2 500 CH + 3 000 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 500 CH+ 3 000
02 1 950 2400 2 800 3 000 3 000 3 450
>
t"'
x) 22 I 496 I 1 500 CH + 2 500 I 800 CH + 3 000 2 200 CH + 3 000 2 500 CH + 3 000 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 500 CH+ 3 000
1 500 1950 2 400 2 800 3 000 3 000 3 450
=
C!
t=
xi) 26 1 768 1 500 CH +
I 950
3 000 1 800 CH +
2 400
3 000 2 200 CH +
2"800
3 000 2 500 CH +
3 000
3 000 3 000 CH +
3 450
3 000 4 500 CH+
3 450
3 000
0
xii) 29 I 972 I 1 600 CH + 3 000 1 800 CH + 3 000 2 200 CH + 3 000 2 500 CH + 3 000 3 000 CH + 3 000 4 600 CH+ 3 000
2 2 000 1 950 2 400 2 800 3 000 3 450 3 450
~
("J xiii) 2 500 1 800 CH + 4 000 I 800 CH + 4 000 2 200 CH + 4 000 2 500 CH + 4 000 3 000 CH + 4 000 4 600 CH + 4 000
0 1 950 2 400 2 800 3 000 3 450 3 450
0
l"l xiv) 3 000 1 800 CH + 4 000 1 800 CH+ 4 000 2 200 CH + 4 000 2 500 CH + 4 000 3 200 CH + 4 300 4 600 CH + 4 300
..,
0 1 950
CH +
2 400 2 800 3 000 3 450 3 600
xv) 4 000 1 800 4 300 1 800 CH+ 4 300 2 200 CH + 4 300 2 500 CH + 4 300 3 200 CH + 4 300 4 600 CH + 4 300
2 2 200 2400 2 800 3 000 3 450 3 600
0
>
.....
xvi) 5 000 1 800 CH +
2 200
4 500 1800 CH+
2400
4 500 2 200 CH +
2 800
4 500 2 500 CH +
3 000
5 000 3 200 CH +
3 450
5 000 4 600 CH +
3 600
5 000
0
.....
~
 ~~ Table 15 - (Concluded)
0;:::~
<-l For speed from 4 rnls to 10 m/s
~QO
C"'lo:l
~s SJ No. of Rated Passenger, Goods, Stretcher/Hospital Lifts With Machine Room: Dimensions of Pit Depth, Overhead Height (HR) and Machine Room Height (MR)
;>t""
t""s:! No. Passengers Load
:;:::z
~C"'l
4 m/s 5 m/s 6 m/s 7 m/s 8 m/s 9 m/s 10 m/s
Ul(/J
>~
t"";::l kg Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR Pit HR MR
- < Depth Depth Depth Depth Depth Depth D epth
::J(=)
(/)~
(/J (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (ll) ( 12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24)

(/J i) 14 952 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 000 5 500 CH + 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH + 4 300 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
r-:1
(') 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
-l
ii) 16 1 088/ 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 000 5 500 CH + 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH + 4 300 7 I 00 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
0z 1 000 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
Ul
iii) 18 1224 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 000 5 500 CH + 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH + 4 300 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
z
(/J 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
;;} iv) 20 1 360 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 000 5 500 CH + 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH + 4 300 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH+ 5 000
r 3 450 3 450
t"" 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
~ v) 22 1 496/ 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 000 5 500 C H + 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH+ 4 300 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
0 1 500 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
z
0 vi) 26 1 768 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 300 5 500 CH+ 4 300 5 900 CH + 4 300 6 500 CH + 4 300 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
'-::1 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
c vii) 29 1 972/ 4 600 CH + 4 000 4 700 CH + 4 300 5 500 CH + 4 300 5 900 CH+ 5 000 6 500 CH+ 5 000 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
~ 2 000 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 000 5 800 6 500 6 900
5"
~ viii) 2 500 4 600 CH + 4 300 4 700 CH + 5 000 5 500 CH+ 5 000 5 900 CH + 5 000 6 500 CH + 5 000 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
(/J
(') 3 450 3 450 3 800 5 500 6 300 7 000 7 500
>
t"" ix) 3 000 4 600 CH + 4 300 4 700 CH T 5 000 5 500 CH + 5 000 5 900 CH + 5 000 6 500 CH+ 5 000 7 100 CH + 5 000 7 500 CH + 5 000
~ 3 600 3 600 4 000 5 500 6 300 7 000 7 500
0
;::1
(/J
CH - Car clear inside height measured from car finished floor level to false ceiling.
>
z
0 NOTES
I Recommended dimensions for pit depth, overhead and machine-room for different lift speeds are given in the table above. These dimensions may differ in practice as per individual manufacturer's
design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the pit depth and overhead shall be such as ro conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted
standards [8-5A(7)).
2 In case of goods lifts minimum pit depth required is I 600 mm.
3 In case of lift speeds 3.5 m/s and 4 m/s with rear counterweight the pit depth requirement could be less by about 500 mm to I 000 mm.

(H

_,__
(H

__ _ _._ _______ _----·--'-'-''-''-' ..../ . J .._; ·.....; ...,; .._; ...., .J ._.. - -
--,,
---------
~-----------------~---------------------~-----
(..,)
~
Table 16 Recommended Dimensions of Automobile Lifts with Machine Room - Through l)rpe Car (Rated Speed = 0.6 m/s or 1.0 m/s)
(Clause 5.10.3.1 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

EI'E.li.Y.JJO1\ H012JJlvx-l>l'V)l
I .LO.L'f'T" 1:.1~2HEO b r n vr.a HOI21M\".r.l
c
l"i
lal
~
.---
j I C¥H li21CE I

I- +

~
~
ftVCHIJiE=BOOI'I I>~

4 ~
\./
y .......
:z l Ob LUOOt'

"'m ~~
~
~ ~~ ~ 0
0
:z
E= l
8~ ~ ~

-
m i5
~
"''
~
.~
~
I
i
.US'fbOOOI:f

t.ll :; ~

~ 4
ii ~ §
ip c
2
§~I
C'l

L/ v
("J 6
0 0

0
I "' ~
t"l
0
.\ T
I --J
WI f:: m
m

]
"'1 .111
z0 I
):
'Gf\f<btaliv.<!
BEYWZ
i
N
....
0
I \
0\
j v~o HOl2.L~It'A BErOM
WVCHI~E·HOO~'I' MO.L.H
I

-
 ~"d Table 16 - (Concluded)
0~
<::0
2~ SINo. Rated Load Car Size COPD Door Shaft Size Car Overhead Height Pit Depth Machine Room
C'JCQ
Height Height
~s
Width Depth CH HR PH MR
Fb kg
Width Depth Width
~2
•• C'J
VIm ( I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
>t"l
C"'::ti i) 2 500 2 500 5 300 4P-2 400 4000 6 100
1 800 4 000
~~
Vlt")
ii)
iii)
3 000
4 000
2 700
3 000
5 400
5 800
4P-2 400
6P-3 000
4000
4 300
6 200
6 700 2400 5 200
rn iv) 3 000 6P-3 000 4 300 6 900 2 000 4 500
5 000 6 000
I
Vl
r-l
C"l
::l
0 NOTES
2
<JI 1 All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners.
z
rn
Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the automobile lift shall be based on a load of not less than 1.45kN/
m 2 of the net inside car area.
~C"' 2 Dimensions of machine room height, pit depth and overhead may differ in practice as per individual manufacturer's design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the pit depth and overhead
shall be such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards [8-5A(7)J.
~
....
0 3 The lift car width should be selected such that in case of emergency while the automobile is in the car-lift the driver should be able to open the automobile door and come out of the automobile.
2
0
"'l
~
~
Jll
M
rn
C"l
>
C"'
~
0
::0
rn
~
c:::

(.H
fJI

,_ "- - --..------·
..._, ..._, .._.,. '-' ......, '-" __.... "-"'
-------~----------~J~--J
~ ....J _,. ........,.
)
)
) Table 17 Recommended Dimensions of Dumbwaiter Lifts
) (Clause 5.10.3 .1)
) All dimensions in millimetres.

)
l:'·::--~;.~ .;..:. ·.:):.~~ :- ~ ··:! ··~ :-1
) :'-4
::---
..
I i
t.).f ·.-:.
) :·.:
...... .':~
::'

) -~;
··~. =~:.
) .,, t'
~t:.., ~."!(: '! ~-::·.:.;,-::· . ;~.'.l
)
•.
...
..
~

) .· :.·
) -· .....
.. ~.

...·'·. :·i
) ·•.
..... .~.·
:· ·. "'·:
. ...·,
~

t ... ~=·:
) ~

~~·: ~
) fll
,..
ll

~
) i3 ~ .:
x'i! xg .....,.
~
.. .
~- i ...::c "'5 e
) .·. :· !; .•..t•
I
~ ffi
!'~~ (.)
TOP LANDING
m ~ ~
a "'"' ~
) ..~-.
., ~
__
". :· seRVICE l£1/EL j fil
:z:
~
a:
:.~·
<I)
) w
...~
~
TOP FLOOR U::VEL i'i
) ;! <
g ::1

)
)
E
ENTRANCE
)
c
MACHINE ROOM = C

HOISTWAY PLAN
)

) BOTTOM LANDING
SERVICE l£1/EL
)

) BOTTOM FLOOR !.Em

)
) ELEVATION
•
)
Sl Load Car I nside Lift Well E ntrance
) No. ...--------"----...
)
kg A B If c D E
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
)
i) 100 700 700 800 I 200 900 700
) ii) 150 800 800 900 I 300 I 000 80 0
) iii) 200 900 900 I 000 I 400 I 100 900
iv) 250 1 000 I 000 I 200 I 500 I 200 1 000
)
NOTE - Entrance width 'E' is based on assumption of provision of vertica l biparting doors (no car door is normally provided).
)
)
36 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
 Table 18 Recommended Dimensions of Passenger Lifts MRL COPD
(Clause 5.10.3.1)
All dimensions in millimetres.

•,

~.-

-
~ ~ 0
i
~ ~
~~
. ... . ..·: ·.
~
g ' "iS i!:
n.
~ g TOP fLOOR
w
0
!"'- .. >-
•(

-
iE
0..
F-
V>
en~ o ~
- ----~ ~~~ ~ ro
~ 30.."
·• z
G:
'.
~
..
~
l!i
0
t-

:
CAR l'nOTH
•'
.. c
TOfAL riN. PLUMB HOISTV/AY \\10TH

'
- ~
sono!A fLOOR
HOISTWAY PLAN

ELEVATI ON

Sl No. of Rated Car Size 2P 1.0 m/s S Rated Rated Speed Rated S peed
No. P assengers Loa d COPD Speed S 2.0 m/ s =2.5 m/s = 3.0 m/ s
Door
Shaft Size Shaft Size Shaft S ize

kg --------------
Width Depth Width
-------------- --------------
Width Depth Width Depth
-------------..
Width Depth
( I) (2) (3) (4) (S) (6) (7) (8) (9) ( I0) ( II ) ( 12)

i) 4 272 900 850 700 I 600 I SSO

ii) 6 408 I 000 I 100 800 2 000 I 700
iii) 8 544 I 300 I 100 800 2 ISO I 800
iv) 10 680 I 350 I 300 800 2 ISO I 900
v) 13 884 I 600 1 400 I 000 2 sso 1 9SO 2 sso 2 050 . 2 550 2 250
vi) IS I 020 I 600 I SSO I 000 2 sso 2 oso 2 5SO 2 150 2 5SO 2 250
vii) 16 I 088 I 600 I 600 I 000 2 sso 2 100 2 sso 2 200 2 5SO 2 300
viii) 20 I 360 I 800 I 700 I 100 2 700 2 300 2 700 2 350 2 700 2 350
ix) 22 I 496 I 800 1900 I 100 2 700 2400 2 7SO 2 450 2 750 2 450
x) 26 I 768 I 900 2 000 I 100 2 800 24SO 2 8SO 2 450 2 8SO 2 500
xi) 29 I 972 2 350 I 700 I 200 3 100 2 200 3 100 2 200
NOTES
I ~~
J All dimensions given above for lifts having centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with counterweight at si de, are :I
recommended dimensions primarily for architects and bui lding planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer } ,,:~
and the purchaser arc permitted. However, variation in,
a) car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordanc~ with accepted standards [8-SA(6)].
b) en trance width ori higher side is p..:nnitted.
c) entrance width on lower side is permitted up to I00 mm subject to minimum of 700 mm .
2 The minimum size of the lift car and a ll other requirements relati ng to accessibility, in all public buildings shall be in accordance )
with 13 of Part 3 'Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements' of the Code.
I
) ·:i
) ·t,
PART 8 BUlLDING SERVlCES - SECTION S INSTALLATION OF LI FTS, ESCALATORS AND 37 )
I\ lOV ING W ALKS: SA LIFTS
) .
I•
·•j
..>
)

)
)
Table 19 Recommended Dimensions of Stretcher/Hospital lifts MRL (2P Telescopic Door/4P COPD,
) Speed 1.0 m/s to 2.0 m/s)
(Clause 5.10.3.1)
) All dimensions in millimetres.

Sl Rated Load Car Size Door Size · Shaft Size

No.
Persons kg Width Depth Width Depth
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

i) 15 l 020 I 100 2400 900 2 150 2 950

ii) 20 l 360 1 300 2 400 1 200 2 350 2 950
iii) 23 l 600 1400 2400 1 300 2450 2 950
iv) 29 2000 1 500 2 700 1300 2450 3 250

NOTES
1 All dimensions given above for lifts having 2 panel telescopic or 4 panel centre opening power operated doors (4P COPD) with
counterweight at side, are recommended dimensions primarily for architects and building planners. Any variations mutually agreed to
between the manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, variation in,
i) car inside dimensions shall be within the maximum area limits specified in accordance with accepted standards [8-5A(6)] .
ii) entrance width on higher side is permitted.
iii) entrance width on lower side is pennitted up to 100 rnm subject to minimum of 700 mm.
2 Car depth of2 100 mm may be considered In residential/commercial buildings where use of only ambulance stretcher is envisaged.
T he hoist-way depth maybe reduced accordingly. .

Table 20 Pit Depth for Passenger/Stretcher/Hospital Lifts MRL

(Clause 5.10.3.1)
All dimensions in millimetrcs.

Sl No. of Pit Depth for Speed

No. Passengers
1 mls 1.6 mls 1.8 mls 2 mls 2.5 nvs 3 m/s
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

i) 4 1 600 1800 2 000 2 200

ii) 6 I 600 I 800 2 000 2 200
iii) 8 I 600 1 800 2000 2 200
iv) 10 I 600 1 800 2 000 2 200
v) 13 I 600 1800 2000 2 200 2 500 3 100
vi) 15 I 600 1800 2 000 2 200 2 500 3 100
vii) 16 1 600 I 800 2 000 2200 2 500 3 100
viii) 20 I 800 1 800 2000 2200 2 500 3 100
ix) 22 I 800 1 800 2000 2200 2 500 3 100
x) 26 1 800 I 800 2 000 2200 2 500 3 100
xi) 29 1 800 I 800 2 000 2 200 2 500
NOTE Recommended dimensions for pit depth for different lift speeds are given in the table. These dimensions may differ in
practice as per individual manufac turer's design depending upon lm1d, speed and drive. However, the pit depth shall be such as to
confonn to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards (8-5A(7)].

NATIO NAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

 '
)
)
Table 21 Overhead H eight for Passenger and Stretcher/Hospital Lifts MRL
)
(Clause 5. 10.3. 1)
)
All dimensions in mill imetres.
)
Sl No. of For Speed
No. Passengers )
I nv's 1.6 m/s :;; Rated Speed $ 2 m/s 2.5 nv's 3 nv's )
( I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
)
i) 4 CH+ 1 900 C H +2400
)
ii) 6 CH+ 1 900 CH + 2 400
ii i) 8 CH+ 1 900 CH +2400 )
iv) 10 CH+ 1 900 C H +2 400
)
v) 13 Cl-1 + I 900 C H +2 400 C H +2 600 CH+2 800
vi) 15 CH+ I 900 CH + 2 400 CH+2 600 C H +2 800 )
vii) 16 CH+ 1900 CH +2 400 C H +2 600 C I-1 +2 800 )
viii) 20 CH+ I 900 CI-1 +2 400 CH+2 600 CH +2 800
ix) 22 CH+ I 900 C H +2400 CH +2 600 CH +2 800 )
x) 26 CH+ I 900 CH +2 400 Cl-1 + 2 600 CH +2 800 )
xi) 29 C H + I 900 CH +2 400 C H +2 600
)
NOTE - Recommended dimensions fo r overhead for di fferent li ft speeds are given in the table. These dimensions may dilfer in
practice as per individual manufac turer 's design depending upon load , speed a nd drive. However, the overhead sha ll be such as to )
conform to the requirements of bolt om c l earan~e and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards [8-5A(7)].
)
)
Table 22 Recommended Dimensions of Goods Lifts MRL (Speed 1.0 m/s)
(Clause 5. 10.3. 1) )
All dimensions in millimetrcs. )
)
Sl Rated Car Size Door T elescopic 4PCOPO 2P COI'D Over head P it
No. L oad Size Door H eigh t Depth )
Shaft Size Sha ft Size Shaft Size
)
kg Width Depth Width Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth HR PH )
( I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) ( 10) ( II ) (12) ( 13)
)
i) 500 I 300 l 100 800 I 950 I 800 CH + l 900 I 600
)
ii) I 000 l 600 I 550 I 000 2 250 2 050 CH + I 900 I 600
iii) I 600 l 400 2400 l 300 2 550 3 000 2 500 3 000 C H + 1 900 I 800 )
iv) 2000 I 500 2 700 I 300 2 550 3 300 2 550 3 300 C H + I 900 I 800
)
v) 2 500 I 800 2 650 I 700 3 150 3 250 CH + 2 100 I 800
vi) 3 000 2 000 2 700 I 800 3 350 3 300 CH + 2 100 I 800 )
vii) 4000 2 100 3 400 l 800 3 400 4 000 CH + 2 100 2 100 ) I

viii) 5 000 2 500 3 500 2 200 3 800 4 100 CH + 2400 2 200

)
NOTES ) '
1 CH is the clear car he ight li·om car finished Ooor level to car roof (goods lifts will normally not have any false ceiling).
2 Normal range for CHis 2 100 mm to 2 400 mm. )
3 Door height is less than or equal to the car height C H. )
4 In case counterweight sa fety is applicable check for dimensions with li ft manufacturer.
5 All dimensions given above for lifts having telescopic or centre opening power operated doors (COPD) with counterweight at
) '

s ide, are recommended dimensions primari ly for architects and bui lding planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the )
manufacturer and the purchaser are permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the goods !ill shall be based on a load of not less
than 3.45 kN/m2 of the net inside car area. )
6 Recommended dimensions for overhead and pit depth for different lift speeds are given in the table. These dimensions may differ in ) I
practice as per individual manufac turer 's design depending upon load, speed and drive. However, the overhead a nd pit depth shall be
such as to conform to the requirements of bottom clearance and top clearance in accordance with the accepted standards [8-5A(7)]. )
)
) I

PART 8 BUI LDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLAT ION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 39 )
I\ lOV ING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)

)
Table 23 Recommended Dimensions of Automobile Lifts MRL COPD (Speed 0.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s)
)
(Clause 5.10.3.1)
)
All dimensions in millimetres.
)
Sl Rated Car Size 6PCOPDDoor Shaft Size Overhead Pit
) No. Load Size: Opposite Height Depth
) kg Entrances
Width Depth Width Width Depth HR PH
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i) 3 000 2 500 5 500 2 200 3 800 6 450 4 850 2 500
) ii) 4000 3 000 6 000 2 700 4 300 6 950 4 850 2 500
NOTES
1 Car height normal range is 2 100 mm to 2 700 mm.
) 2 Overhead height shown is requi red for all values of car height CH shown above.
3 In case counterweight safety is applicable check for dimensions with li fl manufacturer.
)
4 All dimensions given above for machine room less li fts with 6 panel centre opening power doors (6P COPD) used for automobiles are
) recommended dimensions for architects and building planners. Any variations mutually agreed to between the manufacturer and the
purchaser are permitted. However, the minimum rated load for the automobile lift shall be based on a load of not less than 1.45kN/m2
) of the net inside car area.
5 Dimensions of pit depth and overhead may differ in practice as per individual manufacturer's design depending upon load, speed and
) drive. However, the pit depth and overhead shall be such as to conform to the requi rements of bottom clearance and top clearance in
) accordance with the accepted standards [8 SA(7)].
6 The lift car width should be selected such that in.case of emergency while the automobi le is in the lift car the driver should be able
) to open the automobile door and come out of the automobile.
)
c) General requirements related to the lift The approach of the landing door on each floor
)
well- The we ll s hall be exclusively used shall be kept lighted during the whole time
) for lifts. [t s ha ll not conta in c.ables or the lift is available for use at night, and during
) d ev ic es, e tc other tha n fo r th e lift. the day time if so required due to insufficient
Permanently installed adequate lighting natural light.
) sha ll be provided comprising suffic ient When th e distance between consec uti ve
number of lamps fixed throughout the lift landi ng door sil ls exceeds 11 000 mm,
w ell s uch that the illumination level 1 m intermediate emergency landing(s) with lift
above th e car roof w it hin its vert ica l landing dom·(s) shall be provided such that
projection at any position of the car in the the distance between any two consecutive
)
well and I m above pit floor everywhere a landings is not more than 11 000 mm. Rescue
per so n can stand, wor k and /or move through these landings is permissible in case
) between the working areas shall be at least of automatic rescue device operation.
) 50 lux and at least 20 lux at remaining No counter-weight shall be allowed to travel
locations , even when a ll the doors are in any lift well , or part of any lift we ll other
) closed. than that to which it belongs.
) NOTE - Additional lamps may be fixed on the In the case of a lift well which is common to
) car top as a part of the well lighting system to more than one Iift and where the Iift car or the
achieve this.
)
counterweight of one lift is working in
Well li ghli ng switch shall be located in the juxtapos ition to the lift car or counterweight
) machine room close to the main switch and of another li ft, such lift cars or counterweights
) pit lighting switch in lift wel l close to lower shall be guarded carefull y and adequately in
landing door. order to protect persons working in the lift well
)
Should a lift entrance open out in to an area or on the li ft cars from accidental contact with
) exposed to the weather, the entrance should such cars or counterweights in any part of their
be protected by a suitab le canopy and the travel.
)
ground level sloped up to the lift entrance to
d) Constmction ofthe fiji well - The side walls
prevent rain or drainage water entering the lift
of the lift well may be made of reinforced
) well through the clearances around the landing
cement concrete at least l 50 mm thick; or
doors. Any push buttons exposed should be
) brick or sim ilar fire resis ting materials
of weatherproof type.

40 NATIONAL llUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
)
 )
)
provided tie beams are made available for lift machine, by the guide rails at the moment of )
guide rail fixings at such heights as specified safety gear operation, by eccentric load in the
by the lift manufacturer, so as to provide car, by the action of buffers, by the application )
satisfactory anchoring arrangement for fixing of anti-rebound devices, by loading and )
guide rails and other equipment to the lift well. unloading the car, etc.
)
The inner surface of the lift well and its The walls of the well shall withstand a force
enclosure facing any lift-car entrance shall, so of I 000 N, being evenly distributed over an )
far as practicable, be kept smooth and flush area of 900 cm 2 in round or square section )
devoid of projections or recesses. Where any and applied at right angles to the wall at any
projections or tops of the recesses cannot be point on either face, )
rendered flush, they shall be levelled on the I) without permanent def01mation greater )
underside to an angle not less than 60° from than I mm; and
)
the horizontal, by means of metal plates, 2) without elastic deformation greater than
cement re ndering or other fire resisting 15mm. )
material. Glass panels, plane or formed shall be made )
Where a lift car levell ing device is operative of laminated glass. Such panels and their
with the li ft car door open, such interior
)
fi xings shall withstand horizontal static force
surfaces shall alviays fotm a smooth and flush of l 000 N applied on an area of 900 cm2 at )
surface below each landing level for a depth any point, from either side, without permanent )
to at least the depth of the car-levelling zone deformation.
plus the distance through which the lift car )
t) Partition walls between lijis in a common lift
may travel of its own momentum when the well- In case of com mon lift we ll fo r ) I
power is cut-off. I
multiple lifts, the partition wall(s) of the )
The distance between the lift well enclosure common lift well may be either be RCC or
on the sides facing any lift-car entrance and brick or steel or glass which may be provided ) \
the sill edge of the car shall not be more
than 30 mm in the landing zone below the
with openings for escape of air displaced clue
to movement of lift in the adjacent well. For
) I
landing gate. If such distance is more than
30 mm in the lift well enclosure, the same shall
be finished with suitable and smooth plaster
high speed lifts the partition between the li.ns
maybe of suitable wire grill I expanded metal
of following specifications:
I
I
i
l,
work or fascia plates so as to make the surface
I) It shall be made of at least 2.2 mm thick I
thereof devoid of all projections and recesses.
steel wire or expanded metal. ) l
In case the enclosure wall on the sides facing I'
2) A ball of 25 mm diameter shall not pass ) t
the lift-car entrance is more than 130 mm from I
the sill edge of the lift-car platfonn, the lift- through the wire grill. )
car door of such lift shall be provided with 3) It shall be so fi xed as not to deflect more
)
means to prevent it from being opened except than 15 mm when subjected to a force of
when the lift-car is at the landing served by 450 N applied horizontally at any point )
such car entrance. from either side. )
Sufficient space shall be provided between the 6.1.2 Requirements ofthe Pit I
(,
)
guides for the car and the side walls of the lift Pit shall be soundly constructed and maintained in a
well enclosure to allow safe and easy access )
dry (water proofed) and clean condition. Where
to the parts of the sa fety gears for their necessa ry, provis ion shall be made for permanent )
maintenance and repairs. drainage. The floor of the pit shall be able to support
All landing openings shall be protected by beneath each guide rail, force due to mass of gui de
gates or doors which shall extend to the full rails plus the reaction due to safety gear operation. The
height and full width of the landing openings. floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath the car
These op enings s hall not be less than buffer supports, force in Newton, equal to 4 times the
2 000 mm in clear height and 700 mm clear in static load being imposed by the mass of fully loaded
w idth when th e gates or doors are fully car:
opened. There shall not be any common wall
4.g (P + Q)
between lift well and water tank.
e) Strength of the walls of the \Veil - The where
stmcture of the well shall be able to support P mass of e mpty ca r and components
at least the loads which may be applied by the supported by the car, that is part of travelling

PART 8 BUILDI NG SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLAT ION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 41

i\IOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
I
)
)
cable, compensating rope/chain, if any, etc, possible without restricting the overhead distance
) required for nom1al safety precautions . In case where
in kg;
) Q = rated load, in kg; and
machine room provision on top is a limitation, either
machine room less lift or basement drive or side drive
) g acceleration due to gravity.
lift can be considered. The spaces and tolerances shall
) The floor of the pit shall be able to support beneath the be in accordance with the following:
counterweight buffer support, force in Newton, equal
) a) Requirements associated ·with machine room a11d
to 4 times the static load being imposed by the mass of
) the counterweight: pulley room (where lift machine1y is placed i11 the
machine room)
) 4.g (P + q.Q)
)
I) The lift machine, controll er and all o the r
where
apparatus and equipment of a lift installation,
) P ma ss of empty car a nd components except such apparatus and equipment having
) supported by the car, that is patt of travelling functional location in the lift well or o ther
cable, compensating rope/chain, if any, etc, positions, shall be placed in the machine room
) in kg; which shall be adequately lighted and rendered
) Q rated load, in kg; fire-resistant and weather-proof.
) g acceleration due to gravity; and If parts of different lifts are present in one
m achine and/or pulley room each lift shall be
) q live load balancing facto r (normally,
identified with a numbe r, letter or co lour
q = 0.5).
) consistently used for all parts (machine,
The floor of the pit sha ll be able to s upport upward controller, over speed governor, switches, etc).
) thrust of the tied down rope compensation device, if
2) Machine room should be considered as plant
) provided. If accessible spaces do ex ist below the well,
space, and conditions provided to permit
the base of the pit shall be designed for an imposed
) reliable operation of electrical switchgear and
load of at least 5 000 N/m2 and the counterweight shall
rotating machinery, and be conduc ive to good
) be equippe d with safe ty gea r. ln addition, it is
m a intena nce. The machine room s hall be
recommended to provide double s lab for the lift pit.
) either air conditioned or adequate ly ventilated
NOTES so as to maintain the amb ient temperature
)
I Lift wells should preferably not be situated above a space therein between +5°C and +40°C. T he
) accessible to persons.
machine room shall be such that the motors
2 Enclosing projected area o f the lift shaft under the pit in
) and equipment as well as electric cables etc
acce ssible spaces wi ll no t nulli fy above provisions.
are protected as far as possibl e from dust and
There shall not be any common wall/s lab between li ft humidity. Mac hine room sho uld also be
) pit and any water reservoir. protected from all weather and if ventilation
The pit s hall be accessible by an access door. A louvers are provided, they should be des ig ned
)
permanent ladder inside the well may be provided close and located to prevent entry of rain water in
) the machi ne room.
to the last landing i11-lieu of access door, if the pit depth
) docs not exceed 2.5 m. The well, machinery spaces and pulley rooms
shall not be used to prov ide vcnti latio n o f
) NOTE - In case of structural limitatio ns fo r providing pit
rooms other than those belonging to the lift.
access door at pit floo r k vcl, alte rnative anangement to access
) pit ma y be provided which shall allow access to pit w ith 3) Rescue instructi ons with requi red tools and
comp lete safety. tackles, if any, shall be made available in the
)
A physical means of protection shall be provided to machine room.
)
prevent accidental contact with the counterweight. 4) Machi ne room floor sha ll be provided with a
) trap door, if necessary. T he size of the trap
The pit shall be equipped with a stop switch which is
) doo r s ha ll be as p e r manufactu re r ' s
easily accessible fro m the lowest landing and the pit
recommendation. Since the purpose of the trap
) floor. If more than one switch is required, they shall be
doo r is to lift or lower the ma c hin e ry ,
wired in series.
) controller, etc, betv•een machine room and the
6.1.3 Requireme11ts Associated with Machi11e Room and top landing, it may be necessary to provided
)
Pulley Room similar trap door in the terrace slab as well
) dependi ng on the des ign of the building.
Genera lly lifts ha ve machine rooms immediately over
) The trap door when closed s hall be able to
the li ft wel l, and this s hould be arranged, whenever
s upport 2 000 Non an area of0.20 m x 0.20 m
)
)
42 NATrONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
 )
)
)
at any position. The trap door sha ll not open These structural steps shall be provided wi th
downwards. Hinges, if an y, shall be of a type adequate hand holds and shall not be too steep. ">
which cannot be unhooked. Trap doors shall 9) A danger notice board s hall be dis played )
be locked. When the trap door is in the open permanently on the outside of the machine )
positio n, precautions shall be taken to prevent room doo r and near the mach inery.
)
the fall of persons (for example, a guardrail) .I 0) There shall not be any com mon wall/s lab
and prevent the trapdoor from closing such as between mac hine room and any water
to cause a crushing hazard (for example by reservoir. )
counterbalance). II) The machine room shall not be used as a store
)
5) Lig hting shall be prov ided to give at least room or for any purpose other than housing
200 lu x around the contro ller and machine. the machinery/components connected with the )
At least one plug socket point per I ift shall be li ft installation. The machine room shall not )
provided in the machine room. The switch for act as a passage to any other room or uti lity.
the machine room li ght shall be fi xed near the )
The lift well, lllachine and pulley rooms may,
entrance of the mac hine room. The· machine however contain, )
room wa lls, ceiling and floor shou ld be
i) equi pment for air conditioning or heating )
finisheci in dust-resisting materials, tiles, etc,
of these spaces, excluding steam heating
or pa inted as a minimum to stop dust )
and hi g h pre ss ure water heating.
ci rculation, which otherwise could damage
However, any control and adjustmen t )
rotating machinery and cause fai lu re of
devices of the heating apparatus shall be
switchgear. )
located outside the well.
6) The machine room sha ll be so designed as to )
ii) fire detecto rs and/or s uppression system ,
al low free and easy access to a ll parts of the
wit h a high operat ing temperature , )
equipment and the w id th of the clear space
approp riate for the electrical equ ipment
around the machine from any two sides shall )
and suitably protected against acc idental
in no case be less than 600 mm. Provis ion shall )
impact.
be made to allow the removal and replacement
When sprinkl e r s yst e ms are used, )
of various units. The entra nce of the machine
act ivation of the sp rinkler shall only be
room shall be minimum 1 m wide and 2 m )
possible, w hen the lift is stationary at a
hi gh to allow removal and replacement of
landing and the e lectrical supply of the )
maehine1y therein. The floor of the machine
lift and I ig hting circuits are automatically
room shall be desig ned and constructed to )
sw it c hed off by t he fi re o r s moke
carry safe ly at any point the heavies t part of
detection system. )
the equipment and withstand the loads and
NOTE - Such smoke, fire detection and sprinkler )
forces to which they are intended to be
system s . • the rcspon,ibility of the building
subjected to. If the floor docs not extend to managem..: t. )
the enclosing wall, th e open s ides shall be
12) Machine room floor shal l be designed to cany )
adequately guarded by suitable means for
a n im posed (live) load of not less than
example, rai ls, guards. )
I 0 kN/m 2 over the who le area and also any
7) The height of the machine room s ha ll be load wh ich may be imposed thereon by the )
sufficient to a I low any portion of the equipment used in the machine room or by
equipment to be accessible and removable fo r )
any react ion from any such equipment both
repairs and rep laceme nt and shall not be less during periods o f normal opera ti on, )
tha n 2 000 mm clear from the floor of the maintenance and repair.
access area and working area. There shall be )
13) One or more beams or hooks w ith th e
a c lear vertical distance of at least 300 mm indication of the s a fe working load, as )
above the rotating parts of the machi ne. appropria te, s h a ll be provided in th e )
8) T he machine room shall be locked and shall ma c hine ry spaces, and con ve ni e nt ly
be accessible to th ose w ho are concerned with )
positioned to permi t the hois ting of heavy
th e operat io n and mainten a nc e of the equipment. )
machinery or equipment. Approach way to 14) The total load on overhead beams used for )
machine room from top landing level shall be s upporting machinery shal l be assumed as
di rect, easy and safe to walk by way of stairs. )
equal to all equipment resting o n the beams
If stairs are not poss ible, sufficiently wide and plus twice the max imum load suspended from )
deep permanent structural steps may be used. the beams.
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS ANl> 43 )
MOVING WALI<S: SA LIFTS
)
)
)
)
) be provided with permanently installed
15) The factor of safety for all overhead beams
) and supports based on ultimate strength of the electt·ic lighting on the basis of at least 200 lux
) material and load in accordance with ( 14) shall at floor level.
be not less than the following: 8) One o r more beams or hooks w ith the
)
i) For steel :5 indication of the safe wo rking load, as
) ii) For reinforced concrete :7 a pprop ria te, shall be prov ided in the
The deflection of the overhead beams under machinety spaces, conveniently positioned to
)
the max imum static load calculated in permit the hoisting of heavy equipment.
)
accordance with above shall not exceed 9) The total load on overhead beams used for
) I11 500 of the span. supporting machinery shall be assumed as
16) The place in which the overhead pulleys, over equal to all equipment resting on the beams
)
speed governors and similar machinery are plus twice the maximum load suspended from
) the beams.
fixed s hall be ea s ily accessibl e for
) maintenance and repa ir purposes. It shall be I 0) The factor of safety for all overhead beams
lighted adequately and safe working procedure and suppot1s based on ultimate strength of the
)
shall be established for maintenance and repair material and load in accordance with (9) shall
) works. be not less than the following:
) 17) ll is recommended that emergency ex it is i) For steel :5
provided in case of large machine rooms ii) For reinforced concrete :7
)
having four or more lifts. The deflection of the overhead beams under
) 18) Where the mac hine room occup ies a the maximum stat ic load calcu lated in
) prominent position on roof of a building, accordance with above shall not exceed
provision shou ld be made for li g htning 1/ 1 500 of the span.
protection in accordance Part 8 'Building c) Requirements associated with machine spaces
) Services, Section 2 Electrica l and Allied (where machinery is placed outside of the well)
)
Insta llatio ns' of the Code and app li cable
standards. 1) Machinery spaces outside of the well shall be
) b) Requirements associated with machine spaces constmcted to withstand the loads and forces
(where machine1y is placed in the well) to which they are subjected.
)
2) The total load on beams used for supporting
) I) Access to the interior of the machinery and machinery sha ll be assu\ned as equal to all
pulley spaces sha ll be capable of being equipment resting on the beams plus twice the
)
properly lit by a permanent electric Iight maximum load suspended from the beams.
) fixture(s) and easy to use in complete safety
3) The factor of safety for all beams and supports
) in all circu mstances without necessitating
based on ul ti mate strength of the material and
entry into private premises.
) load in accordance with (2) above shall be not
2) Machinery spaces inside the well shall be less than the following:
) des igned and constructed to wi thstancl the
i) For steel :5
)
loads and forces they are subjected to.
ii) For rei nforced concrete :7
3) In the case of partially enclosed wells located
)
at the exterior of the building, the machinery The deflection of the overhead beams under
s hall be s uitably protected aga in st the maximum stat ic loa d ca lculated in
)
envi ronmental influences. accordance with above s hall not exceed
) II L500 of the span.
4) Provi sion should be given to access the
) machine for maintenance purpose either from 4) Access to the interior of the machinery and
car top or othetwisc pulley spaces shall be,
)
5) The clear height for movement shal l not be i) capable of be ing properly lit by a
) pennanent electric light fixture(s); and
less than 2 m.
)
6) The mac hi ne ry spaces sha ll be suitably ii) easy to use in complete sa fe ty in a ll
) ventilated. The electric equipment of the circumstances without necessitating entty
machinery shall be protected as far as it is into private premises.
)
reaso nably practicable from dust, harmful The clea r height for movement shall not be
) fumes and humidity. less than 2 m.
) 7) The wo rking area and machinery spaces shall 5) The machinery shall be located inside a
)
44 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDJA 2016
)

)
)
 )

)
)
cabinet consisting of imperforate walls, floor, finish, the architrave be ing set accurately }
roof and lockable door(s). plumb.
)
6) The machinery cabinet shall be suitabl y 3) Structural limits for l((t wells at any /eve/ -
Ifthe net plumb well (dimensions A and Bin )
ventilated. It shall be such that the machinery
is protected as far as it is rea s onab ly Fig. 3) and the nominal structural entrance )
practicable from dust, harmful fumes and openings (dimensions C and Din Fig. 3) are
defined by plumb lines, the actual wall should )
humidity.
not encroach on these dimensions. )
7) The inside of the machinery cabinet shall be Dimension K (inside face of wall of Fig. 3)
provided with pennanently installed electric )
should fall within the following limits:
lighting on the basis of at least 200 lux at floor )
i) For wells up to 30 m : 0 - 25 mm
level. The switch placed inside close to the
ii) For wells up to 60 m : 0- 35 mm )
door(s), at an appropriate height, shall control
I ighting of the cabinet. iii) For wells up to I00 m : 0 - 50 mm )
iv) For wells tal ler than I00 m : 0- 50 mm for )
d) Dimensional tolerances
any lOOm
1) Lfft well dimensions - Plan dimensions of )
portion of the
lift wells given by the lift manufacturer well. )
represent the minimum clear plumb sizes. The When architraves are to be supplied by the
purchaser's representative, in conjunction with )
li ft manufacturer dim e nsio n L (s ide of
the builder, should ensure that adequate s tructural opening of Fig. 3) should fa ll )
tolerances are included in the building design w ithin the limits of 0 and 25 mm and )
so that the s pecified minimum p lumb dimens ion M(outer face of the front wall of
dimensions are obtained in the finished work. )
Fig. 3) s hould not vary to a greater extent
Dimensio ns in excess of these minimum than can be accommodated by the subsequent )
plumb dimensions for lift well and openings front wall finis h, the architrave being set
(but not less) can be accommodated by the )
accurately plumb. When the entrance linings
lift manufacturer up to ce rtain max imum arc supplied by the builder, corresponding )
values beyond which changes in design may provision should be made for the finished )
be necessary involving addi tional expense or openings to be accurate ly plumb one above
work by the bu ilder. The purchaser 's the other for the fu ll travel of the lift end to )
representative should take these factors into des ign size. )
account when specifying the lift well structural
dimensions on the basis of the constructional )
tolera nce ap propriat e to th e building )
technique.
)
2) Landing door openings - It is very important
that fini shed landing openings should be r-- --- - ---- , - )
accurate to design s ize and plumb one above 1 1
I 1 )
the other for the full travel of the li ft. In I 1 B
co nstru cting the s truc tura l openin gs in )
1 1
concrete walls to lift wells it is not possible to 1 1 )
achieve a degree of accuracy verticall y which L - - - T- - T - - - _j - ¥-+..t---1-----r
)
will allow doors and frames to be inserted in I I
the opening without some form of masking or )
packing to overcome inaccuracies. Provisions )
shou ld th erefore be ma de in des ign by
increasing the nominal height from design )
fi nished floor level and width of openings to ENTRANCE )
each jamb and head. In addition, the aligmnent
)
of the outer face of the front wall of the lift FIG . 3 LIFT W EL L TOLERANCE
well is of importance when architrave of fixed )
dimensions are called for, and in this case the 6.2 Electrical Installation Requirements
)
alignment of the outer face from floor to floor The lift manufacturer should specify, on a schedule,
shou ld not vary to a greater extent than can partic ulars of full load cu rrent, starting current, )
be accommodate by the subsequent front wall maximum permiss ibl e voltage drop, size of switches )
PART 8 13UILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCA LATO RS AND 45 )
MOVING \VALKS: SA LifTS
)

)
)
)
)
and other details to suit requirements. The main power Any capacitors to correct the power factor shall be
) cable and lighting cable shall be routed through connected before the m ain switch of the power
) respective lift shaft for every lift. It is important that circuit.
the switches at the intake and in the machine room
) 6.2.2 Residual Current Device
which are provided by the electrical contractor are of
) con cct size. No fonn of 'NO VOLT' trip relay should Res idual cunent device (RCD), if provided, right type
be included anywhere in the power supply of the lift. and sensitivity shall be selected.
)
)
6.2.1 Main Switches The RCD shall,

) For each lift, a main switch capable of breaking the a) have 10 ti mes the maximum leakage current
supply to the lift o n all the live conductors shall be (300 mA maximum) as tripping current and
provided. This switch shall be capable of interru pti ng be suitable for frequency converters with a
) the highest current in volved in normal conditions of 3-phase supply.
use of the lift. b) be sens itive for s inusoidal currents up to
)
This switch shall not cut the circuits feeding the I 000 Hz, insensitive for cunents more than
following: I 000 Hz.
) NOT E - This ki nd of RCDs are ge nerally classified as
a) Car lig hting and ventilation ' Type B' .
) b) Socket outlet on the car roof; T hree-phase power supply for the lift should never be
) c) Lighting of machinery spaces; protected with a 30 mA res idua l current device (RCD).
d) Socket o utlet in the machinery and pulley The 30 mA RCD hips easily when the lift starts to drive
spaces and in the pit; and prevents the lift to ru n . If the construction-time
e) Lighting of the lift well including pit; power supply is for some reason protected with a 30 mA
)
f) Alarm device; and residual current device (RCD), s uitably sized isolation
transformer needs to be provided by the electr ica l
) g) Automatic rescue device.
contractor.
) The switch shall be located,
6.2.3 Suppiy Cables Wiring and Apparatus
) 1) in the machine room, where it exists;
The main power supply cables providing the electricity
) 2) where no machine room exists, in the control supply to a lift installation shall be flame retardant type
cabinet; and PVC or XLPE insulated armoured cables. The cable
)
3) at the emergency and test panel, when control should be terminated in the main s witch. For each lift,
panel is mounted in the well. 6
o ne 4 15 +-JOJ>crccnt
Percent V
'
3-phase ' 4-w ire ' 50 Hz and one
If the emergency panel is separate from test panel, the
single phase 230 ~;;~::,, V , 2-wire, 50 Hz supply shall
) switch shall be at emergency pane l. If the main switch
is not easil y accessible from the controller cabinet, then be independently provided. O ther th an this, power
)
the cabinet shall be provided w ith an isolating switch. circuit at 230 :~;~::~~. V percent for power and lighting
)
The main switches shall have stable open and closed sockets in the lift machine room and the lift shaft shall
) pos itions, and shall be capable of be ing locked-off in be provided. This is to fac ilitate m aintenance and other
) the ope n pos ition with th e use o f a pad lock or related works with lighting and socket outlets while
equivalent, to ensure no inadverten t operation takes the lift is switched off.
) place.
No cables which are not part of lift installation shall be
) run in the li ft well. T he lift cables sha ll be run in
For a single lift, this switch should be fixed adjacent to
) the machine room entrance in the machine roo m. In a respecti ve lift wells.
machine room common to more than one lift, each main F ixed electr ical w iring for circuit voltage up to 250 V
)
switch should be conveniently situated with respect to located in li ft wells sha ll be one of the following:
) the lift it controls.
a) PVC wires encased in rigid metal conduit or
) The supp ly to the car light should be from a separate trunki ng.
) circui t, and controlled by a switch in the machine room. b) PVC insulated PVC sheathed cables.
For multiple lifts w ith a common machine roo m a
) c) PVC wires in fl ex ible m etall ic or plastic
separate supp ly should be provided fo r each car. The
conduits not exceeding 1 500 mm in length
) car lighting supply should be independent of the power
for lim it switches, interlocks, push buttons and
) supp ly mains
similar devices.
)
46 NATIONAL BU ILDING CODE 01' INDIA 2016
)

J
)
 )
)

Control cables on lift cars shall be nm in rigid metallic 10) Eme1gency signal or telephone - The lift car )
conduit or trunking. Short nms of fl exible conduits may shall be provided either with an emergency )
be used, where they are securely fastened in place and signal that is operative from the lift car and
a udible outside the lift we ll or with a )
not exposed to oil and grease. Short runs of flexible
cord may be used as flexible connections between fixed telephone. )
wirings on the car and the switch on car door provided I I) When an alarm bell is to be provided, each )
that chord is securely fastened in position and so located car is fitted with an alarm push button which
as not to be subjected to mechanical damage. is wired to a terminal box in the lift well at the )

Wiring in machine room shall be run in rigid metallic ground floor by the lift manufacturer. This )
trunking. The trunking in machine room floor shall be a larm be ll , to be suppli ed by the lift
)
flush with the finished floor to avoid trip hazard. The manufacturer (with indicator for more than
one lift) should be fixed in an agreed position )
following additional requirements may al so be taken
care of: and wi red to the lift well. The supply may be )
from a battety (or transformer) fixed in the
l) The lift sub-circuit from the meter room machine room or, when avail able, from the )
should be separate from oth er building building fire alarm supply. )
services. Each lift should be capable of bei ng 12) When a telephone is to be provided in the lift
isolated from the mains supply. This means )
car the lift manufacturer should fi t the cabinet
of isolation should be lockable. The electric in the car and provide wiring from the car to a )
supply cables shall run in a route safe from te rmina l box adj acent to th e lift we ll.
1 fire, subsequently within the respecti ve lift Alternatively, a ha nds-free unit may be
)
1
shafts to the machine room. provided. The type of telephone should be )
1 2) For banks of interconnected lifts, a separate stated in the enquiry. )
s ub-circ uit is required for the common
supervisory system, in order that any car may 6.2.4 Earthing )
be shut down without isolating the supervis01y There shall be separate exclusive earth pit for the lift )
control of the remainder lifts. or a group of li fts or the same shall be connected to )
3) When the alarm system is connected to a equipotenti al bonding syste m. There shall be two
transformer or trickle charger, the supply separate and distinct earth conductors provided from )
should be. tak en from the machine roo m the earth pit to the machine room as per good practice )
lighting. [8-5A(8)]. The cross-sectional area of copper earthing
)
4) All electrical supply lines and apparatus in conductor shall be not smaller than half that of the
connection with the lift installation shall be largest current-carrying conductor subject to an upper )
so constructed and shall be so installed, limit of65 mm 2. )
protected, worked and mai ntained that there In case of buildings having emihing through emi h mats
may be no danger to persons therefrom. )
or earth grids, it is petmissiblc to eatih the lift equipment
5) All me ta l casings or metalli c cove rings with separate conductors from these earth mats/grids. )
containing or protecting any electric supply Separate earth pits shall not be a requirement in this )
lines of apparatus shall be efficiently earthed. case.
)
6) No bare conductor shall be used in any Iift
The terminal for the earthing of the frame of the motor,
car as it may cause danger to persons. )
the winding machine, the frame of the control panel,
7) All cables and other wiring in connection with and similar electric appliances which nonnally catTy )
the lift installation shall be of suitable grade the main current shall be at least equi valent to a I 0 mm
for the voltage at which these are intended to )
diameter bolt, stud or screw.
be worked and if metallic covering is used it )
shall be efficiently earthed. The terminal for the earthing of the metallic cases and
covers of door interlocks, door contacts, call and control )
8) Suitable caution notice shall be affixed near
every motor or oth er apparatus in whi ch buttons, stop buttons, car switches, limit switches, )
voltage used exceeds 250 V. junction boxes and simil ar electrical fittin gs which
)
nmmally carry only the control current shall be at least
9) A si ngle trailing cable for lighting control and
equivalent to 5 mm brass screw (such terminal being )
signal circuit shall be permitted, if all the
one specially provided for thi s purpose), and the earth )
conductors of this trailing cable are insulated
conductor size shall be at least equi valent to 0.5 mm 2
for maximum voltage running through any one )
copper.
conductor of this cable.
)
)
PART 8 BUILDI NG SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LI FTS, ESCA LATORS AND 47
MOVING WA LKS: SA LIFTS )
) .
)
)
T he earth co nductor s ha ll be secured to earthing
) termina l in accordance w ith the reco mmendatio ns
) m a d e in good p ract ice [8-5A(8) ] a n d a lso in
confo rmity w ith th e latest provis ions o f Th e Indian··
) The sign shall have the plan of the respective
Electricity A ct, 2003 and the Rules framed thereu nder
) from time to time.
) The exposed metal parts of electrical apparatus installed
) on a lift car shall be sufficiently bonded and earthed.
) Where screwed conduit screws into e lectric fi ttings
carrying contro l cunent making the case and cover
electrically continuous w ith lhe conduit, the earth ing
) of the condu it may be considered to earth the fitting.
Where flexible conduit is used for leading into a fitting,
)
the fitt ing and such leng th of flexible co ndu it sha ll be
effectively earthed .
) per 7.1.l(k)(x) (grounding operation).
7 FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR
) LIFTS
) 7.1 Fire P ro tection Requirements of Lifts in High
) Rise Buildings
) 7.1.1 Buildings of Height 15m and Above
) Fo llow ing requirements over and above those specified
in 6 and 8 and in Part 4 ' Fire and Life safty' of th e
)
Code are applicable to all lifts provided in bui ldings
) having height more than· 15 m :
) delay. Some l ifts out o f all the lifts shall be
a) A ll materials of co nstructio ns in load bearing
) elements, sta i1w ays and co11'idors and facades
shall be non-combustible.
)
b) The interior fini shing materials shall be of very
)
low tlamc spread type.
) c) Walls of the lift bank well enclosu re for a lift
o r g rou p of lifts shall have a fire rat ing of
120 min. The lift we ll sha ll have a vent at the
top, o f area not less than 0.2 m 1 per lift.
) d) Landing doors - L ift land ing doors shall be
imperfo rate. Co llaps ible doors s ha ll no t be
)
permitted. Lift land ing doors provided in the
) li ft enclos u re sha ll have a m inimu m fire
resistance ra ting of 60 min .
e) Lift car door - Lift car d oo rs s ha l l be
)
imperforate. Collaps ible car doors s hall not
) be permitted.
) f) Telephone or o the r communicati on faci I i ties
sha ll be prov ided in the lift car and the lift
)
ma in lobby. Commu nicatio n sys tem fo r lifts
) s·ha ll a lso be connected to the fire contro l
room of the b uild ing if p rovitled. For li fts
)
fo r use b y perso ns wi t h d isa bil ities, t he
) 5)
fac il ities sha ll be pro vid ed in accordance
) w ith 13 o f Pa rt 3 ' Develo pme nt Contro l
Rules and Ge nera l B ui lding Requi rements'
)
o f the Code.
)
48
)
)
)
g) Photo luminescent safety signs shall b~ posted
and maintained o n every floor at or near the
li ft indicati ng that in case o f fire , occupants
shall use the stairs unless instructed otherw ise.
floor showing location of the stairways. T he
plan shall also indicate the direction to and
the leve l of refuge area. A ll signs pos ted and
maintained on every floo r of bui ldi ng s open
to and used by the pu blic shall comply w ith
J.
the requirements of accessible signage given
in 13 of Part 3 ' D evelopment Contro l Rules
and General Bui lding Req uirem ents ' o f the
Code.
h) A ll lifts (fireman' s lifts/non fi reman's li fts)
shall be prov ided with Phase I operation as
j) T he g ro unding o pera ti on may be initiated
by indiv idua l switches fo r li fts or a co mmo n
sw itch fo r a grou p of lifts or by a s igna l from
f ire a l a r m s y s te m of t he b uildin g i f
avai lable.
k) Fireman ~· lift - T he fire man's lift is p rovided
in a buil ding for t.h e pu r pose of a idi ng
fi refighters in evacuating trapped persons in
the buil ding and to take the equipment fo r
fig hting fire to upper levels w ith m inim um
identifie!i as fi reman's lifts.
The number of required firema n' s lifts and
t he ir lo c ati o n s in a bu il d ing wi II va ry
dependi ng on the s ize, des ig n, co mplexity o f
the buil d ing. Some c o ns iderati o ns are as
fo llows:
l) T here shall be at least one fi reman's lift
per b uilding.
2) If there are multiple w ings in the buildi ng,
there shall be at least one fireman's lift
per w ing.
3) If there are mu ltiple banks of li fts in the
bui ld i ng t her e s ha ll be at least o ne
fireman's lift per bank of lifts.
4) If the buildi ng he ig ht is up to 600 m and
it is zoned he ight-w ise and it d oes not
have sing le fireman's li ft servi ng eve ry
floo r of the building, then there shall be
at least o ne fi re man 's lift per zone whi ch
shall serve the main level/fire access level
and shall serve all the landings in the
respective zone.
If the b uild ing height is more than 600 m
and it does not have an y s ing le firman 's
lift serving all the fl oors, that is, it has
all lifts serving only respective zones,
NATIONAL llUILDING C ODE O F lN DIA 20 16
 ,.
)
)
the fireman's lift shall be provided in ix) The wo rd s ' Fireman Lift' s ha ll be )
each zone separately, serving all landings conspicuous ly displayed in fluorescent paint
in respe ct ive zone, with a transfe r on the li ft landi ng. )
landi ng for transferring from one zone x) Operational requirements offireman :~ l((t - )
to another. The lift shall be provided with the following )
Considering all the above, the fireman's lift(s) shall be operational controls, phase I and phase II.
)
identified on the building plan and duly displayed in a) Phase I - Return to evacuationJloor -
Fire Command Centre. )
Shall start when the fireman 's switch at
To be effective in fi re fighting operation, the fireman's the evacuation floor is turned to the 'ON' )
lift shall have following requ irements: position or the signal from smoke detector
)
(if provided by the Bui lding Management
i) The fireman's I i ft may be use d by the )
System) is on. All lifts controlled by this
occupants in normal times.
switch shall cancel all ex isting car calls )
ii) The fireman's lift shall be provided wi th a and separate from landing calls and no
fireman's s'vv itch. The switch shall be a two landing or car calls shall be registered. )
position (ON /OFF) sw itch fi xed at t he T he audio and v isual signal s hall be )
evacuation floor (normally main en trance turned on. All heat and smoke sensitive
)
floor) for ~na bling the lift to be put into door reopening devices shall be rende red
fireman's mode. The switch shall be s ituated inoperative. )
in a glass-fronted box with suitable label and )
If the li ft is t rave lling toward s the
fixed adjacent to the lirt at the entrance level.
evacuation floor, it shall continue driving )
When the switch is on, landing call -points
to that fl oor.
shall become inoperative and the lift shall be )
on the ca r control only or on a priority control If the lift is travel ling away from the
device. When the switch is off, the lift will evacuation floo r, it shall reverse its )
return to normal working. direction at the nearest possible floor )
without opening its doors and retum non-
iii) The fi reman's lift shall be provided \\'ith an )
stop to the evacuation floor.
audio and visual s ignal in the car.
)
iv) The fireman's lift shall have a floor area of Lf the Ii ft is standing at a floor other than
the evacuation floor, it s hall close the )
minimum 1.43 mJ. It shall have loading
capacity of not less than 544 kg (8 persons doors and start travell ing non-stop to the )
I ift). evacuation floor.
)
v) The fireman's Iift sha ll be provided with power When at the evacuation floor, the Ii ft shall
)
operated (automatic) doors of minimum 0.8 m park with doors open.
width. )
The continuous audio s ignal is turned off
vi) The speed of the fi reman's lift shall be 1.0 m/s after thi s return drive. )
or more such that it can reach the top floor NOTE - tflhe building is designed lor alternative )
from main floor/firefighter access level within l!vaeuation floor, in case of lire at main fl oor the
)
l min. In case the bu ilding is zoned, the lifls shall park at the a lternative evacuation floor
fireman's li ft shall operate from the lowest with doors op~!n. )
served landing to the topmost served landing b) Phase II - Operation ofthe 1(/i shall be
)
in I min. as dejined below - The phase 2 is started
after rhase I, if the fireman 's switch is )
NOTE - Notw ithstanding the above, the speed of lifts
shall be e~tabli s h <!d based on 4. ' ON '. )
vii) Reliable alternative source of power supply If the Iifts arc gro unded by the smoke )
should be provided for all fi reman lifts th rough detector signa l, for phase II to begin it
a manually/automatica lly operated change- shall be necessary to turn the fi reman 's
over switch. The ro ute of wiring shall be safe sw itch ' ON'. )
from fire.
The lift docs not respond to landing calls )
vii i) Suitable arrangements such as providing slope but registers car cal ls. All heat and smoke
in the floor of lift lobby shall be made at all )
sen s itive doo r reopening devices are
the landings to prevent water used during rendered inoperative. )
firefighting from entering the lift shafts.
)

PART R BUILDI NG SERVI CES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 49 )

i\IOVI:"'G WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
')
)
}
When the car call button is pressed, the
doors start closi ng. If the button is
)
)
released before the doors are fully closed,
they re-open. The car call is registered
only when the doors are fully closed.
After registering a car call the lift starts
driving to the call. If more than one car
)
call is registered, only the nearest call is
) answered ~nd the remaining calls will be
) cancelled at the first stop.
At the floor the doors are opened by
)
pushing the door open button. If the
) button is released before the doors are
) fu lly open, they re-close.
)
The I ift returns to normal service when it
stands at the evacuation floor with doors
) open and the switch is turned 'OFF'
) thereafter.
The operation of fireman's lift shall be
) by means of a full set of push buttons in
the car. Other operating systems shall be
rendered inoperative.
)
) 7. 1.2 Buildings of Height 60 111 and above
The fo llowing requirements over and above those
specified in 7.1.1 are applicable to the lifts and lift
enclosures provided in buildings having height more
than 60 m.
) a) s
Fireman lifts - Following additional
requirements apply to all fireman's lifts in the
) stairs may well increase evacuation times in many
building.
) building designs, especially low and medium rise
l) The fireman 's lift sha ll have loading
) capacity of not less than I 000 kg and
) noor area not less than 2.35 m2 •
2) Electrical equipment within the fireman's
) lift well and on the car, located within 1.0
m of any wall containing a landing door,
)
s hall be protected from dripping and
sp lashing water or prov ided with
) enclosures classi fied to at least IPX3
according to good practice [8-5A(9)].
)
3) The electrica l switchgear placed less than
)
I m above Iift pit floor shall be protected
to IP 67 as per to good practice [8-5A(9)].
The socket out let and lowest lamp shall
also be located at least 0.5 m above the
highest permissible water level in the pit.
4) Suitable means shall be provided in the lift
pit to ensure that water wi II not rise above
)
the level of the f·ully compressed car buffer.
) 5) Means shall be provided to prevent the
) water leve l in the pit from reaching
equ ipment whic h cou ld create a
) room, etc, should be continuously monitored to
malfunction of the fireman's lift.
)
50
)
6) Alternative source of power supply shall
be provided for all fireman's lifts through
r
automatically operated changeover
sw itch. In case of fa ilure of normal
electric supply, it shall automatically trip
over to alternative supply. The route of
l
wiring shall be safe from fire.
b) There shall be Fire Command Centre (FCC)
and/or Building Management System (BMS)
room in the building. CCTV cameras shall be
fix ed in the lift lobbies and the display
screen(s) shall be placed in the FCC or BMS
room.
7.2 Evacuation Lifts
Buildings, particularly super high rise (height more than
200 m) buildi ngs, may be designed for a systematic
evacuation of persons in case of emergencies that are
relevant to a specific building. There are many reasons
why a building may need to be evacuated, for example,
a fire, exp losion, che mica l or biologica l a ttack,
flooding, storm damage, earthquake, etc. Not all of
these are relevant to every building hence those which
are not relevant can be disregarded. Des igners of
bui ldings ·shall determine, if a particular haza rd is
sufficiently great as to require addressing. This clause
deals primarily with fire situation although similar logic
can be used in case of other situations as well.
The lifts may be planned only supp lementary to, not as
a replacement of, exits. In fact, using lifts instead of
bui ldings. However, lifts may be allowed to play a
positive role in assisting and improving efficiency of
the building evacuation strategy especially for persons
with disabilities. The bui lding designers should decide,
if they want to use lifts for evacuation purpose. It may
be noted that in general a fireman's lift may be suitable
as an evacuation lift.
7.2.1 Pre-requisites to Using Lifts for Evacuation in
Case of Fire
7.2.1.1 Detecting fire, smoke, and temperature
Methods of fire detection are well established. [f the
lifts are to operate a safe evacuation service, good
monitoring of the fire in relation to li ft equipment is
essential.
To ensure the safety of users and li ft equipment; the li ft
machine room, lift well (including lift pit and overhead
areas) and landing areas shall be provided with means
to detect and monitor for the presence of smoke and
heat. Temperature in any safe area provided for persons
to wait (lobby, refuge, etc) and the lift well, machine
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF lNDlA 2016

determine if it is safe and remains safe for persons and
equipment. When an unsafe temperature or presence of
smoke is detected the infom1ation should be sent to the
BMS or FCC. The BMS o r FCC should determine what
is to be done next and send appropriate signals to the
lift, for examp le remove lift from service at floor x with
doors parked open or closed as required. The equipment
used for this sensing and monitoring of heat and smoke
should be specified by those responsible for the design
of the building fire and smoke detection system.
7.2.1.2 Location ofcm event in relation to lifts
In detecting an event like fire it will be important to
know its location in relation to any lift intended for
evacuation use. The more the level of sophistication of
detection system employed, the more precise will be
the level of informat ion ava ilable to make decis io ns
and more meaningful these decisions wi ll be . The
designer shall determine the degree of sophistication
required taking into acco unt the importance of the
building, type of occu pancy, etc.
7.2. 1.3 Emergency power provisions
Secondary (emergency) power shall be provided that
has su ffic ient capacity to run all the evacuation lifts at
full speed for the req uired evacuation time. T he route
of the cabling shall be safe from fire.
7.2.2 Operational Decisions for Evacuation
7.2.2.1 Types of evacuation
The evacuation strategy developed sho uld lead to an
obvious evacuation type. Li fis will not be able to evacuate
al l floors at once, so to some degree a systemati c
evacuation will be governed by the capacity of lifts and
the number of persons to be evacuated. Lift engineers can
calculate the number of persons that can be moved for a
given set of circumstances but the fi rst thing to deteJmine
is the number of persons to be evacuated within the
required evacuation time. Fire engi neers/experts shall
determine these figu res. It shall also be dete1mined what
proportion of wheel cha ir and others with impaired
mobility may be there and if there is likely to be a f1o01·or
building area with a particular concentration of them.
------------------------------~·)~
)
buildings, evacuation may take some time and it shall ')
not be assumed that continued use of a particular lift or )
lifts is guaranteed. Serious thought shall be given to
how information w ill be displayed to those managing )
the building especia lly where the BMS system is )
capable of providing a large amount of informatio n. It
)
should be possible to see at a glance if lifts are operating
correctly and what services they are running. There shall )
always be provision made to allow the building
)
management or authorities to override any automatic
evacuation s igna l that is gene ra te d by a BMS. )
Irrespective of the systems employed the evacuation )
decision cannot be made by a I ift system and therefore
other experts in this field shall determine what risks
)
w ill constit ute the need for evacuation and the type of )
evacuation (partia l or fu ll).
)
7.2.2.3 Decide, if lifts are to be usedfor the evacuatio11 )
If for some reason a s ignificant number of lifts are not
)
ava ilable fo r use then it may be prudent to remove all
lifts from automatic evacuation serv ice rather than have )
too few. If too few lifts are in service, de lays w ill result
that could be dangerous or cause panic. In such
t
circumstances it is probably des irab le to ru n a limited )
serv ice for the evacuation of those who have difficu lty )
in negotiating s tai rs. Any such service needs to be
)
managed by lift attendants w ho wi ll drive the lift,
manage possible crowding and assist those who need ) '
it. The decision to operate some fo rm of service when )
not a ll lifts a re avai lable shall be taken by those
managing the building evacuation. )
7.2.2.4 Building evacuation information )
W hen evacuation is required, updated information shall ) Ii
be provided th rough the building systems informing ) I
'
persons concemed inc luding those in waiting areas ,I'
w hich lifts to use duri ng the particu lar emergency. This )
informat ion shall be in both audible and visual fo1mat. )
Any safe areas/waiting a reas shou ld a lso have an
)
\
emergency communication system. :t
)
7.2.3 Spec(flcations of Automatic Evacuation Lift
)
7.2.3. 1 Determining the number and size of lifts
) I

To calculate the number and size of lifts required for an •I

In many instances some sort of phased evacuatio n will adequate evacuation service, the handli ng capacity of a ) :
be desirable while at other times a full evac uation may
be essential. Phased evacuation involves the evacuation
given lift or group oflifts shall be detetmined consideting
possibility that a lift or lifts may not be available for
.) .
of certai n areas first , usua ll y those floors areas at some reason such as planned maintenance, repai rs. Also )
greatest risk followed by other key areas. A lso, there due consideration shall be given to the requirement of ) [,
cou ld be horizontal evacuation, partly or fu ll y, for accommodating a wheel chair in the li ft car.
)
example, in case of hospitals. 7.2.3.2 Protection a./lift equipment
) t.-·
7.2.2.2 Decide, if evacuation is required (building Lift shafts and machine rooms or machinery spaces
management)
This is a decision to be made by other experts and those
res pons ibl e for buildin g mana ge ment. In la rge
located outside the shaft should be fully enc losed. T he
temperature in the enclosures should be mon itored and
maintai ned to acceptable levels for the equipment, as
')
)
)
rART 8 BUILDIN G SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 51
i\ IOYING WALKS: SA LIFTS )
) .\1>
')
)

determined by the li ft supplier in consultation with the the service and receipt of a signal from an evacuation
) building management. Protection from water may be service cancellation switch, all lifts which are not at
co ns idered, if required as per overall evacuation the main landing shall complete any allocated task and
I
strategy. return to the main landing.
)
7 .2.3.3 Removal or s uspension oflifts from evacuation On arrival at the main landing the doors shall open
) service and then the lift evacuation for that particular lift
) shall be cancelled. Any lift al ready at the ll}ain
Where a lift receives a command from a BMS or
landing s ha ll o n o pe nin g its doors cance l · it s
) manual signal to stop or suspend service to a floor
evacuation service.
or area of the building, any stop shall be a controlled
)
stop at a safe area. A contro lled stop means allowing 7.2.4 Information to be Provided to the Building Owner
) the lift to slow down and stop at a floor in the normal
Detail ed instructions shall be provided to the building
) manner. Where a Ii ft or Iifts are instructed to suspend
operator by the building designer in the form of a
service, the li ft(s) shall communicate with the FCC
) manual. The manual shall explain the evacuation
and any BMS once it is no longer availab le for
strategies to be used, how any detection systems
service.
operate, how they shall be maintained and how the li ft
7.2.3.4 Remote lift car surveillance will operate on evacuation service. It should also
provide advice on periodic checks the owner can make
) At times of emergency it is vital to be able to see that
to ensure the system is working correctly and explain
lifts do not contain trapped passengers who may be
~ the imp01tance of a suitable testing and maintenance
incapacitated. A means to display the entire tloor area
) system being in place. Training being very important
of the car shall be provided with information to the
aspect of this new concept, the manual shall include
) occupants that the lift car is under surveillance. At least
such details of training as who should be covered by
one viewing terminal shall be located in the FCC and
) trai ni ng, how the training should be canied out, what
clearly marked 'LIFT CAR SURVEILLANCE' with
should be the frequency, etc.
) the lift designation identified.
7.2.3.5 Communication system requirements 8 M I N I MUM TECHNICAL AND SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
As a minimum, a 3-way communication system shall
be ava il ab le for passenge r us e to perm it direct 8.1 General Requirements
communications between the lift car and safe area and The following general requirements shall be adhered
) FCC. Operation of the communication device in the to:
) lift car shall be simply by means of a single button,
operation of which shall connect the system to the FCC. a) Passenger and goods lifts shall comply with
) the safe ty requirements and/o r protective
FUJ1her operation of the device in the lift car shall be
) hands free. measures of the fo llowing clauses. In addition
the passenger and goods li fts shall be designed
) 7 .2.3.6 Initiation of evacuation service according to good practices [8-5A(2)].
) Evacuation service can be initiated by a device such as b) All labels, notices, markings and operating
) a button or lever, key, etc, located near the lift shaft at instructio ns shall be perma nentl y affixed,
the evacuation landing, or from a s ignal sent by a BMS indelible, legible and readily understandable
or hazard detection system. Where a button or other (if necessary aided by signs or symbo ls). See
manual acti vated device is used it shall be protected also 13 of Patt 3 ' Development Control Rules
against unauthorized use. Its purpose shall be clearly and General Building Requi rements' of the
marked w ith a s ymbo l and/ or the words ' LIFT Code. T hey shall be of durable material,
) EVACUATION SERVICE' . placed in a vi sible pos ition, and written in the
) The evacuation service shall be operational between accepted language(s).
) the fl oors as decided by the bui !ding designer. The logic c) The minimum factor of safety for any part of
of operation shall be mutually agreed to between the the lift shall not be less than five. Higher factor
) build ing designer and the lift designer. However, an y of sa fety for various parts shall be applicable
lift will be automatically removed from evacuation in acc ordanc e wi th accepted s tandards
service if, where provided, it is tumed to fi re-fi ghters [8-5 A(5)] and [8-5A(6)].
)
service.
) d) All passenger, goods, stretcher, automobile,
7 .2.3.7 Cancellation of evacuation service dumbwaiter li fts shall have conformity with
)
On cancellation of a signal from the device that initiated Lifts Acts and Rules in force, Indian Electricity
)
52 NATIONAL BUILD ING CODE O F INDIA 2016
)
)
 -------------ru.:. )
<

)
Act, 2003 and Rules, all relevant and applicable Do's Don'ts
)
Indian Standards, applicable fire regulations,
fire prevention act and rules in force. a) Press call button a) Do not overload
lightly the lift )
e) Notices - The following notices sha ll be b) Know your b) Do not press call
placed at respective places: destination. Push lift button again and
I) A notice (see Fig. 4) bearing the following call for di rection you agam
(typical) minimum inscription shall be want to go c) Do not force-open
fixed to the outside of doors or trap-doors
c) Stand aside for the doors, it is
)
•
exiting passenger dangerous
(exc luding landing doors and doors of
d) Pay attention to floor d) Do not stand in )
emergency and test panels) giving access
indicator between the doors
to machine and pulley rooms.
e) Push and hold the c) Do not fiddle with )
2) In the case of trap-doors, a pennanently door open button, if the equ ipment )
vis ible notice (see Fig. 5) shall indicate door needs to be held f) Do not step in until
open lift has stopped at )
necessary warn ing to those using the trap-
door. f) Wait for the next car, landi ng and doors )
if the lift is full are fully open
3) Outside of the well, near the access doors g) Take the stairs, if g) Do not crowd in )
and emergency doors, if any, there shall there is a fi re the middle of car )
be a notice stating as shown in Fig. 6. h) In, contact case of h) Do not lean against
)
4) A notice board with fo llowing instructions
emergency, . contact car panels
customer service cell j ) Do not panic in )
as app licable, and/or other ap plicab le
for rescue operation case of power
i.nstru ctio ns s ha ll be placed 111 fa ilure )
conspic_uous position in the lift car:
k) Do not attempt to )
i) Maximum capacity of lift __ kg/ jump out, if the lift
has stopped out of )
_ persons.
fl oor level )
ii) Close the car and landing door/gate NOTE- No distract ing notice/advertiseme nt should bt: fixe d
properl y, on ente ring , or whil e in the lift car.
)
leav ing the lift car. )
8.2 Power a nd Control Systems
iii) Do not open the lift-car gate when )
th e lift-ca r is mov ing. The ga te 8.2. 1 Features Associated with Power Systems
)
should only be opened after the lift- The featu res associated with power systems are listed
car has stopped opposite a landing below. )
gate. )
8.2.1.1 Industrial switchgear
iv) In case of danger, press the alarm )
button, but do not try to open the car Sw itchgear for contro lli ng lift power systems is
door. Wait inside, until the lift ca r is characterized by its high duty cyc le and its h igh )
brought opposite a landing, and do rupturing capacity. Sw itchgear shall be robust enough
)
not attempt to leave the lift car unti l and sha ll be so des igned as to withstand the high duty
cycle and high rup turing capac ity introduced during )
the landing door is opened full y.
the operation of the lifts. )
v) Children under 12 years of age shall
not use the li ft, unless accompanied 8.2.1.2 Levelling accuracy )
by an ad ult. The leve lling to lerances in accordance with good )
practice [8-5A(7)] are those which can be reasonably
5) The fo llowing is a typical list of Do's )
ex pected between no load and full load in e ither
and Don' ts that should be displayed in
direc ti on. With the VYVF d ri ves good leveling )
the lift car, and in case of lifts open to
accuracy can be expected. )
public usc, in a n access ible fo rma t
comp lying requ irements of accessible 8.2.1.3 Corrective levelling )
inform ation board/s ignage, given in 13
Th is shou ld on ly be used, when it is imposs ible )
of Part 3 ' Development Control Rules
otherwise to achieve the required Ievell ing tolerances
and General Building Requ irements' of )
or on long travcl li fts to maintain the requi red levell ing
the Code:
tolerances during loading and unloading. )
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVIC ES - SECT ION 5 INSTALLATION Of Li fTS , ESCA LATORS AN I) 53
1\ IOVT NG WALKS: SA LifTS )
)
)

)
"Lift machinery- Danger
)
Access forbidden to unauthorized persons
) Keep door locked"
)

) Danger
)

) OR
)

)
AND
) F1o. 4 TYPICAL I NSCRI PTION ON DooRs
·I

"Danger of falling - Reclose the trap-door"

~
)

)
)
Danger
) of falling
)

)
F IG. 5 TYPICAL NOTICE ON TRA P DOORS
)
)
"Lift well - Danger
Access forbidden to unauthorized persons"
)

)
)
) Laft We~
-J
DANGER ·. ·· .·. ...
. id'Tl"~~~~ :
1., •• ~IW
)
)
F1G. 6 TYPICAL NoncE oN Acc Ess D ooRs AND EMERGENCY DooR s
)
)

)
)
)
54 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF I NDIA 201 6
)
)

8.2.1.4 Levelling with variable voltage
A variable voltage system is one using continuous
regulation which minimizes speed differences due to
load variation. Therefore, the actual levell ing speed is
of less importance than the general refinement of its
regulation control. In fact no levelling speed as such
may be identifiab le.
8.2.1.5 Overload tests
A lift is designed to operate and transpmt the contract
load, at the required duty cycle, and should not by
intent ion or habitually be used to carry overloads.
During test as a safeguard to cover variable supply and
temperature conditions a li ft is checked for the car to
complete one round trip with contract load plus 10
percent at nominal supply voltage and nominal ambient
temperature. There is also a static test with contract
load plus 25 percent to check that the brake will sustain
the car. It is unnecessary to specify and additional
overload test or capacity and in fact it is detri mental to
the normal running effic iency and sa fety of the li ft to
do so.
8.2 .1.6 Occasional extra load
it is not good practice to request that a lift should be
des igned to carry an occasional extra load . It is
tantamount to specifying an excessive overload test
which is detrimental to the normal running efficiency
and safety of the lift.
8.2.2 Description o,/' Operation Systems
The fo llowing description relates to the associated
operating systems.
8.2.2.1 Methods o,( control systems
The me thods of control systems are as follows
[see 8.2.2.2 (a)]:
a) Attendant and dual control, and
b) Automatic push button operation.
8.2.2.2 Types of contml .~ystems
The features of control systems shall be as descri bed
below:
a) Au tomatic push butto n opera tion -
Automatic control is a method of operation
by which a momentary pressure on a push
button sets the car in motion and causes it to
stop automatically at any required lift landing.
This is the simplest control system and it is
sometimes referred to as push button control.
A car answers a landing or car call, whichever
is actuated f irs t by mome ntary press ure
provided the lift is not in use. Momentary
pressure of a car push button will send the car
PART 8 BU ILDING SE RVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AN D
MOV ING WALKS: SA LIFTS
}
)
)
to the design ated fl oor. The car a lways )
responds to a car push button in preference to
)
a landing push button. With this type of
control, a red landi ng signal light or direction )
arrow indicates that the car is in use that is the
)
lift is travelling. This type of contro l is
)
recomme nd ed for single passe nger li fts
serving up to 4 floors and goods lifts. )
For special pu rposes, the foll owi ng two
)
systems may be considered:
I) Dispatch from landings as an additi onal )
feature for a goods lift with manually
operated doors. The call is registered by
)
pressing the car push button and when the
doors arc closed the car will travel to the
designated fl oor.
}
2) Auto matic with attendant control as an
addi tiona l feature on goods lifts with a
key operated switch in the car to transfer
the control from· normal auto matic to
attendant operat ion. There is also a visual
call indicator \.Vith buzzer in the car to
indicate to the attendant the Ianding noors
at which push buttons have been pressed
when the car is under attendant control.
b) Collective control - Collective control is a
generic term for those methods of automatic )
operation by which calls made by pressing
push buttons in the car and at lift landi ngs arc
registered and answered by the car stopping
in floor sequence at each Iift landing for which
~:
calls have been registered irrespective of the
) .
order in which the calls have been made , and
until all calls have had attention. Co llective ~·..,.,
control of any form is usually not suitable for
goods lifts except where loading is not
expected to fi ll the car and additional loads
can be taken at other stops.
c) Single push button collective control- Single
push butto n col lective control has a s ingle
pus h bu tton a t each la ndin g. 1t is no t
recommended, as the direction in which it is
desi red to travel cannot be registered by the
intending passenger.
d) Down collective control- Down co llective
is a control system where landing ca ll s arc
regis tered from a s ing le pus h button,
irrcspecti vc of the car being in motion or the
landing door being open and calls are stored
until answered. Any num ber of car calls can
be registered and the car wi II stop in sequence
in the down direction at each of the designated
floors. The car will travel in the up direction
to the highest ca ll registered stopping on ly in
55
) I
I
)

response to car calls. It wi II then travel The control is des igned so that cars are
downward~ answering calls in floor sequence. effectively spaced and thus give even service.
) If only one call has been registered the car When a car reaches the highest floor to which
travels to the floor of call. there is a call its direct ion of travel is
)
automatically reversed when it next starts. One
This system is suitable where there is traffic
) or more cars will re~u rn to the parking floor.
between the ground and upper fl oors only and
Automatically bypassing oflanding calls when
no inter floor traffic. Two or three car banks
a car is fu lly loaded is an essential feature for
) have interconnected control. With this type of
three-car banks. It is also necessary for two-
control the following signals are included:
car banks in offices. Other cars wi ll continue
1) A landing signal light indicates that the to provide servi ce to all floors. When th ree-
)
call has been registered and wi II be car banks serve 7 or 8 floors and over, some
) answered. form of automatic su perv isory co ntro l
[see 8.2.2.2(g)] is generally necessa1y in the
) 2) Illuminated car position indicator above
interest of efficiency. With this type of control
) car entrance.
the following signals are induded:
) e) Directional collective control for one car-
I) A landing signal light for each landing
Directional collective control fo r one car is a
) push button to indicate that the call has
control system having 'UP' and ' DOWN ' push
been registered and will be answered.
) buttons at intermediate landings whereby the
call is registered for the intended direction of 2) Illuminated car position indicator above
)
travel. Calls from the car or landing pu sh the entrance in the car.
) butto ns are reg is te red and sto i·ed until
3) Arrow shaped signal lights in conjunction
) answered. The car w ill answer calls in floor
with an audible single stroke gong or an
sequence in one direction of travel. Ca lls for
) indication on the landing call push button
the opposite direction of travel are answered
station above each landing entrance to
) when the direction of travel is reversed.
indicate to the waiting person(s) which
) This system is suitable for single lifts serving car is going to stop and in which direction
4 or more floors with inter fl oor traffic, such it will continue its course.
)
as small office blocks, hotels and blocks of
g) Group supervismy control - A bank or group
) tlats. With this type of control the foll owing
of intensive traffi c passengers lifts requires a
signals are included:
supervis01y system to coordinate the operation
I) A landing signal light fo r each landing of indi vidual lifts which are all on collective
push button ind icates that the call has control and are interconnected . The very
) been registered and will be answered. nature of intensive se rv ice calls fo r a
) sophisticated automatic supervisory control
2) flluminated car position indicator above
system so as to match the speed capacity of
) the entrance in the car.
these lifts. The supervisory system regulates
) 3) Arrow shaped signal lights in the back of the despatch ing of in d ivi dual ca rs and
the car or on the landing to indicate to provides service to all floors as different traffic
)
the entering person in which direction the co ndi tions a rise minimi z ing s uc h
) car is going to depa rt. unproduct ive fac tors as idle cars, uneven
) service and excessive waiting time. The
f) Directional collective control for two or three
system wi ll respond automatica lly to traffic
cars - Directional collective control fo r two
conditions such as 'UP' and 'DOWN' peaks,
or three cars is a system covering a control in
) balanced or light traffic and provides for other
which the two or three cars in a bank are
specialized featu res. If des ired, a mas ter
) interconnected. One push button unit with
station can be provided in the lift lobby which
'UP' and ' DOWN' push buttons or floor
) gives by indicat0rs, v isual in fo rma tion
buttons (in case of car control from floor) are
regardi ng the pattern under which the system
required at each landing and the call system
is operating. Where the system is based on a
is common to all li fts. If for architectural
definite programme, contro l means are
balance, in the case of a three car bank, extra
prov ided fo r altering the type of traffic
push button units are required, these shou ld
programme. There are other facilities, such as
) be s pec ifi ed. Eac h landing ca ll is
the removal of any lift from service.
automatically allocated to the best placed car.
)
56 NATIONAL BUILD ING CODE OF INDIA 20 16
)
)
 -----:----- ~ ·

h) Destination control system-In case of a bank
of lifts Destination Control System (DCS) may
be provided. The passengers enter thei r
b) Landing ca ll automatic bypass - For
des tin a ti on fl oors on the Dest ination
Operating Panels (OOPs) provided on the lift
landings. The lift controller allocates a li ft to
every call registered which is displayed on the
DOP. The passenger is expected to board the
assigned lift and travel to. his destination floor. c)
He need not register his destination floor in
the lift car operating panel (COP) again. In
fact COP in the lift car may not be provided
with floor buttons in case of DCS control
system. The principle behind the DCS is to
group passenger with same destinations
together thus reducing the number of stops of
d)
the lift reducing round trip time thus boosting
traffic.
The adva ntages of DCS system ove r
conventional collective control are:
l) Enhanced passenger handling capacity,
2) Less transit time, few intermediate stops,
and
c)
3) Passengers do not have to struggle
through crowd to book the calls.
In addition to the OOPs the lift landings are
provided with lift identifier. The main landing
may be provided w:th destination indicator
displaying the floor designati ons tbe lift would
stop at.
Hybrid Destination Contro l (HDCS)
combines fea tures of the DCS an d
f)
conventional control system. The main Ooor
is provided with OOPs, Lift Identifiers and
the lift car is provided with the conventional
COP as well. Thus while avai ling benefit of
traffic boosting HDCS provides convenience g)
of call booking from inside the lift car as well.
8.2.2.3 Features of operation 5ystems
The features associated with the operating systems are
as fo llows:
a) Carprejerence - Sometimes it is necessaty to
give a special personal service or a house service.
When this service is required and for whatever
purpose, it should be speci fied as 'car preference' h) Controlled power closed doors- When there
is by a key operated sw itch in the car. The
operation is then from the car only and the doors
remain open until a car call is registered for a
floor destination. All landing calls are bypassed
and car position indicators on the landing for
this li ft are not illuminated. The removal of the
)
)
key when the special operation is completed, )
restores the control to nmmal service. )
)
collective operation, automatic bypassing of
)
landing calls can be provided. This device will
bypass landing calls when a car is fully loaded )
but the calls are not cancelled. )
Motor generator shut down- Lifts controlled )
by variable voltage system automatically shut
down when subject to an over-riding control )
which puts them out of service under certain )
conditions; for example, no demand for lift
)
service. They are automatically put back into
service as required. )
)
Basement service- For lifts with collective
contro l when service is required below the )
main parking flo or, which is usually the
ground floor, to a basement and/or a sub- )
basement, the lift manu faeturer should be )
informed of the type of service required, as
}
s pecia l technica l cons iderati ons are then
usually necessary. )
)
Hospital service - Lifts for carrying beds and
stretchers require a car preference switch so )
that an attendant can have complete control of
the car when required. This requirement should )
be specified as 'car preference' and it will )
function as described in 8.2.2.1. Otherwise such
)
lifts can have the same control systems as for
normal passenger lifts, the choice depending )
on the number of floors served, the service )
required and the number of li fts.
)
Manually operated doors (without c/ose1:s·) -
)
A 'door open' alarm should be provided to
draw attention to a car or landing door which )
has been left open.
)
Automatically power closed doors - For
)
passenger operation when the car arrives at a
landing the doors will automatica lly open and )
then close after lapse of a time interval. This )
time interval can be overruled by the pressure
of a push button in the car to give instant door )
clos ing. An 'open door' pus h button is )
provided in the car to reverse clos ing motion
)
of the doors or hold them open.
)
are conditions that patticularly affect the safely )
of passengers or damage to vehicles or trucks, )
the closing of the doors should only be made
)
by the conti nuous pressure of push buttons in
the car or on landings. A 'door open' alarm )
shou ld be provided to draw attention to a car )

)
PART !!BUILDING SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LI FTS, ESCALATORS AND 57
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS )I I
) 1
 )
)
)
or landing door which has been left open. This
)
means of operation is required for some fonns
) of goods lifts.
) lift. Service switches should not be confused
j) Safe operation of doors - The safety of
passengers passing through lift entrances is
fully covered by the provision of good practice
[8-5A(6)]. No modi f ication of these
) provisions should be spec ified.
k) Directorial service- There are many forms
of giving special serv ice for individuals, but
they should always be avoided. They range
) from key operated sw itches at preferred
landings to the complete segregation of one
)
out of a bank of lifts. It is obvious that any
)
preferentia l treatment of thi s nature can
seriousl y jeopardize the efficiency of the
service as a whole. When a bank of say three
)
lifts is installed to meet the anticipated traffic
requirements and then, when the building is
occupies, one lift is detached pennanently for
directors' service, the traffic handling can be
) reduced by a half rather than a third . When
) preferent ial service is imperative, then the car
preference feat ure should be a va il ab le
)
[see 8.2.2.3(a)].
) corresponding to the net inside car area shall bear the
m) Indication ofcar arrival - As all lift cars are
) illuminated when avai lable (in service). It is
recommended that this illumination be used
)
to signal the atTival of a car at a landing in
) preference to special signals such as ' LIFT
HERE' signs since signal lamps can fa il when
)
the lift is still operating satisfactori ly.
) I The graph shown in Fig. 7 is based on the fo llowing fo rmula:
The following is the practice adopted for
vision panels in doors:
) IV = rated load, in kg; and
1) For lifts with manually operated car and
J landing doors, vision panels are provided
in all doors;
) 3 To avoid the possibility of serious overloading of bed lifts,
) 2) For lifts with power operated car doors
and manuall y operated landing doors,
) load of not less than 3.45 kN/m1 of the net inside car area.
vision panels are provided in the landing
) doors only;
) 3) For lifts with automatically opened car
) and landing doors, no vision panels are
required; and
) the resistance to s lipping of the ropes on the sheave of a traction
4) When vision panels are prov ided they
) platform sha ll be designed to withstand the horizontal thrust
should comply with the requirements of
) good practice [8-5A(7)].
) n) Service switches - When switch es arc
)
provided to take cars out of service, that is
because the remaining cars in the group can
) cater for the required passenger traffic, it is
}
58
essential that such switches should not stop the
fireman's control from being operative in the
event of the lift being designated as a fireman 's
with maintenance switches which are only used
when it is dangerous to attempt to operate the
lift because maintenance work is actually in
progress. A control station fitted on top of the
car is regarded as a maintenance switch.
p) Fire switch - When required by the fire
authority a fire switch has to be provided, the
function of which is to enable the fire authority
to take over the complete control of one or
more lifts in an installation.
q) Push buttons and signals - It is most
important that the purpose of every push
button and signal should be clearly understood
by all passengers .
r) In public places where blind persons are
expected to use the lifts it is recommended to
provide Braille/tactile buttons.
8.3 Capacity and Loading
The minimum rated load of a passenger lift car
relationshi p given in Fig. 7, the net inside car area
being evaluated as shown in Fig. 8. The net inside car
are as fo r vari ous pa ssenger capaci ti es w ith
correspond ing minimum rated loads have been given
in Table 24 .
NOTES
W = 35.05 11 2 +325 .66 A
where
A = net inside area, in m2.
2 For rated loads exceeding those covered by the graph, value
may be evaluated from the fommla given above.
they shall be treated as passenger lifts.
4 The minimum rated load for goods lifts shall be b<~sed on a
5 The minimum rated load for automobile lifts sha ll be based
on a load of not less than 1.45 kN/m2 of the net inside car area.
6 When the load in a goods lifts consists of pallets or similar
single piece loads loaded by means of a power truck, it is
necessary during loading and unloading to take into account
the total load on the car platfom1 the capacity of the brake, and
machine. Sim ilarly, gu ide rails, guide fix ing, car frame and
imposed by power trucks, motor vehicles and the like.
7 For motor vehic le and o ther special purpose lifts for
transportation of light weight and heavy volume loads, the lift
ca r in side dimensions mutu ally agreed to between the
manufactu rer and the purchaser wi ll be permitted with the
provision of a device to prevent the lift from starting from a
landing in case of overload ing.
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
 .. ) .
)

8 A load plate giving the rated load of the lift shall be filled in 2500 )
each lifl car in a conspicuous position. For passenger lifts, the
rated load shall be given in number of person and kg. For goods
lifts, the rated load shall be given in kg or other convenient
units and in persons. For the purpose of this clause, a person
2000 / )
)

shall be regarded as weighing 68 kg.

Table 24 Minimum-Maximum Net Car Areas for

Various Rated Loads
"'
.><

Q
t500 / )
)

/
0
-' )
(Clause 8.3) 0
I!!
o( 1000 )
"'
/
Sl No. of Minimum Minimum Maximum
No. Passengers Rated Net Inside Net lnside )
Load Car Area Car Area 500
kg 1112 1112 )
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) / )
i) 4 272 0.6 8 0 .77
0 2 J 5 )
ii) 5 . 340 0 .85 0.95
iii) 6 408 1.00 1.12 NET INSIDE CAR AREA, m 2
iv) 7 476 1.1 6 1.28 )
v) 8 544 1.31'' 1.45 7 MINIMUM RATED
vi) 9 6 12 1.46 1.60
FIG. L OADS FO R )
vii) 10 680 1.61 1.76 P ASSENGER LIFT CAR
)
viii) 11 748 1.77 1.9 1 8.4 Other Technical and Safety Requirements
ix) 12 816 1.92 2.05 )
x) 13 884 2.06 2.20 8.4.1 Passenge r lifts shall be provided with power
xi) 14 952 2.23 2.34 )
xii) 15 I 020 2.35 2.47
operated doors which are imperforate.
x iii) 16 I 088 2.48 2.6 1 )
I 156
8.4.2 Power operated ca r doors on auto matica lly
xiv) 17 2.62 2.74
x v) 18 I 224 2.75 2.87 operated lifts shall be so des igned that their closing )
xvi) 19 I 292 2.88 3.00 and opening is not like ly to injure a person. The power )
xvii) 20 I 360 3.0 1 3. 13
operated car door shall be provided w ith a sensitive
xviii) 21 I 428 3. 14 3.25 )
xix) 22 1 496 3 .26 3.38 device which shall automatically initiate reopening of
xx) 23 1 564 3.39 3.50 the door in the event o f a passenger being struck or is )
xxi) 24 1 632 3.5 1 3.6 1 about to be struck by the door, whil e crossing the
xxii) 25 1 700 3.62 3.73
entrance during closing movement. The e ffect of the
)
xxi ii) 26 I 768 3.74 3.85
xxiv) 27 I 836 3.86 3.96 device may be neutra lized, )
xxv) 28 I 904 3.97 4.07
xxvi) 29 1972 4.08 4.18 a) during the last 58 mm o f travel of door panel )
11
Minimum net car inside area for fi reman lift is 1.43 m2• in case of side opening doors; )
)
)
I l
)
)
)

B )
)
)
)
~------A--+---~
)
)
I )
)
NET INSIDE CAR AREA== A x B NET INSIDE CAR AREA== A x B )

FIG. 8 NET INSIDE CAR AREA FOR PASSENGER LIFTS )

)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 59
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)
)
) b) when panels are wi thin 58 mm of each other 8.5 Painting at Works and on Site
) in case of center opening doors; and
Lift equipment will norma lly receive a protective coat
c) during emergency fire operation. of paint at works before di spatch to s ite . Further
)
The force needed to prevent the door from closing shall painting of lift equipment may be necessary and is
)
not exceed 150 N and this measurement shall not be normally in the fom1 of a fini shing coat and can take
made in the first third of the travel of the door. In order place on site. Alternatively, the further painting of the
to achieve this it is des irable that all power operated equipment may be can·ied o ut at works as a finishing
)
doors have a full length (covering at least I 600 mm of coat with normal touching up after site erection as may
) be necessary. Any additional pa inting, due to s ite
car door height from bottom) infrared or 'equivalent
light curtain safety to retract the doot: in the event of conditions during erection and/or final operating
coming across any obstacle during closing of the door. conditions in the premises, is subj ect to negotiation
between the lift manufacturer and the purchaser.
8.4.3 Single speed and two speed drives which are poor Decora ti ve fini s h es are a s ubj ect for separate
in levelling accuracy and energy consumption shall not negotiation.
) be used for new lifts in view o f availability of latest
technology energy efficient variable voltage variable 8.6 Emergency Man ual Rescue
freq ue ncy (VVVF) dri ve system s w ith improved
The emergency manual rescue operation w ith brake
levelling accuracy.
release should only be carried out in an emergency and
)
8.4.4 For passenger lifts with car call button control in by authorized persons who have received necessary
) car, an additional car operating panel with call buttons instructio ns, because it is dangerous for any other
) shall be provided for ease of access to call buttons when persons to attempt to do so.
the car is wider than I 600 mm and/or the rated capacity
) Before attempting to move the car, it is imperative that
of the li ft is 16 passengers and more. This add itional car
any person in the car be wamed of the intention to mo ve
) operating panel shall be suitably located in the lift car.
the car and that they shall not attempt to leave the car
) 8.4.5 Battery operated Au to mat ic Resc ue Device until they are ad vised that it is safe to do so. Any failure
(ARD) sha ll be provided on all li fts to take lifts to the to carry o ut this precaution may render the person
)
nearest possible landing in case of power fail ure, which concerned guil ty of negligence should an acc ident occur.
inc ludes power failure of one o r more phases. In case
J?efore atte·mpting to hand wind the lift machine, it is
of lifts equipped with backup gene rato r with AMF
vital that the supply is switched off at the main switch.
(Automatic Mains Fai lure) panel , the provi sio n of ARD
) It is u~ually necessary to have two pe rsons in the
is optional. For all lifts wi th ARD, an aud io and visuai
machine room: one to operate the brake release and
) indicator shall be provided inside tbe lift car to alert
the other to carry out the hand wind ing. T he exceptio ns
the persons tra pped inside that they are being rescued.
are sma ll lift machines where the hand winding can be
Capacity of batteri es shall be such that minimum three
easil y contro lled by one man and larger machines which
rescue operations can be performed without recharging.
need two men to operate the hand winding alone w ith
Emergency light and at least one fa n inside the lift car
an additio nal man to control the brake release. In case
shall be operationa l till the end of rescue operation.
of gearless machines especiall y, the brake shall be
Levelling accuracy of ±40 mm or better shall be
released and applied at very shoti intervals (of the order
) achieved in the ARD Operat ion. The ARD should
of 0.5 s to I s) so as to avoid the lift car attai ning
operate only when all safety circuits are operational.
) dangerously hig h speed due to the _lift car and create
T he safety c ircuits shall be c hecked and verified
unba lance in the absence of the gear box with large
) contin uous ly during the rescue operation.
reduction ratio .
) 8.4.6 Minimum one stretcher lift shall be provided in
If the car is stuck in the li ft well and cannot be moved
each build ing having height more than 30 m so as to
) whe n an attempt is m ade to move it in a downward
take care of medical as well as other emergencies. This
)
direction, then no a ttempt at hand w inding should be
lift shall have minimum car e ntrance width of 800 mm
made because the car safety gear may have set. A ny
) and car depth of 2 100 mm.
fu rther procedure should be carried out under the
) 8.4.7 Every passenger lift shall be provided with an instruction of a qualified lift mechanic. Provided th e
overload device which will prevent the lift from starting car is free to be moved in the downward direction,
) in case the lift car is loaded to II 0 percent of the rated then it should be hand wound to th e nearest floo r.
) ca pacity of the li ft or more. The lift shal l remain There is a preference to move the car in down
stationery with door open. Audio and v isual warning direction. However, thi s may not a lways be practical
)
device shall be provided to alert the passengers in case owing to th e distance in vo lved and the time taken to
) of overl oad. complete the move ment. In add ition the amount of
)
60 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
 )
)
)
out of balance load on the counterweight s ide, du e to 9.2.4 E lectri c MRL type home lifts, sha ll in addition
the size of car and the s mall number of persons ins ide conform to the technical requirements specified in good
it, may make it necessary to wind the car upwards . In practice [8-5A( l 0)]. )
the cas e of hi gh speed li fts the directio n of hand
9.2.5 Hydraulic type home lifts shall in addition )
windin g wi ll usually be governed by the effort required
confonn to the technical requirements specified in good
to move the car because of the absence of a large gear )
practice [8-SA( l)].
reductio n ratio. It is essential that all deta il operat ions
\
be ca rri e d out according to the m anu factur er's 9.3 Hydraulic Lifts
instructions for the Ii ft concern ed and these sho uld )
be clearly stated and permanently displayed in the
9.3.1 The hydraulic lift is a special type of li ft w here
)
the lift car is directly or indirectly driven by action of
form of a notice in the machine room.
o ne or more hydrau lic jacks. )
9 SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 9.3.2 The hydraulic lifts shall conform to good practice )
The obj ective of this c lause is to detine some special [8-5A( I)] apa tt fro m other relevant provisions of this
)
type of lifts that are used currentl y in buildings such as Section.
)
lifts without conventional machine rooms (MRL lifts), 9.3.3 T hese li fts should preferably be ho le-less type of
li fts used in private apm1ments (home lifts), hyd rau lic lifts.
type of lifts and lifts required for differently abled
persons, etc. 9.4 Lifts Accessible for Persons with Disabilities
)
9.1 L ifts Without Co nventional Machine Rooms 9.4.1 All lifts open to publi c shall adhere to the
accessibil ity provisions in terms of s ize of the car, door )
(MRL Lifts)
wid th , control panel, flooring, finis hes, handrai ls, )
9.1.1 MRL lifts are a special type oflifts where hoisting communicati on systems and informatio n, given in 13
machine is placed inside the lift shaft and control system of Part 3 ' Develo pment Control Rules .and Genera l ) II
may be inside and/or adjacent or at close proximity to Building Requirements' of the Code. ) I;
top land ing door, eli minating the need for conventional
machine room. 9.4.2 Lifts for perso ns with disabi lities sha ll conform ) II •I

to good practice [8-5A( 12)] apart from other provisions

9.1.2 The MRL lifts s hall be in con fonmnce with good
practice [8-5A( I 0)] apart from o ther relevant provisions
of this Section.
9.1.3 MRL lifts may be provided with emergency door
o n the to p· portion of the ho ist-way wh ich is equipped
with electromechanica l lock wired in seri es with lift
safety chain and o f s ize 700 mm x 700 mm minimum,
so as to access the machinery space in case of
emergency or safety device being activated on or above
the top land ing.
9.2 Lifts Used in Private Apartments/Houses/Villas
(Home Lifts)
9.2 .1 The home lift is designed especia lly for private
home having up to 4 stops (maximum rise 12 m), where
the usage of th e lift is restri cted primarily to the
residents of the private home. Unlike conventional lifts
which allow virtually unlimited access to members of
the general publi c, in case of ho me lifts non-residents
shall have limitl:d access.
9.2.2 T he rated capacity of the home lift sha ll be
minimum 208 kg (3 perso ns) and maximum 272 kg
(4 persons) and lift car speed shall not exceed 0.4 rn/s.
9.2.3 T he home li fts shall conform to good practice
[8-5A( ll )] apart from oth er relevant provis io ns of this
Section.
)
of th is Section.
)
9.5 Seismic Resistance in Lifts
)
When seis mi c protection o f th e pa ssengers and
)
equipment is a consideration, the safety requirements
1'
and protective m easures given be low may be adopted, I
the specified requiremen ts being applicable w hen the
units are subj ect to seismic conditi o ns where the
specified design acceleration (ad)~ 1 m/s 2:
NOTE - The design acceleration is a funct io n of ground
acceleration, soil behaviour, importance factor, etc. Thus, the
value of (n.~) applicable to the building and to be considered
for lift design/installation slw ll be provided by the building
architect or structural designer to the li ft ma nufa cture r.
a) General - Suc h lifts shall compl y with the
relevant safety requirements and/or protective
measures of this clause to pro tect them w hen
the lifts are subject to seismic conditions.
b) L [(t we/1-J n order to prevent that suspension
ropes, gove rn or ropes, trave lling cab les,
compensation ropes and chains swayi ng in the
well gettin g entangled with fixed equipment,
) '
snag points created by brackets, sills, devices
and other equi pment mounted in the wel l shall )
be protected according to Table 25.
}
c) Machine1y and pulley spaces - Where
buildings are designed with expansion j oints

PART 8 BUILDING SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AN D 61 )

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)
)
)
Table 25 Protection of Snag Points
) [Clause 9.5(b)]
Sl Height of Horizontal Protected Measm·es Construction Scope
No. the Well Distance of Equipment
) Snag
) Points
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

i) ~20 m Not necessary due to vety

)
small shake (displacement)
of buildings
ii) > 20 m and ~ 60 m < 900mm Travelling cables Install protection measure Required, if any pm1ion
) for example, a protection ofthe loop is closer than
wire in the corner of the 900 mm fi01n a snag
) rail bracket or other snag point
points near the travelling
cables
) < 750 rnm Compensating chain(s), Install protection measure Full h·avel in case of
compensating rope(s), for example, a protection installing either oftht:
) counterweight governor wire in the comer of the compensating chain or
rope rai I bracket or other snag compensating rope or
) points counterweight governor
rope
) < 500mm Car govemor rope Insta ll a rope guide and Full travel
) protector. Otherwise use
protection wire
) <300 mm Suspension ropes Install a tape guide and Full travel
protector. Otherwise use
) protection wire
) iii) > 60m Protect all Travelling cables, Apply protection measures Full h·avel
snag points compensating cbain(s),
) independent compensating
of horizontal rope(s), counterweight
) d istance governor rope, car
governor rope, suspension
)
ropes
)
) subdividing the structure into dynam ically the fix ing of the guide shoes. When the
independent u n its, a ll the li ft machinery car is center located between the guide
)
inc luding the la nding e ntrances a nd the well rai ls the clea rances d 1, c/2 and d 3 (see
) of the lift shall be located on the same side of Fig. 9A) between the retaining device and
) an expansion joint. the guide ra il shall not exceed 5 mm and
d) Car the dimens ions chosen s hall not cause
)
I) Mass of the car for fiji design acc identa l tr ipping of t he sa fety gear
) ca lculations - For . li ft d esig n during an earthquake.
) calculations, the forces generated by the The depth of the reta ining device (z 1) shall be
des ig n accelerat ion (ad) shall be limited to avoid collis ion with guide rai l
) ca lc ul ate d taking into account the attachments or other fixed devices, but long
) following: e nough to guarantee a minimum required
i) For passenger lifts the mass of the overlapping le ngth between retaining devices
)
car plus 40 percent of the rated load a nd the gu ide rail blade during an eatthquake.
) evenl y d istributed; a nd During an earthquake, the minimum required
) ii) For goods passenger lifts the mass overlapping le ngth between retaining d evices
of the ca r p lus 80 percent of the rated and the g uide rail blade sha ll be at leas t 5 m m
)
load evenl y dist ributed. (see Fig. 98).
) ·2) Car retaining devices - The retaining
The car struchtre and re taining devices shall
) devices shall be placed in such a way to
be sufficie nt lo w ithstand the loads a nd forces
distribute loads in a simi tar way as the
) imposed on .them including fo rces generated
guide shoes. The reta ining devices shall
by the d es ign acce lera ti on (ad), wi th o ut
) either be integrated or mounted close to
permanent deformation.

62 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
 d,
I
I
_-_-_-_·_·:.·.r---·.·_·_·_-_. ,

I .... I I
!l I
I ' .
''' ''' I '."·
I
". I

I I
~------]+t------~
I
X X
+I

I r 1
I
)

II
I
I

ly ly
9A NOM INAL POSITION AND CLEARANCE OF 98 MINIMUM REQUI RED OVERLAPPING LENGTH OF
RETAINING DEVICE RETAINING DEVICE DURING EARTHQUAKE

clearances between the retaining device and the guide rail

guide rail x-axis
y guide rail y-axis
depth of the retaining device ·
blade height
overlapping length of retaining device during earthquake (<: 5 mm)

f iG. 9 R ETA INING DEVI CE

e) Counterweight- The counterweight shall be f) Suspension and compensation

p rov id ed with upper and lowe r re taini ng
dev ices able to ho ld the frame in between its
guide ra ils. T he reta ining d evices sha ll b e
placed in such a way to d istribute loads in a
simila r way as the guide shoes. The retaining
dev ices shall eith er be integrated or mounted
close to the fix ing of the guide shoes. T he
cleara nces d 1, d2 and d3 (see Fig. 9A) between
the retai ni ng devices and the guide rails sha ll
not exceed 5 mm. Whe n a safety gea r is
p resent, th e d ime n s ions c h o se n for the
clea ra nc es d,. d 2 a n d d 3 s ha ll n ot ca use
acciden tal trippi ng of the safety gear. Duri ng
a n e a r t h quake , the m inimu m requi r ed
overlapp ing length between retaini ng devices
and the gu ide ra il blade s ide sha ll be not less
than 5 mm (see Fig. 9B). The counterweig ht
s tru ct ure and retaining d ev ices sh a ll b e
sufficient to wi ths tand the loads an d forces
i mposed on them inc lu din g fo rces generated
by the des ig n acce le ratio n (ad), w ith o u t
pe rmanent defonna tion. T he strength of the
retaining devices a nd the counte1weight fra me
g)
frame shall be ca lc u lated taking in to account
the vertical mass di stribution of its weight
b locks. If th e counterweight incorporates filler
we ig hts, necessary measures shall be taken to
p revent the ir movement o uts ide th e frame
cons ide ring the design acce leration va lue.
PART 8 BUILDI NG SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND
!\lOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
I) Protection for traction sheaves, pulleys
and sprock ets - T h e devi ces for
preventing the ropes fro m leaving the ")
) I
grooves of traction sheaves and p ulleys
s hall incl ude one re tainer no mo re tha n
15° from the poi nts whe re the ropes e n ter
and leave the grooves and at least o ne
in termed ia te re tainer every 90° of the
angle of w ra p. Th e streng th and stiffness
of the retainers a nd their d istance to the
tract io n sheaves a nd pull eys co mpared to
th e d iamete r of the ropes sh all be su ch
that they a re effective. The devices for
)
p reventing the c hai ns fro m leaving the
sprockets sha ll incl ude o ne re taine r a t the )
poin ts w he re the chains enter a nd leave
the spro ckets.
2) Co111pensation chains - Compensa tio n
c hains or s im ila r mea ns sha ll be guided
in the pit in o rder to li m it them fro m
swayi ng and reac hi ng snag points.
)
Precaution against envimn/1/enta/ damage -
)
Hydraulic lifts shall be provided with a nrpture
)
valve. The rupture va lve sha ll comply w ith the
req ui reme nt s of 12.2 o f goo d p ra c ti ce )
[8-5A( I)]. T he space in wh ic h the hydrau lic
)
powe r unit is s ituated and the pit sha ll be
)
63
)
)
' )
')
)
)
des igned in such a way that it is impervious,
s o that al l the fluid conta in ed in t he
mac hi nery pl aced in these areas will be
r
retained if it leaks out or escapes.
)
h) Guide rail system .,.. Fx
)
I) General- The guide rails, their joints
and attachments shall comply with the
) requirements of good practice [8-5A(5)], ~--- - X
)
and they shall also withstand the loads
and forces ge nerated by the design
) acceleration (ad). Retaining devices shall
) be used as frame supporting points in the
guide rail verification.
)
2) Permissible stresses and deflections KEY:
) F, = force exerted to the guide rail by the guide shoes or
during seismic event - With provision
by the retaining devices in the x-axis.
of retaining devices the requirements
stated below shall be fu lfilled. The safety
Fy = force exerted to the guide rail by the guide shoes or
) by the retaining devices in the y-axis.
factors fo r guide rai ls sha ll satisfy F1a. 10 G u m E RAIL Axis AND FoRCES
) Table 26.
j) Machinery and other lift equipment - All
)
Table 26 Safety Factors for G uide Rails machinery including control cab inet(s) and
) [Clause 9.5 h(2)] drive system, lift machine, main switch(es),
)
and means for emergency operations, cylinder
Sl Elongation (AS) Safety Factor
and ram, pulleys and associated overhead
) No.
beams and supports, rope attachments, over
( I) (2) (3)
) speed governor, ten sion pulleys and
i) AS ::: 12% 1.8 compensation rope tension devices shall be
) ii) 8% < A5< 12% 3.0
designed and anchored to prevent overturning
) and displacement as a result of the forces
For guide rails, the permissible stresses as given in imposed on them including forces generated
)
Table 27 shall be used. by the design acceleration (ad).
) Hyd raulic lifts shall preferably use flex ible
Table 27 Permissible Stresses, crperm pipe work but where the use of rigid pipe is
[Clause 9.5 h(2)] essential it shall use flexible pi pe at the end
Rm (Tensile Strength of Guide 370 440 520 of each rigid length.
) Jlait), N/mm2 k) Electric installations and appliances
nP""' (Permissil.lle Stresses), 205 244 290
) N/mrn2
I ) Electric installations in the lift well -
The fixing of landing switch devices or
I
final limit switches, vanes or simi lar
) The maximum permi ss ible deflection of car or devices fixed in the shaft s hall be
counterweight guide rail in y-direction (see Fig. 10) designed and installed to w ithstand the
)
shall be such that the overlapping length between the loads and forces impose d on the m
) blade of the guide rail and the retaining devices is not including forces generated by the design
less than 5 mm (see Fig. 98). The maximum permissible acceleration (aJ. In addition, the devices
)
deflection of the car guide rail, counterweight guide mentioned above shall be protected by
rail in x-direction (see Fig. I 0) shall also be appl ied in guards against damage caused by ropes
y-d irection. The maximum permissible deflect ion and cables swaying in the well.
includes guide rai l, its fixing bracket and separation
2) Behaviour of the lift in case offailure of
beam, if used. f-or T-profile guide rai ls the maximum
the mains power supply- In case of
) permissible de tlection (in millimetre) (see Fi g. 9A) is:
seismic events, in order to avoid people
) 8penn = z I - 2d) - 5 getting trapped in the car in case of failure
but never more than 40 mm. of the normal power supply, the lift has to
)
be able to move automatically, the car to
) the next landing in up or down direction.
)
64 NATIONAL BUI LDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
)

)

At landing, the lift s hall operate as
described below:
i) Lift with automatic power operated
doors, when parked at a landing,
shall open the doors, remove the lift
from normal operation and keep the
door open .
ii) For a lift with manually operated
doors, when the car arrives at the
designated landing, its door(s) shall
be unlocked and the lift removed
from normal operation.
Where local regulations do not permit the
doors to remain open, a means shall be
provided to open the doors (even with the
electri cal power on) enabling the rescue
service to check whether the car is present
and persons are not trapped.
The behaviour of the lift in case of failure
of the normal power supply s hall not
override any of the following:
a) The electric sa fety devices.
b) Inspection operation.
c) Emergency electri cal opera tion {see
9.5 of good practi ce [8-5A(6)]}.
d) The fireman's lift switch {see 8.3.14
of see good practice [8-5A(7)]}.
3) Seism ic detection system - A seismic
detection system shall be provided for lifts
manufactured with design acceleration
ad ~ 4 m/s2 • For lifts manufactured with
a.t < 4 m/s 2 the provision of seism ic
detection system is optional.
NOTE - The scope of supply for seismic
detector and wiring from the detector to the
lift control panel should be discussed
between the building owner or his
representati ve, and the lift manufacturer.
Where the seismic detection system is
used exclusively to send infonnation to
the lift it may be placed in the pit of the
lowest lift in the building. fn case of
expected interference with other vibration
so urces, alternative locatio ns of the
seismic detection system are allowed.
The se is mic dete c tion system s ha ll
co mply with the following:
i) Detection <?(tri-axial acceleration-
The se ismic detection system shall
be ab le to operate at all times when
the lift is intended to be ava ilable to
users.
ii) Seismic trigger level - It shall be
less than or equa l to 1.00 m/s 2 in any
direction inc luding vectors.
\-
)
)
NOTE - 'Vector' relates to the resulting
acceleration from combined reactions in x,
)
y and z planes. )
iii) Frequency response - It shall be )
between 0.5 Hz and I 0 Hz.
)
iv) System reaction time - The system
reaction time shall not exceed 3 s. '\
The system reaction time describes )
the maximum a llowed time period
between the point in time when the )
seismic wave exceeds the selected )
seismi~ trigger leve l for the first time
)
and the point in time when the lift
switches into the seismic mode. )
v) Automatic system test- The seismic )
d etect ion function i ncludin g
)
interface between seismic detector
system and the controller shall be )
tested automaticall y evety 24 h. If a
)
failure is detected during the test, the
lift shall remove itself from normal )
operation on its next stop at a landing )
and park with its doors open.
)
vi) Emerge ncy electrical power
s upply - The operation of th e }
seis mic detection system shall not be )
impeded or lost even in case of
electrical power supply switching or )
mains power supply fai lure. When an )
emergency electrical power suppl y is
)
used it shall be able to provide at
least 24 h of power supply. )
vii) Resetting (~/'the seismic detection )
device- The resetting of the seismic
detection device and the return of the )
lift to nonnal operation shall only be )
made by operation of manual reset
)
devices. The manual reset device of
the lift s hall be placed o utside of the )
well, clearly identified, and accessible )
to authorized pe r so ns only
)
(maintenance, inspection and rescue),
for example ins ide a locked cabinet. )
4) Behaviour ofthe l(fi in seismic mode - After )
ac tivatio n of the seismic detection system, the
lift sha ll perform as described below: )
i) All registered car and landing calls shall )
be cancell ed. New calls shall be ignored. )
A lift in motion s ha ll reduce the speed or
)
sto p and proceed to the next possible
landing away from the counterweight or )
balancing weight w ith maximum 0.3 m/s
)
car speed.
ii) When lift is at land ing, a lift with )
automatic power operated doors sha ll )

PART 8 BUILDING SE RVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 65 )

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)
\
)
open the doors, remove the lift from car width should be se lected such that in case of
) service and keep the doors open; and a emergency while the automobile is in the lift car the
lift with manually operated or non- driver should be able to open the automobile door and
automatic power operated doors shall come out of the automobile.
) remain in this condition and be removed
from service with the doors unlocked. 9.6.7 The car operating panel, where the car call can
)
be given, may be provided at such a location that is
Where local regulations do not permit the
accessible by the vehicle driver in the driving position
doors to re main open, a means sha ll be
) without having to get off the vehicle. The time duration
provided to open the doors (even with the
for which the door remains open upon arrival at landing
) electrical power on) enabling the rescue
floor or upon stopping at landing floor shall be sufficient
service to check whether the car is present and
enough so as to enab le smooth movement of the
persons are not trapped. In case of failure of
vehicles in and out of the lift car. Lift car entrance
) the normal power supply the li ft shall operate
dom·(s), shall be equipped with light curtain device in
as described in 9.5(k)(2).
) accordance with 19.1.4 of good practice [8-5A(5)].
9.6 Automobile lifts 9.6.8 Overload warning device shall be installed in
) Where required, li fts suitable for moving passenger accordance with 6.2 of good practice [8-5A(6)].
vehicles such as light motor vehicles (LMV), small
). 9.7 Air Conditioning System for Lift Cabin (Car)
utility vehicles (SUV), etc may be provided. The
) minimum require ments to be co nsidered while Where the lift car is equ ipped with air conditioning
)
providing such li fts are as given in 9.6.1 to 9.6.8. system, followin g add itional requirements are
recommended:
) 9.6.1 Th e minimum and max imum car are a
requirements for passenger li fts as defined in 6.1 of a) Th e whole equipment, its conta iner,
) [8-5A(6)] may not be applicable for automobile lifts. con.denser, etc, should be typically made of
) For this class of loading, the rated load shall be based corrosion resistant material, with average
on not less than 1.45 kN/m2 of inside net platform area. designed life span of 10 years.
)
9.6.2 Strengthening stiffeners may be added to car b) The air conditioning system should work on
J sing le ph ase e lectric powe r supply of
panels to have sufficient strength to avoid pemwnent
) or temporary deflection of car panels beyond limits in maximum 230 V a.c. and should be well within
case the vehicle touches the lift car panels while moving the current canying capacity of trailing cable
) cores provided for the air conditioning system.
in or out. Under no circumstance, it should result into
) unsa fe condition. The power supply for the air conditioning
system shall be provided from RCCB of
9.6.3 The hall button for calling the li ft may be provided suitable rating. This RCCB shall be located
in the approach way at such a location that the button in the lift ma chine room with proper
is accessible to the vehicle driver in the dri ving position identi fication and lock out tag out facility.
)
without having to get off the vehicle. Optional light c) The ai1· conditioning system should be provided
) ray detection system or card reader system may be with suitable air filters which should ensure
} provided for automatic detection of vehicles and ca lling clean air inside lift car. The filters should be
the li ft to the t1oor. easily accessible and serviceable from top of
)
9.6.4 Minimum entrance width of such lifts may the lift car in a safe and easy manner.
)
be 2 400 mm and entrance height of 2 300 mm . The d) The lift ai r conditioning should typically
) minimum car inside di mensions may be 2 500 mm wide include functions such as:
and 5 300 mm deep and typica lly with entrance doors I) Cooling, with adjus table temperature
)
on both sides of the lift. This will enable the car to be setting provided on the uni t itse lf or
dtiven inside and can be taken out in the same direction, through remote control unit, which may
) without any need to reverse the same. Minimum load be maintained in the lift car.
cany ing capacity shall not be less than 2 500 kg. 2) Heating, with adjus table temperature
)
9.6.5 Barricades may be provided ou tside the lift setting provided on the unit itself or
) through remote control unit may be
entrance doo r(s), so as to limit the size of the vehicle
) and preventing oversized vehicles from entering the maintained in the lift car.
lifts and possibly damaging the equipment. 3) Ventil ation, with adjus ta ble air flow
)
having less than 52 dBA noise level in
9.6.6 There shall be sufficient place on both sides of
the car.
the vehicle, once the vehicle is inside the li ft. The lift
)
66 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
r
)
)
)
4) De- humidifi cat ion, w ith effective suitable for providing necessary lift information over
condensation water management system. othe r accepted co mmuni ca tion protoco ls. With )
e) The lift air conditioning should be equipped potential free contacts only lift monitoring is possible. )
with effective condensation monitoring and It shall not be possible to control the lift.
)
condensed water recycling system so as to a) Monitoring signals
avoid water spillover or leakage on top of the )
I) Flo01· position of the li ft for each li ft .
lift car and other lift components. )
2) Direc tion of trave l for each li ft.
I ) Condensati on water moni toring and
3) Loa d co nd ition or eac h lift specia lly )
deal ing with it is a very important feature
indicating overload status.
· any I i ft a ir condi tion er sha II have. )
·condensation water leakage or spillover 4) Lift door status of each lift, whether open
or closed. )
on the lift car top may cause damage to
the li ft and may lead to electrocution or 5) Lift modes such as attendant, automatic, )
even fire. independent operation, emergency fire )
serv ic e, se is mic mode, eme rge ncy
2) When the condensation water level in the
medical service and inspection mode for )
reservo ir reaches high lew! and remains
each lift. )
at that or above that leve l for three
minutes, th e co mpressor s hould stop b) Control signals
)
work ing and the air conditioner should I ) Bring the I in down to lobby no or in case
go into ve ntil ation mode. In th e of emergency or VIP movement. )
ventilation mode the air conditioner fan 2) Park and shutdown lifts based on building \
still works, water pump still runs, the and traffi c requirements, so as to save
)
water is pumped to the condenser for power.
condensati on water to be va porized. 3) Force the lift into emergency fire service, )
When the water goes below RO percent, se is mi c mode or emt:rgcncy medi ca l )
the compressor may restart and the a ir service, etc through command from BA
conditioner may go into cooli ng mode. )
system based on respective sensor 's such
3) When the co nd ensation water le ve l as smoke detectors, seismic sensor, etc, )
reaches I 00 perce nt, and remains at that input to BMS.
)
level for I min, to avoid the water sp ill c) Reports -- Sof'twarc tools may be developed
over and da mage to lift components, the to report out pcrfonnance of each Iift such as )
air cond it ioner should power off by itself. average response time. number starts per hour, )
All components of air condi tioner should average lift uptime, round trip time, e tc.
stop work ing. Thi s air conditioning unit )
Flexibi li ty to provide additional report s based
shu t dovvn should not be automatically on building rcqui re;ncnts. )
rescttabl e and s hould require manual The abo ve mentioned requ irement for potential free )
intervention. Also it shou ld be possible contacts, other standard protocols, etc, may be optional,
for this condensation water to be drained if the fu ll-fledged lift management system software is )
out by opening the J rai n plug provided. provided by lift manufac turer for monitoring and )
Thi s facility o l' dra inin g o ff excess control of li fts in the building. This ~oftware may be
)
co1H.lc n sal ion water sha II be sa fe I y custom built providing above mentioned requi rements.
accessible either from lift car or lift pit. The wiring between lirt machine room to Building )
f) It shall he poss ible to manually sw itch 'ON' Management Systems shall be planned and carried out }
and 'OFF' the lift ai r cond itioning unit either by the builder along with other wiring in the building.
by key swi tch provided in the lift car or by )
remote control. 9.9 C lo sed C ircuit C amCI'a Inside Lifts for
)
Mo nitoring (CCTV)
9.8 Lift Interface with Building Management )
Where required. closed circuit camera is provided
Sys tem (BMS) )
either by lift manufacture r or by th ird part y supplier,
Where required, a means to interface, monitor and ins ide the lift car for sec urity purposes. Sui table )
control be provided by li f't nHtnu t~tcturer, which should warn in g mentio nin g 'Yo u a rc unde r CCTV
}
become the part of bui lding management system. The surveillance ' shall be posted inside the lift car. These
foll owi ng information and control s. but not li mited to cameras may be loca ted a t ceiling leve l and at any )
rhose, may be provided either through potentia l free location which can not be eas ily accessed, noticed o r
)
contacts or building automation (l3A) interface dev ice tampered with.
)
PART S RUI L DING SEnVI CES - SF. CTION :' INSTAL LATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS ,\ N D 67 )
:\ 10\ ' l.'lG WALKS: 5.-\ I.IFTS
)
 )
.)
)
The cable used for connecting in car camera to monitoring 9.11 Destination Control System (DCS)
) system, provided by supplier, shall be of trailing grade.
The destination control system (DCS) uses passenger
) Ordina1y co-axial or twisted pair wires shall not be lashed
destination information to improve traffic flow and
or tied along with trailing cables. Trailing cables are
) travel time in busy mid- and high-rise buildings. Instead
specialized cables used in lift applications. Wireless CCTV
of using standard hall call buttons, passenger enters
may also be considered alternatively.
specific floor number he wants to travel to - before
) If the camera signal is disconnected, either because of entering the lift. The system groups passengers traveling
)
fault or intentionally, the lift monitoring system should to nearby floors to the same car.
get an alert indicating the same. Responsibility of
Conventional Destination Control System requires
monitoring, recording, organizing and maintaining
keypads or touch screens at all floors to book the calls.
) CCTV shall be duly decided in advance.
This conventional DCS may be additionally provided
9.10 Emergency Medical Service (EMS) for the car operating panel (COP) in the lift car to improve
Hospitals passenger comfort. Alternatively, the COP in the lift
) car may be hidden. Traditional hall lanterns are no
Optional emergency medical car operation may be longer needed.
provided especially for hospitals and operation theatre
lifts and the lift behaviour in this mode is as described Hybrid Destination Control System requires keypads
below. Activation oft he emergency medical hall switch or touch screens only at the main floor all owing up-
activates the in-car buzzer and illuminates a lamp in peak boosting of traffic. Traditiona l hall button stations
the car and hall. This forces the car to cancel car calls, and hall lanterns need to be provided at all other floors.
reassigns hall calls, and return non-stop to the defined A full COP is required in the lift. With both conventional
medical landing. Upon an·ival, the door opens and the and hybrid DCS provided with touch screens and/or
) keypads, hot button(s) may be provided to facilitate
buzzer is deactivated.
) call booking to common floors as fast as possible.
The door remains open until the switch is turned off or
) the doors have been open for at least 60 s. I f the medical Optional system feahtres may be customized to meet
) switch is toggled, this operation remains in effect for bui"ldin g needs for spec ial recognition to some
additional 60 s. The second phase of EMS operation passengers (VIP, special service, building service
) can only be activated when the doors are open at the personnel). A security interface may be provided to
) medical landing. Once the car is on emergency medical allow fo r integration of building security and lift-
operation fire service operation cannot be initiated, even dispatching systems.
)
though the fire service lamp and buzzer are activated. Additional requirements for lifts required for persons
)
If the car is petforming fire service operations, emergency with disabiliti es shall be accord ing to requirements of
medical operations cannot be initiated, even though the good prac tice [8-5A( 12)]. Fireman's lifts shall be
) med ica l lamp and buzzer are activated. The car prov id ed wit h full ca r operat ing pan e l (COP)
automatically enters the emergency medical car operation inespective of configuration used.
)
after the doors are open at the medical return landing. If
9. 12 Speci al Environments
) the emergency medical car sw itch is not activated within
60 s, the medical operation is cancelled. Standard equipment is suitable for use inside normal
residential , commercial and industrial buildings but
To move the car, the emergency med ical car switch
) when unusual environments are like ly to be
needs to be activated. Prior to activation, the door
) encountered, the advice of the lift manufacturer should
cannot be closed and car calls cannot be registered. An
be sought at the earliest possible stage to enable the
) active car switch allows car calls to be registered, which
mos t economic satis fa ctory so lution to be found .
automatica lly closes the door and moves the car to the
) target landing. At the target landing the door opens and Spec ia l mechanica l protec tion and or e lectri ca l
enclosures may be necessary as well as compliance with
) remains open until another car call is registered. The ·
statutory or other regul ations and with the purchaser's
door close button has no effect on this opet.·ation.
) particu lar requi rements, whi c h s hould be fu ll y
If the car medical switch is deactivated away from the considered at the time of enquiry.
medical return landing with the doors open, the car
Exampl es of situations whi ch necess itate s pec ial
remains at the landing not allowing car calls to be
registered or the door to be closed. The car shall be consideration are:
)
returned to the medical landing and the emergency a) Exposure to weather, for example, car parks.
)
medical car switch deactivated to remove the car from b) Low temperatures, for example, cold stores.
) emergency medical car operation.
c) High temperatures, for example, boiler plant.
)
68 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE QF INDIA 2016
J
)

)

r
I
d) Hosing-down, for example, for hygiene or
decontamination.
c) Corros ive atmosphere, for example, chemical
works.
f) Dusty atmospheres, for example, gas plant.
g) Explosive and in11ammablc atmosphere, for
exa mpl e, gas plants, and petrole um and
polyester industries.
h) Nuclear/heavy water plants.
10 PERfORMAN CE R EQU IREM ENTS fOR
LifTS
10.1 It is necessary to ha ve uniformity in the de finiti on,
measurement, processing and expression of vibr~t i on
and noi se signals that comprise lift ride quality. The
aim of such uniformity is to benefit users by reduci ng
va riabil ity in th e result s of lift ride qua lit y
measurements caused by differences in the methods of
acquiring and quantify ing the signal s. Expe ri ence
indicates that evaluation of vibrat ion in terms of peak-
to-peak levels is of particular relevance to passenger
com fort. It is considered necessary to provide a dual
form of expression, quantifying both the maximum
peak-to-peak and A95 peak-to-peak vibration levels.
10.2 Measurement of Lift Ride Q uality
Ride quality of all lifts shall be measured in accordance
with accepted stantlards. The selection and cal ibration
o f measuring and tes t equ ipment shall a lso be in
accordance with accepted sta ndards.
Measurements shall b.e. made during normal bui lding
conditions, after the I i l't has been running under normal
dail y ope rati on for at least one hour. Vib rati on
measurements shal l be made nt the geometri c center of
the car.
II SPEC IAL TECH N ICAL R EQU IREMENTS
fO R SUPER HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
The provisions given hereunder describes the different
ph ys ica l phenomena that occur in su per hi gh ri se
buildings(> 200m high) and have an effect on vertica l
transportation solutions.
A I though the re arc no major d i ITcrcnces with regard to
suspension and gui dance systems between high-rise and
low-rise I ifts, there arc other aspec ts to be con sidered
such as system technology and passe nge r co m fort
leve ls. Co ntrol system artificial intelli gence leve ls,
safety requi rements, load-bearing component rntings,
rope weight, energy consumption, and thus cost increase
exponentially wi th the height of the building.
ll.l Air Press ure Effect
In high rise buildings, air pressure is different on ground
level and on top of the building. Practica lly, pressure
change on the ea r becomes uncom fortab lc for some
persons when Iirt is landing faster than I0 m/s. The
thresholds are lower for small children, elderly persons
PART 8 BUILOI:'IC SE RVI C ES - SECTION 5 1:-IH,\LLATtON Of LI FTS, ESCALATORS AND
i\ 10\' INC \\'A l.I(S: 5A LIFTS
I
and passengers hnving fl u. Therefore, practi ca lly, lifts
are offered as a standard so lution up to I 0 m/s
max tmum.
)
)
)
)
J1.2 Piston Effect )
If high speed lifts especinlly those havi ng rated speed )
greater than or equal to 4 m/s, are housed in single )
shall, the displaced air due to movement of the lift car
)
tries to escape through the gaps between the lift car
wa lls and the shaft wa lls in turbul ent flow. Th is )
phenomenon known as piston effect causes the quality )
of ride in the li ft car to deteriorate. Noise level in the
lift car may increase along with vibrati ons vvhich will )
be felt by the passengers. The air being displaced past )
the cnr genera tes whining and whistli ng noises insi de
)
the car. Bu ffeting when pass ing doors may be audible
and passenger may fee l uncomfo rtab le. Both lift car )
doors and land ing doors may wh istl e at high speeds. )
There fore, high speed li fts should preferably be housed )
in common sha ft with venti lation holes in the common
)
wa ll(s), if any. These holes allow the a ir displaced due
to the movement of the lift car to escape in the adjoining )
hoist-way. Thus, the velocity of the escaping air which
)
depends on the ratio of the lift car area to I in shaft area
reduces which mitigntes the piston ctTect ensuri ng good )
ride comfort for the passl;ngers. The size of the ,·en! )
and the pi tch at which the vents need to be provided
depend on lift car size in relation to lil'L sha ft s ize, as )
we ll as the speed of the lift and th e ride comfort )
expected.
)
In addition, high speed li fts especia ll y those having
)
rated speed more than 6 m/s may be provided ca rs with
)
aerodyna mically des igned exte ri ors. This s pec ia l
co ns tru ctio n o f the ca r howeve r in c reases th e )
requirements of the overhead and pit fo r which li ft
man ufac tu re r s hould be co ns u lted . To red uce )
hammering sounds caused by the passage of the lift )
past the landi ng doors, shaft in front of the li ft car door
may be clad with fac ia plates of fu ll sha ft width between J
the landing door sill of the upper floor and door header )
of' the lower fl oor doo r to create an even, flush surface .
)
Lift cars also need to be spec ially constructed to absorb
noise and thus retluce transmission of noise in the cnr. )
It is advisab le not to have co mmon wall between the )
lift shafts. There should be sha ft divider beams provided )
at every fl oor level and in between fl oors, if requ ired,
)
for the support of the guide rail brackets. Metall ic wire
mesh shall be provided for separation of sha rts.
)
11.3 Stack E ffect
)
Stnck effect is defined as the vertica l, natural air
movement th ro ughou t a high rise bu ild ing caused by )
the differencc .. in temperatures between the inside air )
and the outside ai r. Positive stack effect is characterized
69
 by a strong draft from the ground floor to the roof.
Positive stack effect is more significant in cold climates
because of the greater difference in temperature
between the inside and the outside of the building. The
) colder the weather and the taller the building, the greater
} will be the stack effect. Negative stack effect can also
occur in the reverse direction in hot climates, but is not
) 11.4 Building Sway
as significant because the difference in temperature is
) not as great.
) The magnitude of stack effect is a function of,
a) building height;
) b) air tightness of exterior walls;
) c) air leakage between floors; and
d) difference in temperature between inside air
) the building match, a large amount of energy is
and outside air. ·
) transferred to the ropes and they start swaying violently.
The stack effect has following effects:
) I) Differential pressure on the lift landing
doOJ:'i - The stack etTect generates differential
pressure on the landing doors. In case of
)
buildings with airtight separation of each story
the ditTcrential pressure on a particular landing
door from inside and outside of the lift shaft
)
is small however the pressure on the door of
) the first landing and that on the last landing
) varies a lot.
In case of buildings with no air partitions the
) the lift design, it could increase the lift out-of-service
converse is true. The differential pressure on
) a particular landing is significant and is the
maximum at the top most and bottom most
)
landings which are farthest from the neutral
) pressure level. At the neutral pressure level,
) which occurs somewhere in the mid of the
building height, the differential pressure on
) the landing door from inside and outside of
) the lift shaft is ni I.
) The differential pressure on the landing door
may cause difficulty in the operation of the
door.
) 2) Smoke movement - The stack effect
)
influences the smoke movement. In case of
positive stack effect the air moves out from
) ampl itude of building displacement with probability
core of the building towards the exterior of
the building above the neutral pressure level
and it moves in from the exterior of the
) on the preventive measures to be taken in the lift design.
building to the core of the building below the
) neuh·al pressure level. In case of negative stack
effect, reverse phenomenon occurs.
) A robust car guidance system with meticulously aligned
This air movement naturally affects the smoke
movement in case of fire and has to be taken
) into account.
)
Since stairwells, lift shafts and lifts tend to
contribute to the stack effect it is essential that
) all lift lobbies are well sea led and lifts parked
)
70
)
with door closed to minimize stack effect.
Especially in case of fire the stack effect needs
to be controlled to prevent the spread of smoke
in the building. On the other hand, the stack
effect may be beneficially used to quickly
drive smoke out of the building in case of fire.
The wind induced sway of the building may cause the
lift suspension and/or compensation ropes and lift car
travelling cables to sway. Buildings have natural
frequencies of oscillations. Similarly lift ropes also have
natural frequencies of oscillations which depend on the
position of the car in the hoist-way amongst other
parameters. When natural frequencies of the ropes and
This results into reduced ride comfort for the passengers
in the lift and increases possibility of ropes getting stuck
to snag points in the shaft and damaging shaft
equipment. In general, the rope and travelling cable
resonance phenomenon should be taken into account
in the lift design for over 200 m in height buildings
and slender buildings over 150 m in height, for
example, TV towers. It is a fact that the resonance
catmot be completely avoided in high rise buildings,
hence the need for the solutions to cope with the
phenomenon. If resonance is not taken into account in
time and decrease lift ride comfort.
The main purpose of the sway management is to
improve lift safety and service time by reducing rope
sway by optimizing compensations ropes tension,
providing shaft protection equipment to prevent ropes
from entangling and damaging the lift equipment. A
sway detector may be used to control the lift operations.
The output signals from the sway detector are used to
reduce the speed of the lifts or park them at a safe floor.
In order that the sway analysis is done, the building
designer should be in touch with the lift designer since
early design stage of the building and share information
on the building natural frequencies, maximum
of occurrence, etc . The lift designer would then be in a
position to calculate the rope/cable sway and decide
11.5 Ride Comfort
guide rails is essential for reducing vibrations to an
acceptable comfort level. Guide rails shall be rated for
heavy-duty usage. Irregularity in the guidance system
causes an unpleasant and uncomfortable transverse
vibration within the car at high speeds. High-quality
roller guidance system is required for smooth ride. In
NATIONAL BUILDfNG CODE OF INDiA 2016

)
addition, the lift guidance system shall be able to 12) Sizes of hoistway (width x depth), in mm;
withstand the effects of the building settling and the 13) Position of counterweight;
response of the building's stmcture to thermal and 14) Car size (width x depth), in mm;
climatic changes.
15) Construction, des ign and fini s h of car
11.6 Jump Lifts bodywork;
16) Car entrances:
In super high rise buildings there may be a need to i) Number of entrances,
start lift erection before the machine room is fi nished
in order to compress total time required to complete ii) Size (width x height), in mm
the building. The self-climbing lift technique may be iii) Type ofdoor(centeropening, telescopic,
used to build the lift as the building construction 4 panel, vertical hi-parting), and
progresses. Jump lift uses a temporary machine room iv) Whether through opening.
that is moved upward as construction progresses. 17) Car light;
Typically, when the building constmction reaches 7th 18) Call indicator;
fl oor, the jump lift may start operating and start serving 19) Position indicator in car;
lower floors. Exterior hoists can be removed sooner,
20) Lift landing entrances:
enabling the fa<;ade to be enclosed. This means that
lower floors are ready for finishing much earlier and i) Number of entrances,
the entire building can be completed sooner. Since all ii) Size (w idth x height), in mm
transportation takes place in a dry, windproof shaft, iii) Type of door or gates or shutters (for
construction can continue safely and unhindered, even goods lifts) (centre openit1g, telescopic,
in bad weather. The change-over to final lift is very 4 panel, vertical hi-parting), and
quickly done. iv) Whether through opening.
21) Electric supply:
12 LIFT ENQUIRY OR INVITATION TO
i) Power in volts a.c.,
TENDER
ii) Phase, and
12.1 General iii) Cycles (wire system).
A period of two to four weeks is normally sufficient 22) Whether neutral wire avai lable for control
for return of tenders. This shou ld be extended, if large circuit;
numbers of lifts or special requi rements are involved. 23) Temporary guarding of hoist-way and car
cabin;
The enquiry documents should be kept to the essential : 1I
24) Lighting volts a.c./d.c.;
minimum, and should be strictly confined to materi al I}
relevant to the lifts works and to the particular project 25) Are premises subj ect to Lifls Act and Rules; )' ;~
concerned. 26) Disable friendly requirements [such as voice ) ·1
i '';
anno uncement of fl oor levels, access ible ·1
When enquiring for and ordering lifts, the particulars con tro l panel (good con tras t with th e '.'j
given below should be furnished: background wall, B raille, raised letter and t 'i
l (
I) Type oflift (passenger, goods, service or dumb fo nt), railing o n three s ides, two way I .~
accessible communication system]; JI. .!1
waiter); •
~
27) Earthquake protection requirements; and l
2) Number of lifts required;
28) Additional items.
3) Capacity/Load of lift (s): number of persons
(in kg); 12.2 Additional Items
4) Rated speed (m/s);
The enquiry should state any additional items required
5) Travel (in m) and building height; beyond those spec ifi ed in good practice, such as
6) Floors served (no. of regul ar openings, interface requi rements, dismantling of existi ng lifts,
emergency openings, blocked openings); ji
fireman's control , seismic design consideration, sway/
7) Method of control (simplex or group control); deflection requirements, gravity distortion, etc .
ji
8) Position of machine room (if machine room-
12.3 Finishes
less, machine below, hydraulic); 1
9) Machine room height; Finishes should be specified at the enquiry stage or ,.
~
I0) Clear overhead/Clear top clearance; provisional sums should be included for them. Fin ishes
to be considered may include interior car fi nish, fa lse
11 ) Pit depth;
ceil ing design, false ceiling lighting, flooring material
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 71
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS )
)
)
 and weight, blower, ventilation details, car wall
cladding details (weight to be considered), multimedia
di splay details (like screen type, size, location, etc),
door cladding details, transom details (flushed with the
wall, material type, etc). See also 13 of Part 3
' Development Control Rules and General Building
Requirements' of the Code.
12.4 Inclusions and Exclusions
A number of peripheral items are associated with lifts
installation, of which some should always be provided
220 V single-phase supply in the lift shaft to operate
such equipment, the supply to terminate at the position
in the lift well required by the lift manufacturer.
These mobile platforms are limit~d in use for erection
personnel and the transportation of light equipment
only, but use of crane will also be necessary to assist in
the installation of the heavy machinery and also in the
initial installation of the mobile platfo1m equipment.
12.5 Site Programme

)
by the builder and some are best included by the
manufacturer. The requirements vary to some extent
with the type of installation.
The enquiry should indicate as accurately as possible
the contract programme as it affects the manufacturer,
in particular the target date for completion, construction
I
) schedule, site preparedness, the availability of crane
It is important that the Iimits of responsibility are clearly
for hoisting, coordination details (with other contractors
) understood, and the enquiry documents should be
specific in this respect.
like BMS interfacing, CCTV interfacing, etc). j
The lifts manufacturer should include such items 13 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER AND
)
mentioned in 12.1. SUBSEQUENT PROCEDURE
)
The lifts manufacturer should exclude the supply and 13.1 General
) fixing of the items or as per the con tract conditions as
follows: The procedure indicated below particularly relates to
the most usual case, where the Ii ft manufacturer is the
a) Builder's work such as forming lift well, pit
sub-contractor.
- - and machine room; and building wall inserts.
b) Mac hine room floor in cludi ng an y 13.2 Order
) reinforcement necessary for load bearing.
The building owner places an order with the selected
) c) Hoisting hook/lifting beam fixing, where contractor for suppl y and installation of li fts. If
necessary. altemative schemes have been offered, the order should
)
d) Any neaessary tanking, lining or clearly indicate which has been accepted.
) reinforcement of the pit.
13.3 Programme
) e) Diving beams for multiple wells and inter well
pit screen (or as per the contract). The contractor shall subm it a detai led programme after
f) Trap door. acceptance of the order showing his intended method,
stages of the works, together with the period of time
g) Intermediate beams for bracket fi xing.
) that has been estimated for each and every stage of
h) Door cladding (or as per the contract). progress.
) j) Cutting away and making good.
The program me shall cover each lift separate ly,
) k) Working lights/permanent electricity supplies. including dates, such as:
) m) Site paintin g of steel work other than lift
material (if any). a) Date of order of equipment and materi als;
) b) Date of commencement and completion of
For more detailed discussion of the requirements for
} every s tage of the works in li ne with the
site preparation and work by other trades, reference
building construction programme;
) should be made to good practice [8-5A(7)] and to other
relevant clauses of this Section. c) Date of expected completion ofbuilder's work
) requirements;
Facilities for the use of the main contractor's crane
) shou ld be prov ided to ass ist in installin g heavy d) Date of delivery of equipment and materials
to site; and
) equipment in add ition to other unloading facilities on
site in the course of erection. e) Date of requirement of temporary and
) permanent electricity suppl y, and date of
The main contractor should be instructed to include
) completion, commiss ioning and testing.
these facilities in his own quantities.
) Where the lift manufacturer agrees to use mobile The period between order and dclivety of material fa lls
platforms in place of lift well scaffolding, the general into two stages : first the finali zing of detai ls and
)
contractor should provide 400/440 V 3-phase and 200/ secondly the actual production of the equipment which
J
) 72 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF IN DIA 2016

)
depends on the first stage. Within the first stage, other
dates may need to be considered, such as:
I) All relevant building information available.
2) Submission of lift manufacturer's drawings.
3) Approval of drawings.
4) Final selection of fini shes.
13.4 Drawings to be Submitted after Placin g of
Order
The li ft manufacturer shall prepare layout drawings
based on the c iv il /s tru cture d raw in gs, orde r
requirements and submit to building owner within
mutually agreed time frame. The same shall be briefed
to building owner.
The drawi ngs sha ll indicate clearly the positi on and
sizes of all holes and cuttings, the loads on beams and
structures, and all other requirements in relation to ' Lift
Installation' namely:
a) Lift machine room and associated equipment,
including sub-fl oor where appropriate.
b) All struct ural open in gs, such as land ing
entrances (including structural dimensions),
ventilation openings, etc.
c) All bases, plinths, channels, holes, grouting-
in of fix ings, etc.
d) Lifting beams or other faci lities for suppmiing
lifting tackle in the machine room and lift well,
permanent means of access to ·!,he lift pit.
e) Hoisting fac ilities and access 1:equi red for
delivery of equipment to the machine room,
etc.
f) Deta il s of structu ra l stee lwo rk fo r li ft
machi nery in the lift machine room.
g) Deta il s of s haft divid ing steelwork for
supporti ng guard brackets etc, and inter-well
screens/wall for multiple wells.
h) Method of fi xing guide rails.
13.5 Approval of Dr awings
The building owner should go through the drawi ngs
submi tted by lift manufacturer and ensure that it is
prepared in line with civil/structm al drawing and order
requirements provided.
If any addition/alteration is noted in the drawing, the
same shall be updated in the drawi ng by the lift
manufacturer and resubmitted to the buil di ng owner
for approval.
The drawing shall be approved by building owner, once
it has been clearl y understood.
13.6 Selection of Finishes
Where the contract provides for the purchaser's choice
of decorative fi nishes, colours, etc, the decisions should
PART 8 BU ILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND
MOV1NG WALKS: SA LIFTS
be communicated by the purchaser 's representative as
earl y as possible, preferably not later than the time of
approval of drawings.
13.7 Electricity Supply to Lift
Operation of the machine under power is requi red from
a comparatively early stage of installation for the most
efficient working, and power supply should be provided
accordingly. Whilst temporary supply may be suffi cient
fo r erection purposes, final testing and setting up can
onl y be carried out with the permanent supplies ) ~
connected. For this reason the timely provision of the
pe1manent supplies is important.
14 COORDINATION OF SITE WORK
14. 1 Preparatory Work on Site
In accordance with the general arrangement drawing
for the lift, the representative of the li ft company would
brief the building owner or his nominated representative
about the preparatory work that is requ ired to be carried
out before con1mencement of the Iift installation.
The building owner will ensure that the preparatmy work
is done in accordance to the general an angement of li ft
and also the state L((t Rules are fo ll owed fo r the
construction of the lift shaft as well as machine room.
Once the preparatory work is completed, the building )
owner or his nominated representative, will ask the lift )
company to cross check and see that evetything is in order.
)
The representative of lift manufacturer shall check the
lift shaft and bring the shortfa lls, if any, to the notice of )
the building owner till the preparatory work is completed )
in compliance with the requirement ofli ft supplier. The
fo llowing works shall be completed by the buildi ng )
owner before commencement of lift erection. )
a) Lift well pit floor and side wall of the lift shaft )
may be plastered and water proofed. Pit shall
be free from any water leakage/seepage and )
debris. Build ing owner s ha ll e nsu re the )
construction of the pit depth in accordance
)
with the speed of the li ft as specified by the
manu factu rer in the general arrangement )
drawing. )
b) ln general the th ickness of li ft walls should
)
be minimum 23 0 mm in brick or 150 mm in
RCC. However, the lift shaft wall s shall be )
constructed in consu ltation with structural )
engineers or consul tant to veri fy the suitabil ity
based on lift load/reactions. )
c) l n case of br ick wa ll s it would b e )
recommended to have concrete block at )
locations where the guide ra il brackets are to
be installed. Similarly in case of structural )
shaft suitable ISMC/lSMB should be provided )
by the builder to fi x guide ra il brackets at all
)
bracket fix ing levels. The Iift manufacturer
)
73
)

)
)
)
will provide a drawing indicating the locations
of brackets in the lift shaft.
1 d) Similarly for fixing the landing entrances, the
) builder has to provide RCC lintels/RCC beams
for fixing landing door header and sil l. In case
of structural shaft suitable metallic channels
) have to be provided in the entrance area at
) lintel and floor level.
e) All the structura l shafts have to be completely
covered and finished in accordance to the local
) codes before the start of installation.
) f) Suitab le cut-outs near the entrance area as
indicated in the lift general arrangement
) shifting o f materials.
dr.awing have to be provided for fi xing human
interface system like landing operating panel,
) fl oor indicato r, h a ll go ng and lantern,
emergency alarm, fireman switch and other
) devices li ke ' THIS CAR NEXT', gro up
) ind icators, etc.
g) The bu il~ing contractor s hall provide load
hooks/beams in machine room for machine
) room lift, one directly above the lift shaft and
) other direct ly on top of the trap door as
spec ified in the lift general arrangement
)
drawing. The same shall be provided in the
) slab in the overhead area for machine room
) less lifts, as spec ified by the lift manufach1rer
in their general arrangement drawi ng. The
) minimum s torage space per li ft shall be 35m 2 per li ft.
position of load hooks/beams provided by the
) bui lding contractor shall be as specified by
the lift manufacturer.
)
h) Machine room door shall be opening outs ide.
) sto rage area provided by the building owner should
It shall be minimum 1 m wide and 2m in clear
) height with a platform outside.
j) Caution notice of 440 V and restricted entry
)
shall be marked on the machi ne room door.
) o f lift is completed and handed over to the owner.
k) Fire extinguisher shall be provided by building
) contractor to prevent fire acc idents.
) m) The machine room shall be air-conditioned or
adequately ventilated so as to ma intain the
)
ambient temperatu re be tween +5°C and
) +40°C.
n) The lift s haft in mason ry s hall be fu ll y
plastered. The shaft shall be given two coats
of white-wash.
) damages.
p) Scaffolding (bamboo/stee l) shall be erected
) as required by the lift manufac ture r w ith
necessar y safety m easures. Ade quate
)
barricading needs to be provided on all the
) lift entrance opening to avoid mishap.
) q) The bui lding contractor shall provide proper
illumination in the li ft s haft, lift lobby,
)
staircase and machine room.
)
74
)
)
~·
14.2 Delivery of Material
The delivery of the material shall be made based on
mutual agreement o f the lift manufacturer and the
building contractor. It is strongly recommended that
the material should be delivered at s ite only when a
suitable s to rage area is provided by .t he bui !ding
contractor.
The scope of un loading and stacking materials shall be
as per mutuall y ag reed te rm s b e tween th e lift
manufacturer and th e bui lding contractor. Whi le
unloading and shifting of materials due care shall be
taken by both the parties to ensure safe unloading and
Suitable equipment like hydra, fork lift, c rane and
trolleys shall be used for un loading and shifting of lift
materials. B uil ding contractor shall ensure safe passage
for vehicles carrying materials, up to the s torage area.
14.3 Storage
In order to enable efficient material distribution it is
imp01t ant that the material sha ll be unloaded from the
delivery truck within a distance of 50 m oft he storage/
unit location and have proper access fro m unloading
area to storage area. The building contractor shall
provide the storage area near the installation site, that
is within 20 m distance from the installation site. The
T he storage room should be dry, well lit, wea ther
protected and should have locki ng arrangement and
provision of a 16 A power point is recommended. T he
ha ve PCC floo ring. The storage room shall be kept
ready be fore arriva l of material at site and will remain
in possession or installation engineer till the erection
The material shall be stacked in sequential manner, in
accordance with the plmmed activities. The storage area
should be provided at a suitab le locatio n near the
vic inity of the lift shaft preferably above the ground
floor level and should remain in possession of the I ift
supplier ti ll the installation and commiss ioning work
is completed. It is s trongly recommended that th e
location of the sto re is not changed to avoid material
14.4 Site Meetings
For the successfu l progress of the work, full cooperation
among all agencies is essential. In large s ites, regular
meetin gs of sllch age nc ies a re benefic ial for
coordination of wo rk efficien tly. Programme for the
constructional work in that part of the building
NATIONAL BU ILDING CODE OF INDIA 20 16
containing the lift should be made in consultation 15 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
among all parties concerned. PROCEDURE FOR LIFTS

14.5 Service of Other Trades 15.1 Reference

The lift erector wi ll require the services of arch itect, This suggested procedure for inspectio n oflifts is based ) t;
civil , and e lectrical contractors, and other agencies as on good practice [8-5A(2)], [8-5A( I 0)] and [8-5A( 13 )] ) ll
I'
the work proceeds, and it is essential that the lift erector for the traction lift. ) ~~
should give due notice to the building contractor of the i~
15.2 Purpose ) :~
demands to be made on other trades, so that he can
plan acco rdin gly. Mutually agreed, periodic meeting To ensure safe operation of new lifts on their completion ) ~~
to review work progress with agencies concerned would and before being placed ·in service, they need to be
ensu re better coordination and efficiency. subj ected to acceptance inspection and tests in the field , 11·I
t\
to determine that installation sha ll conform to the •
14.6 Scaffolding, Fencing, Wherever Provided requirements of applicable standards. An inspection and
test shall also be carried out on an existing installation
ll
:,
Scaffolds and stationaty work platforms sha ll be erected
in accordance with adequate safe ty under th e after a maj or alteration. ) ·j
supctv ision of a competent person. When used, wooden ) 11
15.3 General Requirements
or synthetic planks shall be scaffold-grade or approved
by a qualified person for scaffold and stationary work These requirements shall be as follows:
) i,.!
,I

p latform use, a nd th e same s ha ll be ca pable o f ) I

a) Personal safety
withstandi ng 4 times the working load. )
I) Use of relevant personal protective
The asse mbl y a nd disassembly of scaffold s and equ ipment is mandato ry by the inspector )
stationary work platfo rms shall be done us ing a safety and hi s suppo rt staff at the ti me of )
harness and lifeline as required. All temporaty lig hting inspecti on.
sha ll be so installed so as not to make any contact with )
2) S h ou ld s top wo rk and arrange fo r
the metal frames of the scaffo ld. Also the scaffolding co rrection, if un safe conditions are )
s hall be double earthed. Prior to canying out any li ft noticed at the installation.
installation work, fe ncing and warning notices should )
b) Safety precautions during inspection
be provided at all landings indicating that there are men )
at work. I) Inspectors should have a proper working
knowledge of the lifts. )
14.7 System Building Sites 2) They should always ensure that the car is )
in his control while working on car roof
lf thc building programme allows insufficient ti me fo r )
and pit
lift erecti on in conventional fashion after the we ll is
3) They sho uld at a ll ti mes be alert for )
completely built special procedures are needed. This
app li es particularly to industrial and multi-storeyed moving objects, and w he n on top of an )
buildings. The building contractor should provide a lift car for moving cou nte r weight,
)
sui tab le portable cover to the completed portion of the ho is t-way projectio n such as beams ,
lift well in order to protect the li ft erectors working adjacen t moving cars, cams and o ther )
below against the weather and falling obj ects. equipment attached thereto or mounted )
in the hoist-way.
When the lop of the well has been reached it is normal )
4) The overhead clearance should always be
to cap it immediately with a precast load bearing Ooor
noted as number of fata l accidents occurs )
s lab on to which is lowered the pre-assembled machine
due to cars running into limited overhead
room equipment. lt then remains fo r the bui lding
spaces wh ile inspections are made from ')
contractor to complete and weatherproof the machine )
top of the lift cars.
room as swiftly as possible. On all such projects the
5) Inspector should never enter in lift pits )
close cooperat ion between the building contractor and
contai ning water.
the lift manufacturer is essential. )
6) When working in the lift pit the inspector
14.8 Connecting to Power Supply should always note the position of car. )

T he lift manufacturer s hould give pri or intimation to 7) Keeps clear distance from desce nding )
the building contracto r of the date the power supply to counterweight in the ho ist-way o f the lift
)
the lift is required, so that suitab le arrangements for being inspected and those in adjo ining
ho ist-way. )
connection can be made.
)
PART 8 BU ILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 75
MOV ING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)

)
15.4 Description of Installation
)
The following provides a template of typical description of installation:
)
)
)
Site
details
Name with
Vendor I I
) I I
Length of 1.
)
(mm)
tra vel
I I
Job No:
I
)
) Number of floors served
Purchaser's identification number
) Tota l: I I. I I
)
Front: I I. Power supply

Rea r: I I. Permanent I I
)
Car door: Glass I Landing door:
)
ss Glass ISS · Temporary I I
} Rated load c=J I I I.
)
Voltage I
Rated speed I mls I•
)
Phase I I•
) I

) Lift type Passenger I Goods Frequency I I.

Machine Room I Machine
) Room Less
)
)
Location of Machine Room
(For MR Lifts)
Give a tick mark in the
Wire(3 or 4) I I.
appropriate box
) Above well I I MCCB rating I I•
) I.
Below well I I ELCB rating I
)
At side I I Are the above entries acceptable
)
) Ropi ng ratio:
Yes I I No c=J
)
) 15.5 Visual and Functional Checks 2 Instructions for installation and dismantling of lifts arc not
covered.
) A typ ical checkli st of visual and functiona l checks
involved in the installation of lifts is given in Annex A. 16.2 Maintenance of the lift esse ntially covers a ll
necessary operations to ensure safe and intended
16 MAINTENANCE OF LIFTS functioning of the installation and its components after
completion of the installation and throughout its life
) 16.1 Following sections specify the elements necessary
cycle. Maintenance includes:
fo r the prepa ration of the in s tru c ti o ns for th e
)
maintenance operati ons of lifts. The requirements arc a) lubricatio n, cleaning, etc;
} applicable for all new installed passenger lifts, goods - NOTE- The fo llowing cleaning operations cannot be
passenger lifts, special goods lifts such as ve hi cle lifts, considered as maintenance:
)
service lifts. I) Cleaning of the external parts of the well, and
) 2) Cleaning of the inside of the car.
NOTES
) b) checks;
l Existing installed lifts arc not covered.
)
76 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
)
 f
)

! c) passenger rescue operations;

d) the operations of setting and adjustment; and
e) · repair or changing of components which may
including the infonnation intended for the maintenance
organization.
)

')
)
16.3.2 Elem ents to be Taken into Acco un t f or
occur due to· wear and tear and do not affect Maintenance Instructions )
the characteristics of the installation.
Wh en preparing the content of the mai ntenance )
The fo ll owing are not considered as maintenance instructions the following elements shall be taken into )
operations: account:
)
1)Changing of major component such as the a) The specifications and the intended use of the
machine, even if the characteristics of the new installation (type of installation, perfonnance, )
component are the same as the original; type of goods to be h·ansported, type of users, )
2) Replacement of installation; etc).
)
3) Modernization of the installation including b) The environment in wh ich the installation and
c ha nging of any c haracte ris ti cs o f the its comp onents are in sta lle d (wea th er )
installation (such as load, speed, etc); and conditions, vandalism, etc). )
4) Rescue operation carried out by fire brigade. c) Any restriction of use. )
d) The res ult of ri sk assess ment for every
16.3 Elabora tion of Maintena nce Instr uctions working area and for every task undertaken. )
16.3.1 General e) Th e spe c if ic ma inte na nce instruct ions )
provi ded by the m a nu ~acture r of sa fe ty )
The installat ion shall be maintained in good working
o rder in accorda nce with the man ufacturer's components.
)
instmctions. To this effect, regular maintenance of the f) In case o f components other than safety
installation shall be carried out to ensure, in particular, components, where maintenance is necessary, )
the safety of the installation. The safety of an installation the maintenance instructions provided by the )
shall take into account the ability to be maintained manu facturer of these components.
)
without causing inj ury or da mage to health. 16.3 .3 I nformation to be Includ ed in the
Maintenance Instructions )
Regular maintenance of the installation shall be carried
out to ensure the reliability of the installation. The 16.3.3.1 General )
access and the assoc iated env ironment shall be )
maintained in good working order in accordance with The maintenance instructions shall contain information
the installer 's instructions. relating to the tasks of the owner and respectively the )
maintenance organization.
The instructions for maintenance of an installation shall )
be provided by the installer after compl etion of the 16.3.3.2 Information to the owner of the installation )
ins tallation as a res ult of a ris k assessment. The The information relating to the tasks of the owner of )
instructions for maintenance of the safety components the installat ion shall include that given in 16.3.3.2.1
of lifts shall be provided by the manufacturer to the )
to 16.3.3.2.16.
installer. The instmctions for maintenance which shall )
be based on a detailed risk assessment of an installation 16.3 .3.2.1 The need fo r th e owne r to keep the
shall be provided by the manufacturer. installation in a sa fe operating condition. To fu lfi l this )
owner shall use a maintenance organization complying
In order that the aim of the ma intenance instructions )
with the requi rements of this Section.
can be achieved, they shall be formulated so that they )
NOTE - It is recommen ded to inform the owner of the
can be clearly and easily understood by competent installation about the need to use a maintenance organization )
maintenance person. w ith adequate a nd proper insurance cover provided by a n
insurance company. )
The co mpe tent ma inte nance pe rson withi n the
maintenance organiza ti on s hall be co ntinuous ly 16.3.3.2.2 The need for the owner to take care of any )
updated. state/local regulations and other req uirements, where )
relevant, and their implications on maintenance.
NOT E - The owner of the install ation should be informed )
that the q ual ifi cation o f the mai ntenance organ ization is in 16.3.3.2.3 The need for planned ma intenance to be
conformity with the regulation appl icable in the state in which )
the installatio n opera tes.
carried out by a maintenance organization, at the latest
when the installation is put into service or if the )
T he manu fact urer s ha ll prov ide ma inte na nce installation is to remain unused for a long period of
instructions intended for the owner of the installation )
time, before being put into service first time thereafter.
)
PART 8 RUILDING SERVICES - SECTIONS INSTALLATION OF LlFT'S, ESCALATO RS AND 77 )
MOVI NG W ALJ<S: SA LI FTS
)
)
)
)

) 16.3.3.2.11 The need for the building ow ner to ensure,

16.3.3.2.4 The importance fo r th e owner of the
) installatio n to have the same maintenance organization through a risk assessment, that,
in the case of several installations having common well/
\ spaces and/or machine room.
a) their premises are safe and free from risk to
) health as far as is practicable. This includes
16.3.3.2.5 The need for the owner of a passenger/goods- access to th e premi ses a nd in stallati o n
) pa sse nger lift to k ee p the two -way m eans of equipment, and articles or substances used
) communication efficient and linked to a 24 h rescue according to the regulation for the use of work
service for the w hole of the time that the ins tallation equipment at the workplace;
)
can be used. b) the persons us ing the prem ises are informed
) about any remai ning risks; and
16.3.3.2.6 The need fo r the owner to remove the
) passenger/goods-passenger lift fro m service w hen the c) any actio n to be do ne as a consequence of his
two-way means of communication is out of order. risk assessment is carried out.
J
} 16.3.3.2.7 The need for the owner to put the installation R egarding th e access way s to ar eas reserved to
out of service in case of dangerous s ituations. maintenance persons, the need fo r the owner of the
) insta llatio n to inform the maintenance organization, in
16.3.3.2.8 The need for the o wner of the installati on to parti cul ar about,
info rm the maintenance organization,
) 1) the access ways to be used and fire evacuating
a) im mediately abo ut any perceived ab norma l procedures from the bui ldi ng;
) ope rati o n of th e install at io n or ab no rma l
2) the place where the keys of the reserved areas
) change in its direct enviro nment;
can be found ;
b) immediately after putting the installatio n o ut
) 3) if necessary, the persons who shall acco mpany
of service in the case of a dangerous situation;
the maintenance persons to the installatio n;
) c) afte r a n y r esc u e in te r ve nt io n b y the ir and
) authorized and instructed person(s) ;
4) if necessary, personal protective equipment to
d) before any m o di fication re la te d to the be used in the access ways, and, possibly,
)
installatio n and/o r its environment or use; w here this equipment can be fou nd.
e) be fo re any authori zed third party inspection
or works other th an maintenance works are · The information shall .be made ava ilable also 01~ s ite to
)
carried out on the installation; . the mai ntenance organizatio n.
)
f) befo re taking the installation out of service 16.3.3.2.12 T he need for the owner of the installation
) for a prolonged peri od o f time; and to ensure that the name and the te lephone number o f
) g) befo re putting the installation back into service the maintenance organizat io n are a lways avai lable to
a fte r a pro lo nged period of non-operating the user of the installation, permanently affixed and
time. clearly vis ible .
) NOTE - The owner of the installation should obtain 16.3.3.2.13 The need fo r the owner of the installation
from the company carrying out the relevant modi fication
) to ensure that the keys of machine and pulley room
the maintenance in~t ru c t ions for the mai ntenance
organization. doo rs (trap doors) and of inspection and emergency
)
doors (trap doors) are perma nentl y av.ailable in the
16.3.3.2.9 T he need fo r the owner of the installation to building and are used o nly by persons authorized to
take in to consideration the consequ ences of the risk gain access.
)
assessment can·ied out by the maintenance organiza tion.
16.3.3.2.14 The need fo r the owner of the install ati on
16.3.3.2.10 The need fo r the owner of the installation to provide, in all circumstances, safe access to the
to make sure that the risk assessmen t for mai ntenance build ing and to the installa tio n for the maintenance
is catTied out, organizati on invo lved in the resc ue of persons.
a) if the maintenance o rgani zatio n is replaced; 16.3.3.2.1 5 The need for the owner of the installation
b) if the use of the building and/or the installati on to keep the access to working areas and working rooms
changes; sa fe and free fo r the maintenance persons and to info rm
) the maintenance o rganiza ti on about any haza rd or
c) after a maj or mod ifica tion of the instal lation cha nge in the workp lace and/ or the access ways
)
or of the building; and (lighting, obstru ctions, ground conditions, etc).
d) if it is the case, after an accident invo lving the 16.3.3.2.16 In additio n to those examinations and tests
) installation. w hich the ow ner of the installation entrusts to the
)
78 NATIONAL BU ILDING CODE OF I NDIA 201 6
)
 )
)
maintenance organization, the need for the owner to instructions and all information supplied by
carry out periodically, in their own interests, the the owner of the installation.
following: d) The need for the maintenance organization to )

A full ascent and descent travel to assess any changes inform the owner of the installation about any )
in the quality of the ride or damage to the equipment. work to be carried out as a consequence of a
risk assessment especially for the access and/ )
Typical items to be checked to ensure that they are in
place, undamaged and functioning correctly are, or the environment related to the building/ )
installation.
a) landing doors and bottom door tracks; )
e) The need to carry out a maintenance plan so
b) stopping accuracy; that preventive maintenance is suitable for the )
c) indicators that are not located in a reserved installation and maintenance time is as short )
area; as· reasonab ly practicable, without reducing
the safety of persons, in order to minimize the
)
d) landing push controls;
e) car push controls; non-operational time of the ins tallation. )
f) door open controls; f) T he need to adapt the p lan for maintenance )
so as to take acco unt of any predictable
g) two-way means of communication in the car )
fa ilures, for example, those due to misuse,
wh ich prov ides permanent contact w ith a
mishandling, deterioration, etc. )
rescue serv ice;
g) The need to cany out maintenance operations )
h) normal car lighting;
by competent maintena nce persons a nd
j) · door reversal device; and provid ed w ith the n ecessary too ls an d )
k) safety s igns/pictograms. equipment. )
For goods only and service lifts the checks to be carried h) The need to maintain the co mpetency of
)
out are the same, when re levant. maintenance persons.
j) In determining the frequency of maintenance
)
l6.3.3.3Jnformationfor the maintenance organization
interventions, the following non-exhaus tive )
The information relating to the tasks of the maintenance list s hould be considered:
)
organization shall include the following: I) Number of trips per year, operating time
and any non-operating periods of time; )
a) The need to carry out the work of maintenance
in con fo r mity w ith the maintenance 2) Age and condition of the installation; )
instructions a nd base d o n sys temat ic 3) Location and type of bui lding in which )
maintenance checks. After these checks, the the installation is installed, as well as the
maintenance organi zation sha ll decide in needs of the users and/or the kind of )
confom1ity with the maintenance instructions goods transported; )
what is required to be done. 4) Local env ironment where the installation )
A lis t of typical exa mples of maintenance is s itu ated , as we ll as ex terna l
)
checks to mainta in the installation is shown e nvironmental e lements, for example,
in Annex B. weather conditions (rain, heat, cold, etc) J
NOTE - Due to the fact that the components can be or vandal ism .
different in design and operation, it is therefore not )
k) The need to provide a 24 h, all year round
possible to give specific guidelines.
call-out service for rescue of persons. )
b) The need to update the original maintenance
in structions if the insta llat ion changes its m) The need to keep records of the resu lt of each )
intende d use and/o r the env ironme nta l intervention due to a failure of the ins tallation.
)
conditions existing on the completion of the These records shall include the type of failures
in order to detect any repetition. They shall )
ins tallation.
be ava ilable to the owner of the installation )
NOTE - The maintenance organization should be
on request.
prov ided by the ow ner of the installation with the )
relevant maintenance instructions where modifications n) The need to put out of service the installation,
are carried out on the installation. if the maintenance organi zation is a ware of a )
c) The need for the mainte nance organization to dangerous situa tio n, detected during the )
ensure that a risk assessment for any working ma intenance, which cannot be elim inated
area and for any maintenance operation has immediate ly, and to inform the owner of the )
been carri ed out taking into account the installation of the need to keep it out of service )
ins Ia ll e r 's/m an ufacturer 's rna in te.na: nce until repaired.
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATO RS AND 79 )
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)

) c) Possible states of the install ation (normal or

p) The need to be organized to provide the
) necessary spare parts for any repair. abnormal due to a fo reseeable fa ilure of its
q) Th e poss ib le need for atte nda nce of a co mponent parts, external disturba nces,
competent maintenance person(s), g ive n disturbance of its power supply, etc).
)
reasonable notice, for any inspection carried A1mex C gives a list of examp les of elements to be
) out by an authorized third party or for building take n into ac count in any ris k assessme nt fo r
maintenance works to be carried out in the maintenance operations. However, several methods are
)
areas reserved for th e mainte nance available for the systematic assessment of risk.
) organization .
r) The need to infmm in due time the owner of 16.4.2 Information for the Maintenance Organization
the installation about necessary progressive For safe ma in tena nce a nd to prov ide re leva nt
upgrading of the installation. instructions, it is necessary, first of all, to identify the
) s) The need to organize rescue operations, even maintenance operations. In particular, maintenance
) with sub-contractor(s), and to make provision operations are,
for circumstances such as fire, panic, etc.
) a) those operations considered necessa1y for a
16.4 Risk Assessment con·ect and safe functioning of the installation
and its components after the completion of the
16.4.1 General
installation;
Before an install ation is placed on the market, it is b) those operations considered necessmy during
necessary that the installer/manufacturer carry out a risk the ' li fe' of some components, determining,
assessment. Every risk shall be limited as much as as far as possible, the time or condition after
) reasonably possible by means of safely measures and which the fu nctioning or the integri ty of the
suitable inshuctions. The instructions can never replace component is no longer ensured even if
) a safety measure which can be provided to reduce the correctly mai ntained.
) risk.
In canying out specific maintenance operations, if it is
) It is necessary to determine the different intervention
necessary to neutralize some safety functions (for
procedures of the mai ntenance operations and to example, an e lectri c safe ty dev ice), the hazard
)
c.lcte1mine the appropriate safety measures for each of identification shall be taken into account for such a
) these procedures. situation.
) The use of diagnostic systems (for example, remote
It is necessmy to inform and warn the maintenanc·e
monitoring system) may support fault finding, improve
) persons about,
the maintai nability of the installation and reduce the
) exposure of maintenance persons to hazards. l ) residual risks, that is, those for which risk
) re duction by des ig n a nd safeg uardi ng
Safety in maintenance operations of the installation is
techniques are not- or not totally - effective;
) ensured by adopting safety measures and providing
and
instmctions. Safety measures on the insta llat ion and in
) the building shall be provided by the installer and by 2) risks that arise from the necessary removal of
) the owner of the installation, respect ively. ce rta in gua rds to carry o ut specific
maintenance operations.
) For any working area, it is necessary to identify the list
of the speciftc hazards related to health and safety and The maintenance instruct ions and warnings shall
) prescribe the procedures and operating modes intended
to carry out a ri sk assessment for any maintenance
) operation, including access to the working area. to overcome these risks and, if it is necessaty, to specify
personal protective equipment, instruments, tools and
) For this purpose, the following should be taken into provisions to be used.
account:
a) Presence of one or more maintenance persons 16.5 I nformation to t he Owner for Lift Resc ue
)
in a worki ng area; Oper ations
)
b) Foreseeable actions of persons other than The information to the owner shall be inclusive of that
) maintenance persons (for example, person given in 16.5.1 to 16.5.5.
switching on or off powe r circuits and
) 16.5. 1 The need for person(s) authorized by the owner
dependent circuits or ligh ting circui ts or trying
) of the installation to rescue trapped passengers to be
to use the insta llation du ring ma intenance
trained by the maintenance organization.
) operations, etc); and

)
80 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6

)
 )
)
16.5.2 The need to ensure that the h·aining is appropriate a) Type of installation, with its serial number, to
to the specific installation and updated. which the instructions apply; ')

16.5.3 The need to ensure his authorized person(s) b) Title of the handbook; )
rescue people only through landing doors. c) Date of issue; )
d) Name and address of the installer/
16.5.4 The need to ensure that the maintenance )
manufacturer; and
organization is called when the owner's authorized
e) Name of the publisher, when different from )
person(s) are not able to move the car through the use
of the manual and/or electric emergency devices. the installer/manufacturer. )

16.5.5 The need to infonn their authorized person(s) In the handbook, )

about any conditions for which only the maintenance 1) all units used shall be SI units; )
organization shall carry out a rescue operation. 2) all pages shall be numbered; and )
16.6 Markings, Signs, Pictograms and Written 3) all references to other documents shall be in
)
Warnings full.
)
If the risk assessment of the maintenance organization Wamings shall state the hazard, the related risks and
indicates that additional specific warnings are required - the appropriate safety measure. )
for the purpose of maintenance, these shall be affixed Type and size of print shall ensure the best possible ) '
directly on the installation/component or, when this is legibil ity. Safety warni ngs and/or precautions shall be )
not possible, in the close vicinity. emphasized through the use of colours or symbols and/
)
Markings, signs, pictograms and written wamings shall or large print. Signs shall comply'with the accepted
be readily understandable and unambiguous. Readily standard [8-5A( l4)]. )
understandable signs and pictograms shall be used in Documents giving instructions for maintenance shall )
preference to written warnings. be produced in durable form (that is, they shall be able )
Signs or written warnings catTying only 'DANGER' to survive frequent handling) or triplicate copies shall
be provided. )
shall not be used.
)
In formation affixed directly on the installation/ 16.8 Documents to be Kept at the Site oflustallation
component shall be petmanent and legible. of Lifts )
Any markings, signs, pictograms and written warnings The following documents shall be maintai ned at the )
affixed on the installation shall be renewed if they job site near the controller such that they are easily )
become illegible. available:
)
16.7 Format of the Ma inten a nce Instruction a) Wiring diagram,
)
Handbook b) Lift license copy,
c) Log card, and )
The maintenanc e in struction handbook fo r any
d) General arrangement drawing. )
installation shall contai n at the front at least the
following: J
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATO RS AND 81 )
MOVING W ALI<S: SA LIFTS
)
)
:)
)

)
) ANNEXA
) (Clause 15.5)
) TYPICAL CHECKLIST OF VISUAL AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS INVOLVED IN THE
) INSTALLATION OF LIFTS
)
A-1 MACHINE ROOM

Sl Requirement Result Remarks

)
No:
)
i) There shall be easy access from lhe top landing to the machine room Accessible I Not
accessible
ii) Steps along with handrail for the access to machine room to be Provided I Not
provided provided
iii) Locking arrangement shall be provided and machine room sha11 be kept Provided I Not
) locked provided
) iv) The machine room shall be used for the purpose of lift machinery only Yes I No

) v) Machine room should be free from water entry Yes I No

vi) Rope hitches on the machine room are fixed as required and locked Yes /No
)
with nuts and split pins
) vii) The hoisting beams or hooks provided as per the required load and Provided I
) marked Not provided
viii) Trap door at the top of the lift well to lift the machine up or down from Provided I
)
the machine room and to be located vertically below the hook provided Not provided
) in the machine room ceiling
) ix) Rescue chart to be pasted in the machine room with proper
Yes I No
identification ·
x) The correct capacity main switch and protective device to be provided Provided I
as per the requirement Not provided
xi) Grounding conductor is provided and of correct size Provided I
Not provided
xii) Provision of log card pocket Provided I
) Not provided
) xiii) Guards to be provided fo r moving parts such as over speed governor Provided I
(OSG), machine sheave, etc Not provided
)
xiv) Three pin socket with switch and lighting arrangements Provided I
) Not provided
) xv) The machine room is painted and windows to be provided Provided I
Not provided
)
xv i) There shall be adequate ventilation Provided I
) Not provided
xvii) Machine room shall be kept in clean condition Clean I Unclean
) x viii) Provision of caution notice indicating 'DANGER' on machine room Displayed I
door Not displayed
)

) A-2 POWER SUPPLY

) Sl Requirement Result Remarks
) No.
) i) [ncoming power supply to be 415 V ± 10 percent or as specified in R-Y:
the contract agreement Y-B:
) R-B :
)
82 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
 )
)

1
Sl Requirement Result Remarks
No. I
)
I)
Okl Not Ok
I)
ii) Neutral- Earth Ideal condition Value:
voltage within (0- 3) V I)
OkiNotOK
)
iii) Neutral- Eatth Running condition Value:
voltage within (0- 3) V )
OkiNot OK
iv) Separate supply Three phase supply Provided I Not
with MCB provided
Single phase suppl y (For car lighting and Provided I Not
shaft lighting ) provided )
v) Check whether the power cables are connected with lugs for Connected I Not
termination connected
vi) Shaft lighting to be provided Provided I Not
provided

A-3 MACIUNE AND BRAKE ASSEMBLY

Sl Requirement Result Remarks

No. I
)
Make: Sl No.: Rating:
)
i) Is the machine fixation as per the inst.allation manual Yes I No
)
ii) Are the electrical connections of the machine routed and well tightened Yes I No
) I

iii) Machine earthing is done, routed and properly tightened Yes I No

)
iv) Are the machine isolation pads installed cotTectly (if applicable) Yes I No
)
v) Are the rope openings below the machine closed adequately as required Yes I No
)
vi) If applicable, is the machine lubricated as required Yes I No
)
vii) The height of the machine room shall not be less than 2 100 mm at working Yes I No
areas )

viii) The clear height for the movement shall not be less than I 800 mm Yes I No )t
ix) The width of the clear space around the machine from any two sides shall not Yes I No ) li
be less than 500 mm
) r
x) Clear vertical distance of at least 300 mm is available above rotating Yes I No
equipment ) f
) l.
xi) Are all the components of the brake installed, nuts tightened and locked Yes I No
) I
I
xii) Is the routing of the machine brake cables free from any moving parts Yes I No
) l
xiii) [s the machine brake and switches properly adjusted with coLTect clearance Yes I No
) '
xiv) Is the brake assembly clean, no debri s and oil on disk o r drum Yes I No
xv)
) tI.
Is the manual brake release device is available and easily accessible Yes I No
l;

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 83

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFfS
;}
)
)
A-4 CONTROLLER
)

) SINo. Requirement Result Remarks

Type: Sl No.: Wiring drawing No:

i) Is the controller fixed as per the GAD (General

Yes I No
Arrangement Drawing)
ii) Is the controller identified with the correct contract number Yes I No
) iii) The controller should have an easy access to open and
Yes I No
) close with lock

) iv) The required warning stickers to be pasted Provided/Not provided

) v) All extra cables to be neatly arranged Yes I No
)
vi) Are the battery terminals covered Yes I No
)

) vii) The field and controller wiring to be properly routed Yes I No

)
A-5 OVER SPEED GOVERNOR
)
) Sl No. Requirement Result Remarks
)
Make: Model: Sl No: Tripping speed:

i) Is the correct over speed governor provided and installed as per layout Yes I No
) ii) The sticker/painted indication represents the down direction of rotation Yes I No
which will facilitate the safety gear actuation
)
) iii) Check whether the OSG is calibrated and sealed Yes / No

) iv) The governor is aligned and the rope passes through the holes without Yes I No
any obstruction
)
) v) The governor rope runs free does not contact any with any object in the Yes I No
hoist-way
)
vi) The governor tripping mechanism is free and clean Yes I No
)
)
vii) The electrical switch is provided and operates in both the directions Yes I No

) viii) All fixation bolts are provided and adequately tightened Yes I No

)
A-6 GENERAL INSPECTION ON CAR ROOF
)
) Sl No. l Requirement I Result I Remarks
Instructions before entering to the car top:
a) Allow the lift to move in down direction from the top terminal landing with no load.
) b) Stop the lift from the controller by changing to maintenance mode, such that easy access to enter the car
top from the top terminal landing.
)
c) Switch on the shaft lighting.
) d) Use the door open key to open the top terminal land ing door.
e) Switch on the car top stop switch from the landing to enable the ' STOP' mode.
)
t) And then enter into the car top and switch on the light point there.
) g) Switch to maintenance mode from the car top and release the stop switch to move the lift in maintenance
mode.
)
)

) 84 NATIONAL BUlLDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
 )
)

SINo. Requirement Result Remarks

i) Banicade on car roof to be provided Provided /Not provided
ii) Adequate lighting with proper protection is Provided /Not provided
provided on the car roof
iii) Wires and trunking are properly routed and does Yes I No )
not hinder with any maintenance related
equipment
iv) The car fan is properly fi xed with isolation Yes I No I
v) Three pin plug socket with switch is available Yes I No )
and is in working condition
)
vi) The emergency stop switch that should be easily Yes I No
accessible fro m outside the lift is provided of )
manually o pened and closed type )
vii) Check whether the top car clearance meets the Value meas ured:
requirement. )
Value required: Ok/ NotOk )
viii) Overhead dimension in WxHxD Value measured: )
Value required: Ok/ Not Ok
)
ix) If overhead height is less, then the indication to Provided I Not provided
be provided with ZEBRA PAINTING in the )
overhead
)
x) Floor levelling switches are fixed as per Yes I No
reqtfirement )
xi) Rope hitches on car roof are fixed as required Yes I No )
and locked wi th nuts and split pins
)
xii) Car sheave if available is adequately guarded Yes I No
from accidental contact )
xiii) The junction box is fixed securely and all wires Yes I No )
are adequately protected
)
xiv) The car shoe li ners I rollers are fi xed as per Yes I No
requirement and adjusted properly )
xv) Oil tank are provided and fixed with proper oil Yes I No )
levels
xvi) Engagement of the car door coupler with the Ok I Not Ok )
landing door at every landing )
xvii) Engagement of shaft limit switches Ok/ Not Ok
)
xviii) The govemor ro pe and linkage is correctly Yes /No
connected to the car )

xix) The guide rail clips are fixed as per requirements Yes I No )
and in the correct directions
)
xx) The safety gear assembly and connecting rod Yes I No
should be free from external disturbances )
xx i) T he safety switches have been verified for Yes I No )
correct operation during travel
)
xxii) The safety gear lin kages is checked for Yes I No
operation and actuation and actuation of )
switches
)
xxiii) C learance between the car door coupler and the Ok/ Not Ok
landing sill to be as per the manufacturer design )
at every landing )
xxiv) Clearance between the landing rollers with the Ok I Not Ok
)
car sill to be as per the manufacturer design at
every landing )
)
PART 8 JIUJLDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 85
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS )
)
)

)
)
A-7 PIT INSPECTION
)

) Sl Requirement Result Remarks

No. t
)
Instructions before entering to the pit:
)

I
a) Allow a person in the car top and ask him to move the lift to the top most landing.
) b) Open the bottom tenninallanding door with door open key.
) c) Switch on the pit stop switch from outside the pit.
d) Enter in to the pit.
)
i) It should be clean and dry Yes I No
)
ii) Pit ladder to be provided if the pit depth exceeds Provided /Not provided
1 500 mm as measured below the bottom most
landing sill
)
iii) Oil trays are available at the bottom of each guide rail Provided /Not provided
)
iv) Two pit stop switches to be provided and one should Provided /Not provided
) be easily accessible from the bottom terminal landing
) v) Pit stop switches to be verified with the electiical Ok /Not Ok
circuit such that lift should not move further after the
) activation of pit stop switches
) vi) Counterweight screen should be provided and fixed Provided I Not provided
) vii) Buffers provided for car and counterweight are Ok/Not Ok
correctl y fixed and aligned and the electrical switch to
)
be verified, if provided
) viii) The governor tension pulley is fixed at the correct Ok I Not Ok
) height from the pit floor as per the manufacturer
recommendation
)
ix) The electrical switch fo r the tension pulley is veiified, Okl Not Ok
) if provided
x) C heck whether the bottom car clearance meets the Value meas ured:
requirement
) Value required: Ok l Not Ok
) xi) Check for the provision of car bottom light and its Okl Not ok
function
xii) Is the travell ing cable below car secured and correctly Ok I Not Ok
fixed and the excess cable is not secured below car
) xiii) The travelling cable is adj usted and clear of the pit Okl Not Ok
floor with the car at the lowest position
)
xiv) The bottom guide shoes or rollers are fixed as per Okl Not Ok
)
requi1·ement and adjusted for smooth travel
) xv) The car safety gear is properl y adj usted as per the Ok/ Not Ok
) installation manual
xvi) The compensation chain fix ing arrangement is fixed OkiNot Ok
)
as per requirement
)
) A-8 EARTHING

) Sl Requirement Result Remarks

) No.
i) Separate earth bar to be provided in the machine Provided /Not provided
)
room ·
) ii) Earthing to be done for all controllers and the Yes I No
machine

)
86 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
 ')

)
}
Sl Requirement Result Remarks
)
No.
iii) Ea~thing to be done for the shaft equipment and Yes I No )
car top components )
iv) Earthing fro m controller to car top components Yes I No
)
to be linked through the travelling cable
)
v) Routing of the earth from the controller to the OkiNotOk
main earth bar )
vi) Connection of the lift earth bar to main earth bar Okl NotOk )
)
A-9 INSPECTION FROM THE LIFT CAR
)
Sl No. Requirement Result Remarks )
Instructions: )
a) No one sho uld be present in the pit as well as in the car top.
)
b) Make sure the lift to run in normal mode.
c) Enter the lift car from any of the landing. )

i) Car inside width Value at site : )

)
Value required: Ok I Not Ok
)
ii) Car inside depth Value at site:
)
Value req uired: Okl Not Ok )
iii) Height below fal se ceiling. Value at site: )
)
Value required: Ok I Not Ok
)
iv) Door opening width Value at site:
)
Value requ ired: Ok I Not Ok )
v) Door opening height Value at site: )

Value requi red: Ok I Not Ok

)
)
vi) Car capac ity to be dis played ins ide the lift car Yes I No
)
vii ) Safety warning plate to be displayed (see Note) Yes I No
)
viii) Functioning of car di splay Functioning I Not
functioning )
ix) Functioning of floo r announcement, ARD Functioning I Not )
anno unce ment, etc ( if applicable) functioning
)
DO button and DC button functio nal check: )

x) For power operated door: Functioning I Not )

1) Press the DO button at level -Door should open functioning )
2) Press the DO button during running - Door should
)
not open
3) While closing press the DO butto n at level - Door )
should open
)
4) DC button at level when the door is in open
condition - Door should close )
)

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 87 )

MOVlNC WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
)
.)
)
) SINo. Requirement Result Remat·ks

) xi) For manual operated door:

1) Lift should not move if any of the door car/landing Functioning I
)
in open condition Not functioning
) 2) If door is opened during run, lift should stop and
) should not move further
) xii) Car alarm should function even though there is no Functioning I
power supply to the lift Not functioning
)
xiii) Functioning of intercom (see Note) Functioning I
.
·I

)
Not functioning
)
xiv) Functioning of car call buttons and landing call buttons Ok / Notok
) (see Note)
) xv) Provision of fan and its operations Provided I
) Not prov ided

) xvi) Provision and working of cabin lights and shaft lights Provided I
Not provided
)
xvii) Provision of emergency light and its fu nctions Provided I
) Not provided
) xviii) Doors are verified for smooth opening and closing at Ok I Not ok
) each level

) xix) Riding comfort - No rail knocks and vibrations are Ok I Not ok

heard while travelling several times in e ither directions
)
xx) Lift should not move for any safety failure Ok /Not ok
)
xxi) Provision of grab bars inside the lift car (see Note) Prov ided I
)
Not provided
xxii) Provision of bu ffer rail (applicable only for service Provided I
lifts) at the rear panel of the lift car Not provided I
NOTE- Lif1s open to public use shall also be inspected for requirements as per 13 of Part 3 ·Development Control Rules and General
1!
Building Requirements' of the Code, inc luding those relating to lift closing time, finishes of interior surfaces, etc.
)

A-10 INSPECTION FROM THE FLOOR LANDINGS

Sl Requil·ement Result Rem arks

No.
i) Provision and functioning of landing door de- locking at F unctioning I Not
every landing functioni ng

) ii) Condition of landing door at every floor Okl Not ok

iii) Functioning of landing display at every floor Functioning I Not
)
functioning
)
iv) Functioning of landing call button F unctioning I Not
) functioning
) v) Functioning of duplex/group operation at every landing (if Functioning I Not
applicable) functioning
)
)
)
)
) 88 NATIONAL llUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
)
 -----------------)
')
)

'>
A-11 RESCUE OPER ATIONS

Sl R equirement Result Remarks

No. )
i) Is the auto matic rescue device ( ARD) installed and Yes I No )
operating as per the instructions
ii) Does visual indicator and audible a lar m func tio n during Yes I No
operation )
iii) Is the floo r level acceptable duting th e automatic rescue Yes I No )
operation
)
iv) Whether the lift moves when the brake is opened depending Yes I No
upon the inertia )

v) Provision of emergency electrica l rescue dev ice and its Functioning I Not )
functioning (if applicable) function ing )

A-12 FIRE OPERATION )

)
Sl R equirem e nt Result R em a rks
No. )
i) Phase I Fu nction ing I )
a) W hen the firem an switch is activated, all the landing calls to be Not fu nctioning )
inoperati ve and the car shall report to the evacuation floor and
the lift doors to be in opened cond itio n )
b) If the lift is moving away from the evacuation floo r, then it shall
)
reverse its direction at the nearest floor landing without opening
its door, and return back to the evacuation floor and remains )
there itself with the doors open
)
ii) Phase // ( if applicable) Functioni ng I
a) It will be started afte r the completion of Phase I along with the Not functioning )
fireman switch in ON positio n )
b) In Phase II, lift should not respo nd to landing call and when the
car call butto n is pressed, the door should start closing. If the )
button is released before the full closure of doors, then the doors
)
sho uld open automatically
c) After the fu ll close of door, the lift sho uld move on to the floor of )
registered car call
)
d) The doors shou ld only open if the open butto n is pressed after
reaching the level. If the open butto n is released before the full )
opening of doors, then the doors shou ld reclose automatically
)
A-13 SAFETY DEVICES )
-- )
Sl Requirem ent Result Rem arks
No. )
lnstntctions: )
a-) T he lift is in ideal condi tion and the following safety devices get activated, then it should not move
further. )
b) If the lift is in running condition and the following safety devices get activated, then the lift shall stop and
s hould not move further.
)
i) OSG - Over speed governor Functio ning I
Not functioning )
ii) Car door contact Functioning I )
Not functioning
j
iii) Landing door co ntact F unctioning I
) I
Not functioning
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 89
MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
 -
Sl Requirement Result Remarks
) No.
iv) Car top stop switches Functioning I
I Not functioning
)
v) Pit stop switches : F unctioning I
) Not functioning
) vi) Functioning of screen sensors and door safety edge: Functioning I
1) Door should reopen, if we cut the screen. Not functioning
2) Door should reopen, if it hit any object.
vii) Check whether the car and counter buffers are installed as per Yes I No
) the requirement
) viii) Functioning of limit switches so that lift should not travel Functioning I
) beyond the limit Not fu nctioning

) ix) Brake on its own shall be capable of stopping the machine Ok I Not Ok
when the car is travelling downward at rated speed and with
) the rated load plus 25 percent
) x) Safety gear test: Stopping
1) Lift car safety gear to be tested in down direction with 100 distance:
)
percent rated load in the lift car (d uring maintenance it
) shall be tested only in inspection speed) OkiNot Ok
) 2) If provided, counterweight safety gear to be tested in up
direction of lif t car with no load
) Lift stopping distance depends upon the tripping speed of the
) governor and is to be within the range as per the Indian
Standard. I
)

) A-14 LEVELLING ACCURACY AND RUNNING CLEARANCE TEST

)
Instructions:
)
a) The levelling accuracy shall be within ±5 mrn of the fin ished floor level.
) b) T he numing clearance between the lift em· threshold and landing door sill should be 30 rnm.
) No. offloors:

Floors Levelling Accuracy Ru nning Clearance

(Landing)
) UP DN LH Centre RH
) J st
) 2nd
)
3rd
)
4th
)
5th
)

) 6th

)
...
)
) ...
) RESULT
Ok I Not Ok

90 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

 )

A-15 LOAD TEST

)
Sl Load in Percent Direction of Travel Voltage Current
No.
\
v A
)
Instructions: )
a) With balanced load, the current value in both the up and down directions to be same.
b) Check the current only after the lift reaches its rated speed. )
UP )
i) No load
DN )

UP )
ii) Half load
DN )
UP )
iii) Full load
DN )
)
)
)
)
ANNEXB )
[Clause 16.3.3.3 (a)] )
TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF CHECKS TO BETAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN )
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
)
B-1 ELECTRIC LIFTS )
)
Item Checks
)
General Check all components are clean and kept free from dust
and corrosion )
Pit area Check fo r excess oil/grease at bottom of guides. )
Check the pit area is clean, dry and free from debris
)
Anti-rebound device and switch (where fitted) Check for free movement and operation
)
Check for equal tension of ropes
Check switch where fitted )
Check lubrication )
Buffers Check oil level )
Check lublication
)
Check switch where fitted
)
C heck f ixings
Drive motor/generator Check bearings for wear )
Check lubrication )
Check condition of commutator )
Gear box Check gear for wear )
Check lu brication
)
Tractio n sheave Check condition and grooves for wear
)
Brake Check braki ng system
Check parts for wear
Check stopping accuracy )

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 91

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
,)
)

)
) Item Checks
Controller Check cabinet is clean, dry and free from dust
'
)
Overspeed governor and tension pulley Check moving parts for free movement and wear
Check operation
)
Check switch
)
Main rope diverter pulley(s) Check condition and grooves for wear
) Check bearings for abnormal noise and/or vibrations
Check guarding
) Check lu brication
) Car/counterweight guides Check for film of oil where required on all guide surfaces
Check fixings
)
Car/counterweight guide shoes Check guide shoes/rollers for wear
Check fixings
Check lubrication, where necessary
) Electric wiring Check insulation
) Lift car Check emergency lighting, car buttons, key switches
) Check fixings of panels and ceiling
Safety gcar(s)/ascending car over speed Check moving parts for free movement and wear
)
protection means Check lubrication
)
Check fixings
)
Check operation
) Check switch
) Suspension ropes/chains Check for wear, e longation and tension
) Check lubrication only where intended
)
Rope/chains terminations Check for deterioration and wear
Check fixings
)
Landing entrances Check operation of landing locks
)
Check doors for free running
) Check door guiding
) Check door gaps
Check wire rope, chain or be lt whe n used for integrity
Check emergency unlocking device
Check lubrication
Car door Check door closed contact or lock
Check doors for free running
Check door guiding
Check door gaps
Check wire rope or chain when used for integrity
Check passenger door protecti ve device

) Check lubrication
Floor level Check stopping accuracy at landing
)
Final limit switc hes Check operation
) Motor run time limiter Check operation
} Electric safety devices Check operatio n
) Check electric safety chain

92 NATIONAL IJUILDING CODE O F INDIA 201 6

J
 )
')
Item Checl<s
)
Check COJTect fuses are fitted
)
Emergency alarm device Check operation
)
Landing contro ls and indicators Check operation
)
Well lighti ng Check operation
)
B-2 HYDRAULIC LIFTS )
)
Item Checl<s
)
General Check all components are clean and kept free from dust and
co nos ion )
Pit area Check fo r excess oil/grease at bottom of guides )
Check the pit area is clean, dry and free fro m debris )
Buffers Check oil level ) .
Check lubrication
)
Check switch where fitted
Check fixings )
Tank unit Check hydraulic fluid level )
Check tank and valve unit for leakage )
Jac k Check for oi l leakage
)
Telescopic jack Check for synchronization
)
Controller Check cabinet is c lean, dry and free from dust
Overspeed governor and tension Check moving parts for free movement and wear )
pulley Check operation )
Check switch )
Main rope pulley(s) C heck condition and g rooves for wear )
Check bearings for abnormal no ise and/or vibrations )
Check guarding
)
Check lubrication
Car/balancing weight/jack guides Check for f ilm of oil where requ ired on all guide surfaces )
Check fixings )
Car/balanci ng weight/jack guide shoes Check guide shoes/rollers for wear
Check fix ings )
Check lubrication where necessary
)
Electric wi ring Check insulation
)
Lift car Check emergency lighting, car buttons, key sw itches
Check fixings of panels and cei ling )
Safety gear/pawl clamping C heck moving parts for free movement and wear )
devices Check lubrication )
Check fix ings
)
Check operation
)
Check switch
Suspensio n ropes/chains Check for wear, elongation and tension
Check lubri cation only where intended ) I
Ropes/chains terminations Check for deterioration and wear
Check fixi ngs )

PART 8 BUILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 93

MOVING WALKS: SA LIFTS
)
)
')
)
)

) Landing entrances Check operation of landing locks

Check doors for free running
)
Check door guiding
Check door gaps
) Check wire rope, chain or belt when used, for integrity
) Check emergency unlocking device
Check lubrication
)
Car door Check door closed contact or lock
Check doors for free running
Check door guiding
) Check door gaps
Check wire rope or chain when used for integrity
Check passenger door protective device
Check lubrication
) Floor level Check stopping accuracy at landing
) Final limit switch Check operation
) Motor run time limiter Che~k operation
) Electric safety devices Check operation
Check electric safety chain
)
Check correct fuses are fitted
Emergency alarm device Check operation
) Landing controls and indicators Check operation
) Well lighting Check operation
) Anti-creep device Check operation
Rupture valve/one way restrictor Check.operation
Pressure relief valve Check operation
Manual lowering valve Check operation
Hand pump Check operation
) Hose/pipe work Check fo r damage and leakage
)
)

)
)

)
)
)
}
)

)
) 94 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
 ANNEXC )
(Clause 16.4.1) )

EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO BE TAKEN IN TO ACCOUNT IN ANY RISK )

l
ASSESSMENT FOR MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

Elements Car Machinery Pulley Area Pit

Spaces Spaces Outside the Car
Roof
Lift
Unsuitable access (ladders not secure, no
hand rails, unsuitable trap door, obstacle
NR R R R R R
,
I
I
on car roof, etc) l
Unauthorized entry NR R R R R R I
)
Inadequate lighting (including access) R R R R R R I
)
Uneven floor surface (holes, projections) R R R R R R I
Slippery floor surface R R R R R R
Strength of floor R R R R R R
I
Unsuitable dimensions (passages, main- R R R R R R
tenance spaces) I
)
Identification of car position R R NR NR NR NR I
Indirect contact with electricity R R R R R R I
Switches NR R R R R R
Contact with moving parts (ropes, NR R R R R R
pulleys) I
)
Unexpected movements R R R R R R I)
Crushing by moving parts (car, counter- NR R R R R R
weight) I
Voids between car and well NR R R NR NR R )
More than one lift in same area NR R R R R R
Overhead beams and sheaves NR R R R R R
Re fuge volume(s) NR R R NR R R
Manual handling NR R R R R R
More than one maintenance person NR R R R R R
working
Absence of means of communication R R R R R R
Ventilation and temperature for persons R R R R R R
Dangerous substances R R R R R R
Falling objects R R R R R R )

Entrapment R R R R R R )
Means/controls for rescue operations R R R R R R )
Fire R R R R R R }
'R' = Relevant and 'NR' =Not relevant.
)
)
)
)
)

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND 95

MOVING WALKS: SA LIITS
l
)
)
LIST OF STANDARDS
)
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
'
)
acceptable as 'good pract'ice' and 'accepted standards'
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the code. The
(5) 14665 (Pa1t 4/ Electric traction lifts: Part 4
Sec 1 to 9) : Components, Section 1 Lift
) latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time 2001 buffers, Section 2 Lift guide rails
) of enforcement of the code. The standards listed may and guide shoes, Section 3 Lift
be used by the Authority for conformance with the carframe, car, counterweight and
) requirements of the referred clauses in the code. suspension, Section 4 Lift safety
gears and governors, Section 5
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
Lift retiring cam, Section 6 Lift
) column within parentheses indicates the number of the
doors and locking devices and
)
reference in this Subsection.
contacts, Section 7 Lift machines
) IS No. Title and brakes, Section 8 Lift wire
( I) 1467 I : 1999 Code of practice for installation ropes, Section 9 Controller and
) and maintenance of hydraulic lifts operating devices
) (2) · 14665 Electric traction li fts (6) 14665 (Part 3/ Electric tractio n lifts: Part 3

)
(Part I) : 2000 Guideli nes for outline dimensions
of passenger, goods, service and
Sec I and 2) :
2000
Safety rules, Section 1 Passenger
and goods lifts, Section 2 Service
1
) hospital lifts lifts
(Part 3/ Sec 1 Safety rules, Section I Passenger (7) 14665 (Pa rt 2/ Electric traction lifts : Patt 2 Code
)
and 2) : 2000 and goods lifts, Section 2 Service Sec I and 2): of practice for installation,
) lifts 2000 operation and maintenance,
) (Part 4/ Sec 1 Components, Sec tion 1 Lift Section 1 Passenger and goods
to 9) : 2001 buffers, Section 2 Lif1 guide rai ls li fts, Section 2 Service li fts
) and guide shoes, Section 3 Lift (8) 3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
) Cat·frame, car, counterweight and (9) IS/IEC 60529 : Degrees of protection provided by
suspension, Section 4 Lift safety 200 1 enclosures (IP CODE)
)
gears and governors, Section 5 (10) 15785 : 2009 Code of practice for installation
) Lift retiring cam, Section 6 Lift and maintenance of lifts without
)
doors and locking devices and conventional machine room
contacts, Section 7 Lift machines (II) 15259: 2002 Code of practice for installation
) and brakes, Section 8 Lift wire and maintenance of home I ifts
ropes, Section 9 Controll er and ( 12) 15330 : 2003 Code of practice for Installation
operatiJJg devices and maintenance of li fts for
(3) 12615: 20 11 Energy efficient inducti on handicapped persons
) motors - Three phase squirrel ( 13) 14665 Electric traction lifts: Pmt 5
cage (Part 5) : 1999 Inspection manual
)
(4) 1950: 1962 Code of pract ice for so und ( 14) 9457 : 2005 Code of practice for safety colours
) ins ulation of non- industria l and safety signs ([trst revision)
buildings

)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
96 NATIONAL 13UILDING CODE OF INDIA 20 16
)
)

)
 )
)

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA ·,

)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES )
Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks: )
)
58 Escalators and Moving Walks
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS )

)
)
)
)
)
CON .T ENTS
)
)
) FOREWORD 3
) 1 SCOPE 5

)
2 TERMINOLOGY 5
3 GENERAL 6
)
4 DESIGN GUIDELINES FOR ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS 8
) .
5 ARRANGEMENT AND PLANNING DIM ENSIONS 8
)
6 SPACE REQUIREMENT . . . 12
) 7 FIRE PROTECTION ... 18
) 8 MINIMUM TECHNICAL AND SAFETY REQU IREMENTS ... 19
) 9 SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ... 23
) 10 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS ... 25

)
11 ESCALATOR AND MOVING WALK ENQUIRY OR INVITATION TO TENDER ... 26
12 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER AND SUBSEQUENT PROCEDURE ... 27
)
13 COORDINATION OF SITE WORK ... 28 I
) I
14 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES ... 28
) 15 OPERATION AN D MAINTENANCE ... 3 1 4

ANNEXA TYPICAL ESCALATOR S ITE CHECKLIST/INSPECTION LIST .. . 36

)
ANNEX B TYPICAL CHECK LIST FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS ON SAFETY
) SWITCHES AND DEV ICES ... 40
) ANNEX C TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF MAINTENANCE CHECKS TO MAINTAIN
THE INSTALLATION -· ... 42
)
ANNEX D EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN
) ANY RISK ASSESSMENT FOR MAINTENANCE OPERATION S ... 43
)

) LIST OF STANDARDS . . . 44

)
)

)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
2 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INOlA 2016
)
)

)
 i
r )
)
National Bui lding Code Sectional Committee, CE D 46 t
)

)
)
)
)
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 8/S ubsection 58) covers the essential requirements for plan ning, installation, operation,
maintenance and inspection of escalators and moving wa lks so as to ensure safe movement of people with satisfact01y ~
perfom1ance, while usi ng these. ~
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983 and 2005. This Section covers the )
requirements for installation of lifts and escalators in bu ildings. This Section shall be read with Part 4 'Fire and
)
Life Safety' of the Code from fire safety requirements point of view. The major changes in the first revision of
1983 were addition of outline dimensions of di fferent types of li fts and detailed requ irements of escalators in )
buildings. Emphasis was laid on coordination between the engineer/architect and the lift manufacturer to arrive at )
the number and position of li fts lo r attaining optimum effic iency in serving the building with safety.
)
The significant changes with respect to lifts incorporated in the last revision in 2005, included addition of new
clauses/recommendations on building management system; addition of new clauses on fireman's lift, infrared )
light curtain, safety and Brai lle button for blind people andupdation of provisions as per the revi sed standards on )
lifts on which this Section was based.
)
As a resul t of experience ga ined since implementation of2005 version of the Code and feedback received as well
)
as rev is ion of Indian Standards on wh ich this Secti on vvas based, a need was felt to revise this Section. In this
revision, the erstwhi le Section 5 on Lifts and Escalators has been divided into two subsections namely: )
SA Installation of Lifts )

58 Installation of Escalators and Moving Wa_lks )

This revision has, therefore, been formulated to take care of these. This Subsection (58) addresses exclusive ly the )
provisions related to installation of escalators and mov ing walks, which are being increasingly provided in buildings. )
Compared to the previous version where brief details were covered in Section 5 with respect to escalators, this
)
Subsection now covers comprehensive provisions on all aspects, including req uirements for planning, installation,
operation, maintenance and inspection of escalators, so as to ensure safe movement of people with satisfactory )
performance. Thi s also now covers provisions on moving walks. )
Assistance has been derived from the following publications in the formulation of this Subsection: )

EN 115-1 : 2008 Safety of esca lators and moving wa lks - Part 1: Construction and instal lation )
)
lBC 2015 International Building Code, International Code Council, Washington, USA
)
JI S A 4302 : 2006 Inspection standard of e levator, escalator and dumb.waiter
)
ClBSE Guide D: Transportation Systems in Buildings, 20 15, The Chm1cred Institution oC Building Services
Engineers, London, U.K. )

All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Subsection, are subject to )
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Subsection are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying )
the most recent ed itions of the standards.
)
For the purpose of deciding whether a particu lar requirement of this Subsection is complied with, the final va lue,
)
observed or calculated, expressing the resu lt of a test or ana lysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960
' Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)'. The number of signi ticant places retained in the rounded off )
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Subsecti on. )
)
)

P,\IH !I BU ILDING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 3
5B ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
 J
)
)
')
)
)
)
)

)
)

)
)

)
)

)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)

)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
}
 )
)
)
1

NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA )

)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
)
Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Wa lks:
58 Escalators and Moving Walks )
)
)
1 SCOPE 2.1.8 Comb Plate- Platform at each lauding to which I
1.1 This Code (Part 8/S ubsection 5B) covers the the combs are attached. ) .
essenti al requirements for planning, insta ll at io n , 2.1.9 Comb Plate Switch - Switch in safety circuit )
operation, maintenance and inspection of escalators and that opens w hen excessive force is detected in vertical
moving walks so as to ensure safe movement of people )
ancVor horizontal direction o n the comb or comb plate
with satisfactory performance, while using these. of escalato rs/moving walk. )
1.2 This Subsection gives information that sho uld be )
2.1.10 Comb Teeth - Series of tee th wh ich ride the
exchanged among the architect/enginee r, the consulting
gr ooves of the escalators/moving walk step tread as )
eng ineer and escalator/moving walk manufacturer from
the step passes underneath and are des ig ned so as to
th e s ta ge o f plan ning to ins tall a tion inc ludin g )
allow them to break off, if a wedging action should
maintenance.
OCC Ur at the ir point of contact \.Vith Step tread. )
2 TERM INOLOGY 2.1.11 Emergency Brake - Aux iliary mechanically )
for the purpose of this Subsection, the fo ll owing terms au tomatically operated brake, which will stop a fully )
and definitions apply. loaded escalato r, if the drive chain breaks.
)
2. t Gc ne.-al Terms Relatin g to Esc a lators and 2.1.12 Emergency Stop Switch - Separate stop button
)
Moving Walks usually located in adjacen t wa lls, columns o r within
th e bal ustrade provi din g th e fac ility to sto p th e )
2. 1.1 Angle of fllclill ation -
Maximum angle to the escalator/m oving walk, in the event of emergency. )
horizontal in which the steps, the pallets or the be lt
move. 2. 1.13 In spection Door- Means of access to )
equ ipment areas and other spaces pertainin g to an
2.1.2 Auxiliary Brake - Fail safe brake, which is used )
escalators/moving wn lk ins ta llation such as machi nery
to stop an escalators/movi ng walk under all norma l )
spaces, etc, and w ith access us ua ll y res tric ted to
conditions o r under ce rta in fault conditions only,
authorized perso ns. )
typica ll y s ituated on one side of the main drive shaft.
2.1.14 Safety Devices - Part of <1 safety circu it )
2.1.3 Balustrade - Part of the escalato r/moving walk
cons isting of safety sw itches an d/o r fai l safe circui ts.
which ensures the user 's safety by provid ing stabili ty, )
protecting from moving pa rts and supportin g the 2.1.15 Escalator - Power-dri ve n, inclined, continuous )
handrai I. mov ing stairway used for raising or lowering persons
in which the user carry ing s urface (for example, steps) )
2.1.4 Balustrade Decking - Transverse member of the
remains hori zo ntal. )
balustrade whic h meets the handrail g uidance profile
and whic h fo rms the top cover of the balust rade. NOT E - Esca lators are machines, and e ve n when out of )
operation, sha ll not be cons idered as fixed sta ircases as there
2.1 .5 Brake Load - Load o n the step/pallet/belt for could be a safety concern. )
w hich the brake system is desig ned to stop the escalator/
2.1.16 Exterior Panel - Part of the exterior s ide of )
moving wa lk.
the enclos ure of an esca lator o r moving walk. )
2.1. 6 Comb - Pronged section at each landing that
2.1.17 Handrail - Power-driven mov ing rai l for )
meshes w ith the grooves of the steps
persons to g rip while using the escalator or moving
2.1. 7 Comb Lighti11g - Small tlush light pane ls located walk . )
in the skirt panels on both sides of the escalators/moving )
2.1.18 Interior Panel - Pane l located between th e
wa lk un it at both up per a nd lower landing and
s ki rting or lower inn e r decking a nd the hand rail )
immediately adjacent to the comb teeth to ill uminate
guidance protile or balustrade decking.
the comb and step tread and assist passengers boarding )
and a lig hting the escalato rs/moving walk. 2.1.19 Lower Inner Decking - Profi le that connects )
PART 8 BUILD ING SERV ICES - SECTION 5 I NSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND l\lOVING WALKS: 5 )
58 ESCALATORS A:'lD MO\'I~G WALI<S J
 l
)
) NOTE - The correction in the case of A-weighting is to be
the skirting with the interior panel when they do not
•) meet at a common point.
determined from A-weighted measured values .

) 2.2.3 Em ission Sound Pressure Level (LpA) -

2.1.20 Lower Outer Decking- Profile that connects
A-weighted sound press ure level at the specified
) the exterior panels with the interior panel.
positions, excluding the. effects of background noise
) 2.1.2 1 Machine1y - Escalator or moving walk and contribution due to the room characteristics
machine(s) mechanisms and associated equipment. (reverberation) of the in-situ environment. It is
)
expressed in decibel.
)
2.1.221vlacfline1J' Spaces- Space(s) inside or outside
of the truss where the machinery as a whole or in parts 2.2.4 Environmental Indicator (K2A)- CotTection term
) is placed. to account for the intluence of reflected sound on the
) emission sound pressure level due the characteristic of
2.1.23 Maximum Capacity - Maximum flow of
the test room.
) persons that can be achieved unde r operational
conditions. 2.2.5 Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (LpAeq) -
)
Average A-weighted sound pressure level.
2.1.24 Mo ving Walk - Power-driven installation for
)
the conveyance of persons in which the surface can-ying 2.2.6 Load Carrying Unit - Part of an escalator or
the users remains parallel to its direction of motion and moving walk designed to catTy persons for the purpose
is uninterrupted (for example, pallets, belt). of transportation. For example, step, pallet or belt.
NOTE- Moving wa lks are machines, and even when out of 2.2. 7 Measured Speed - Speed of the escalator or
operation, shall not be cons idered as fixed access as there could
be a safety concern.
moving walk with no load measured at the time of
) testing after the starting sequence has been completed.
) 2.1.25 Newel - End of the baiustrade.
2.2.8 Ride Quality - Sound levels and vibration of
) 2.1.26 Nominal/Rated Speed - Speed in the direction the steps/pallet, re levant to passenger perception,
of the moving steps, pallets or the b elt stated by the associated with escalator or moving walk operation.
)
manufacturer for which the escalator or moving walk
) has been designed, without load on the steps/pallets/ 2.2.9 So und Pressure Level (Lr) - Ten times the
be lt at nominal frequency and nominal voltage. logarithm to the base I 0 of the ratio of the square of
) the sound pressure to the square of the reference sound
2.1.27 Pit - Recess in the floor to receive that portion pressure.
)
of the lower landing and the lower end of the incline
) NOTE - l11e reference sound pressure level is 20 J.!Pa (2 x I0-5 Pa).
section which occurs below the floor line when there is
) no floor under the escalator such as in a basement. 2.2.10 Velocity - Rate of change of displacement.
Velocity is reported as speed and direction of travel. It
) 2.1.28 Rated Load - Load which the equ ipment is
is given in metre per second (nlls).
designed to move.
)
2.2.11 Vibration - Variation with time of the magnitude
2.1.29 Rise (Travel) - Vertical distance between the
) of acceleration. It is expressed in metre per second
upper and lower finished floor levels.
)
square (m/s 2).
2.1.30 Safety Circuit - Part of the electric safety system
) consisting of electrical safety devices. 3 GENERAL
) 2.1.31 Skirting - Vertical part of the ba lustrade 3.1 Conformity with Act and Rules
) interfacing with the steps, pallets or belt. 3.1.1 The installation of escalators and moving walks
) 2.1.32 Skirt Deflector- Device to minim ize the risk has been govemed in states by different Acts and Rules,
of trapping betvveen the step and the skirting. as applicabl e, whi ch are intend ed to ensure safe
) installation and operation of the same.
) 2.2 Terms Related to Performance Requirements of
3. L.2 The installation shall be generally canied out in
Escalators and Moving Walks
conformity with relevant Act and Rules wherever they
2.2.1 Acceleration - Rate of change of velocity. ft is arc in force.
expressed in m/s 2.
)
3.1.3 It is the responsibility of the owner of the premises
2.2.2 Background Noise Corre ction (K 1A) - where the escalators and moving walks will be installed,
) Co rrection term to acco unt for the influence of to obtain necessary permission from the Authority
background noise on the emjssion sound pressure level before and after the erection of escalators and moving
at the specified positions of the machine under test. wa lks and for their subsequent operation.

)
6 NATIONAL BUILDING C ODE OF.lNDIA 2016
)
 3.1.4 A licence for public use is a safety provision issued
by state authorities under applicable Act and Rules,
wherever they are in force.
3.2 Conformity with Indian Electricity Act and
Rules
All electrical work in connection with installation of
escalators and moving wiiks shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of The Indian Electricity
Act, 2003 as amended up-to-date along with the rules
and regulations framed thereunder and shall also
comply with the other provisions of Part 8 'Building
Services, Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations'
of the Code.
3.3 Conformity with Indian Standanls
All materials, fittings, appliances, etc, used in electrical
insta ll ation sha ll confo rm to Indian Standard
specifications, wherever these exist. In case of materials
for which Indian Standard specifications do not exist,
the materials shall be ·approved by the competent
authority.
3.4 Conformity with Fire Regulations
· The installation shall be can·ied out in conformity with
Part 4 'Fire and Life Safety' of the Code and the state
fire acts/local fire regulations, wherever they are in
force.
3.5 Safety Design Considerations and Selection of
Escalator and Moving Walks
The design consideration for type and selection of
escalator and moving walk shall be based on following
criteria:
a) Location - To ensure reliability, it is
important to have design specifications to suit
environmental conditions.
b) Physical requirements-Physical factors like
the vertical and horizontal distance to be
spanned shall be considered. The ability of
the building infrastructure to support the heavy
components is also a critical physical concem.
c) Type of segment and traffic pattems - The
design consideration depends on segment
type. Some typical segments are trans it
systems like metro, airport, shopping malls,
hotels, etc. Traffic patterns sha ll also be
antic ipated in escalator and moving wa lk
design. The can)'ing capacity of an escalator
system shall match the expected peak traffic
demand.
d) Safety considerations - Escalators and
moving walks shall not be subjected to abuse,
misuse and negligence. There are a number
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION Of LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS:
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
of potential hazards, both from escalators and
moving walks themselves and also those )
hazards that users may bring with them, which
include loose clothin g, type of footwear, )
carried goods and trolleys. The severity of )
these hazards may increase when used by
vulnerable groups of people, such as the old, )
very young and those with impaired mobility. )
The proper design risk assessment and control,
)
are all critical to ensure reliability and, above
all safety. )
e) Aesthetic preferences - To be suita bly )
decided between the parties concerned.
)
3.6 1.\'J ·· -ttcnancc )
The considerations relating to maintenance shall be as )
follows:
)
a) The escalator or moving walk installation
)
shou ld receive regular cleaning, lubrication,
)
adjustment and adequate servicing by
authorized competent persons at such intervals )
as the type of equipment and frequency of
service demand. It is desirable and normal for )
the escalator or moving walk supplier to be )
en trusted with the serv icing during the
)
guarantee period of new equipment.
)
b) In order that the escalator or moving walk
installation is maintained at all times in a safe )
cond ition, a proper maintenance schedu le
)
shall be drawn up in consultation with the
manufacturer and rigidly followed . The )
provision of a log book to record all items
)
relating to general servicing and inspection is
recommended. Any accident arising out of )
operat ion or maintenance shall be duly )
reported to the Authority in accordance with
the rules laid down. )
c) Escalators and moving walks are required by )
statutoty regulations to be examined at regular )
intervals as specified by Acts and Rules, by a
competent person. The company entrusted )
with maintenance contract shall ha ve valid )
license to maintain the escalators and moving
)
walks. The persons assigned for maintenance
work shall be appropriately qualified and )
experienced as required by statutory Acts and )
Rules.
)
d) Companies and organizations responsible for
the safe use of escalator and moving walks )
should ensure that their e,m ployee s are )
adequately instructed and informed about the
safe use of the escalator or moving wa lk and )
the hazards arising from their unsafe use and
are familiar with emergency procedures.
7 'I
)
 )
)
e) Proper barricading shall be done to ensure that Based on Fig. I, type and location of building, expected
)
the open pits of escalato r shall be reached/ population, and the serving floo r details are required
) accessed by only the maintenance team. The to work on the preliminaty traffic analysis for escalators
) maintenance seJ,Wi ce provioer sha ll be and moving walks.
t:esponsible for placing of the barri cades and
) For nmma l peak periods, the recommended handling
sigt1ages before start of the maintenance work.
ca pac ities for design pu rposes s hou ld be taken as
)
3.7 Energy Efficiency and Sustainability indicated in Table I. The hand ling capacity of escalato r
) also depends on the angle of inclination, speed, step
The following technologies sha ll be encouraged for widths and the areas at the boarding and alighting levels.
reducing power consumption by us ing energy efficient
) equipment and behavioural changes: Table 1 Expected Pedestrian Flow Rates
) a) As an optio n, escalators/movi ng walk should (Clause 4.2)

) not run w hen there are no passengers to move. Sl Duty Typiclll Usage Typical Locations
In this stop mode, onl y the contro l system and No. Category (Pnssengcrs/ Ony)
) the passenge r detection syste m are kept ( 1) (2) (3) (4)
) running. Another optio n is to reduce the speed i) Light Up to 4 000 Shops, leisure
to match the passenger demand, thus reducing faci lities, multiplexes
) energy consumption by the use of variable ii) Medium Up to 10 000 Department stores,
shopp ing centres,
) voltage variable frequency (VVVF) drives, domestic airports and
w hi c h provide ve r y s mooth, a lmost railway stations
) iii) Heavy Up to 20 000 Rai lway Uunctions),
imperceptible speed transitions.
metro stations,
) b) Energy saving LED lamps for lighting in place airports
) of conventiona l lamps. iv) Intensive Over 20 000 Major railway
Uunctions), metro
c) Improvement in total power factor of the stat ions, international
)
motor drive of an escalator or moving wa lk at airpo11s
) the iso lator connecting equipmen t to the
) building's electrical supply circuit. 4.3 The number of persons that may be theoretica lly
d) Adoption of materials nncl practices that are carried by the escalators and moving wa lks in I h is
)
environmental friendly nnd sustainable shall given in Table 2 and Table 3, respectively.
) be promoted.
) Table 2 Theoretical Capacity for Escalators
4 DESIGN GUIDEUNES FOR ESCALATO RS (Clause 4.3)
) AND MOVING WALKS
Sl Step W idth T heor etical Capacity, in Persons/It
) 4.1 Escalators are desirable where the movement of No. m
people, in large numbers at a contro lled rntc in the For 0.5 m/s For0.65 m/s For 0.75 m/s
) Speed Speed Speed
minimum of space, is involved, for example, railwny
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
) stations, shopping centres/malls, airports, etc. These
encourage people to c ircul ate freely and conveniently. i) 0.6 4500 5 850 6 750
)
ii) 0.8 6 750 8 775 10 125
Inclined moving walks are preferab le where trolley ii i) 1.0 9000 11 700 13 500
)
movement is expected between levels, like dcpa t1ment I
) stores, a irport, etc.
4.4 Though 4.3 indicates the theoretical va lues for

.,I
) Typi cally, hori zontal moving walks are used where escalators (see Table 2) and moving walks (see Table 3),
)
medium to long distance travel is involved such as Tables 4 and 5 indicate the practical values to be
airports/metro stations/exhibition halls. considered wh ile calcu lating the required number of !
) escalators and moving walks (based on traffic flow
4.2 As the esca lators and moving walks operate at a
) pattem).
constant speed, serve only two levels and have a known
) maxim um capacity, the traffic study is rather easy, 5 A RRANGEMENT AND PLANNlNG
prov ided the population to be handled in a gi vcn time DIMENSIONS
)
is known. It is easy to predict the rate at w hich the
) population can be handled. 5.1 Escalators are ty pica lly used for short range of
movement between adjacent floors. They are usu olly
) Figure l shows the brief idea abo ut the steps to be sit·uated in an obv io us c irculatio n path making it easy
) followed for arriving at appropriate escalator and for p_e destrians to board them. Escalators and moving
moving walk solution for pat1icu lar app lication. wa lks shou ld only be acces sed from adjacent
)

) 8 NATIONAL BmLDI NG CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
 -TY PE AND LOCATIO N OF BUILDING
.,__ _- t - FLO OR HEIGHT
-EXPEC TED PO.PULATION

SET THE TARGET PARAMETERS AS PER THIS CODE

A ND THE REL EVANT INDIAN STANDA RD (HANDLING
CAPACITY, REQUIRED LEVEL OF SERVIC E, ETC)

I - INDOOR
~------~ -OUTDOOR
-DUTY TYPE

CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE

ESCALATOR/MOVING WALK TYPE

F IG. 1 TYPICA L FLOWCHART oN P RELIMINARY D ESIGN O F EscALATORs/ Movi NG W ALKS

Table 3 Tllcoretical Capacity for Moving Walks

(Clause 4.3)

SJ Step Theoreti cal Capacity, in Pc r sons/h

No. Width
Horizontal Moving Wa lk (0° Inclination) Inclined Moving Walk (For 0 .5 mls S peed)

For 0.5 m/s For 0.65 m/s For 0.75 m/s For 6° For I0° For 12°
Ill Speed Speed Speed Inclination Inc lination Incli nati on

( I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) . (7) (8)

i) 0.8 . 3 000 3 700 4 400 3 000 3 700 3 000
ii) 1.0 3 800 4 600 5 400 3 700 3 700
iii) 1.4 5 100 6 400 7 700 5 100

PART 8 BU ILDING SERVICES- SEC T ION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVI NG WALKS :
5B ESCALATO RS AND i\ 'IOVING WALKS

) I
 Table 4 P ractical Capacity fo r Escalators Some moving walks are adopted to receive and lock
) (Clause 4.4) on shopping/baggage trolleys. In these cases the
) unrestricted area at the landing should be increased to
Sl Step Practical Capacity, in Persons/h
at least 5 111 and number of flat/horizontal steps at the
No. W idth
) boarding and alighting points increased. The most
m For For For
) 0.5 m/s 0.65 m/s 0.75 m/s significant effect is the increased footprint required for
Speed Speed Speed
the equi pment. Shopping/baggage trolleys are not
) ( I) (2) (3) (4) (5)
permitted on escalator. ·
) i) 0.6 2 250 2 925 3 375
ii) 0.8 3 375 4 388 5 063 In order to encourage pedestrian confidence and to assist
) iii) 1.0 4 500 5 850 6 750 efficient and safe boarding/ alighting of escalators, the
) start and end of escalator should present a number of
corridors/walkways, landing and lobby areas, where
horizontal/flat steps. At least two flat steps are provided
) peop le do not obstruct other pedestrian c irculation
for escalators speeds up to 0.5 m/s; at least three flat
routes. Space shou ld be available to accommodate
) steps for speeds above 0.5 m/s and up to 0.65 m/s for
queuing at the boarding point.
escalator having rise more than 6 m; and at least four
It is especially important that the boarding and alighting flat steps for speeds above 0.65 m/s. In locations where
areas adjacent to an escalator or moving walk are not it is anticipated that escalators may be used by persons
part of another circu lation route, in order to provide a with impaired mobility or heavy passenger traffic,
sate area for passengers to board and alight at landings. additional flat steps should be considered.
The area of tlus space is defined as a distance between 2.5m
) the handrails plus 160 mm, multiplied by a depth of
2.0 m to 2.5 m, depending on the configuration of
) escalator or moving walk.
)_ WI OF
Figure 2 illustrates the above clause with option I being
HANDRAILS
) a 2.5 m landing depth and option 2 being 2.0 m landing
+ 0.16 m
) depth. Where successive units are install ed, each
successive escalator or moving wa lk shou ld have its
)
)
own individual unrestricted area.
Escalators occupy more space than stairs in order to
accommodate their inclination. There are few standard
Option 1
'
I
)
escalator arrangements as shown in Fig. 3. Type (a)
) and Type (b) provide efficient circulation by providing
) the shortest transition path and time from one escalator TWICE WIDTH OF
and the next. Type (b) requires larger structural opening HANDRAILS
) + 0.16 m
than Type (a) and Type (c) and present users with a
) higher ri sk of falling into the void. Type (c) is typical
) of a store as it allows the store to lengthen the circulation
route past goods for sale. This configuration also takes
) up free space. Option 2

) F1a. 2 UNRESTRICTED FREE SPACE

)
)
Table 5 Practical Capacities for Moving Walks
) (Clause 4.4)
)
Sl Step Practica l C apac ity, in Pe rsons/h
) No. W idth
Horizontal Moving Walk (0° Inc lination) Incl ined Moving Wa lk (For 0.5 m/s Speed)
)

) For 0 .5 m/s For 0.65 m/s Fo r 0.75 m/s For 6° For I 0° For 12°
111 Speed Speed Speed Inc lination Inclination Incli nation
)
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
) i) 0.8 2 880 3 648 4 320 2 880 2 800 2 800
ii) 1.0 3 600 4 560 5 350 3 600 3 600
) iii) 1.4 5 040 6 350 7 560 5 040
)
10 NATIONAL BUILD ING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
 ")
')
')

-
AI
P·
Down
)

c I
-- Down
)
)
c I Up
I} )

AI - Up
I )
)
)

3A PARALLEL )
)
AI
-
- P·
Down )
)
c I Down

a·( -
)
I Up A' )

I Up
- c'
)
)
)
38 CR ISS-CROSS )

(I
-
-
--- - ~ Down
)
)
)
)

··d -- - -- - 1)- Up
)
)
)
)
3C WALK AROUND
)
FIG. 3 E SCALATOR CONFIGURATION )
)
5.2 E ns urin g Accessibility for All Use1·s For important reasons of safety, special warning notices
and tactile warning indicators sha ll be provided at the )
5.2.1 The accessibility requirements given in Part 3
top and bottom o f escalators. Escalat( rs shall not be )
' Development Contro l Rules and General Building
cons idered as the access ible rout e. Pe rsons w ith
Requirements' of the Code shall be complied wit h. )
locomotor disab il ity cannot use them. Hence a lift
5.2.2 The location of escalators and moving walks
should be considered in relation to the pos ition of
should also be installed as an alternative accessible
route. )
) ~
'
adjacent fi re protected li ft shafts and lobbies, staircases
For movi ng wal ks, the maximum inclination sho uld be )
and the ir associated areas of rescue assistance, as at
up to 6° fo r use by people w ith disabi lities. People with
the time of an emergency these become non- functi ona l. )
d isability may find it difficult to usc moving walks.
A surface of the esca lator and moving wa lks should
Hence, alternative like an accessible battery cart, may )
contrast visually with the approach and there should
be provided to them in appropriate cases. Moving walks
be audi b le s ig nals o r pre- recoi·ded messages that )
shall be free of projecting 9bjects and obstac les up to a
indicate the start and fini sh o f the escalator to help
height of2 I 00 mm. A mi nimum level of illuminatio n )
visually impaired people.
of I 00 lux sha ll be provided on moving walks.
)
)
PART 8 BUlLDING SERVI CES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOV ING WALKS: 11
58 ESCALATORS AND MOV ING WALKS ) 1::
) ~
)
-
)
6 SPACE REQUIREMENT escalators or moving walks, a vertical deflector of not
) less than 0.30 m in height, not presenting any sharp
6.1 Free Space for Users cutting edges, shall be placed above the handrail level
)
6.1.1 T he clear height above the steps of the escalator and extend at least 25 mm below the lower edge of the
) handrail, for example, as an imperforate triangle (see
or pallets or belt of the moving walk at a ll points shall
be not less than 2.30 m (see X4 in Fig. 4 and Fig. 6). X5 in Fig. 6 and Fig. 8).
The clear height shall extend to the end of the newel.
It is not necessary to comply with these requirements
)
NOTE- T he clear height of2.30 m should also be applied to when the distance Y9 between the outer edge of the
the unrestricted area. handrail and any obstacle is equal to or greater than
) 400 mm (see Fig. 4).
6.1.2 To prevent collision, a minimum free area around
) the escalator or moving walk is defined as per Fig. 4. 6.1.5 At the cxit(s) of each indi vidual escalator or
The height Xl2, measured from the steps of the escalator moving walk a sufficient unrestricted area shall be
)
or the pallets or the belt of the moving walk shall be at available to acconunodate persons. The w idth of the
least 2. 10 m (see Xl2 in Fig. 4). The distance between unrestricted area shal l at least correspond to the distance
the outer edge oft he handrai I and walls or other obstacles between the outer edges of the handrai ls plus 80 mm
(see Y I 0 in Fig. 4) shall under no circumstances be less on each s ide. The depth sha ll be at least 2.50 m
)
than 80 nun horizontally and 25 mm vertically below measured from the end of the balustrade (see Option I
) the lower edge of the handrail (see Y 12 in Fig. 7). The in Fig. 2). It shall be petmissible to reduce it to 2.00 m
area is permitted to be smaller, if by appropriate if the w id th of the unrestricted area is increased to at
)
measures, the risk of injury is minimi zed. least double the distance between the outer edges of
)
6.1.3 For escalators arranged adjacent to one another the handrai ls plus 80 mm on each side (see Option 2 in
) either para llel or criss-cross, the distance between the Fig. 2).
) handrails shall be not less than 160 mm (see Yll in For succeeding escalators and moving walks the depth
Fig. 4). of an unrestricted area shall be determined in each
)
6.1.4 Whe re bui lding obstacles ca n cause injuries, individual case depending on, for example, type of use
) (persons only or persons with transport devices, number
appropriate preventive measures shall be taken.
) ofintennediate exits, relative orientation and theoretical
ln particular, at floor intersections and on criss-cross
capacity).
)

) rl---------
)
) ~ Y9
) Y11

)
I I N

)
) I
)
)
)

Key
1 Obstacle (for example, Column)

Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause

Y9 ::_ 400 mm 6.1.4 X4 ::_ 2 300 mm 6.1.1

Y10 ::_ 80 mm 6.1.2 X'l 2::_2 100mm 6.1.2

Y11 ::_ 160 mm 6.1.3

FIG. 4 CLEARANCE BETWEEN BurLDING STRUCTURE AND EscALATOR/ MoviNG WALK

)
12 NATIONAL BUILDING C ODE OF INDIA 2016
)
 I
)

Where the exit of the escalator or moving walk is 6.1.9 It is permissible to arrange the lighting in the
blocked by struchtral measures (for example, shutters, surrounding space and/or at the installation itself. The
fi re protection gates) an additional stop switch for intensity of illumination at the landings including the
emergency si tuations at handrail 'level (taking into combs shall be related to the intensity of illumination
account 6.1.2) sha ll be provided with a distance of the general lighting in the area. The intensity of
bet\vcen 2.0 m and 3.0 m before the step/pallet/belt illumination shall be not less than 50 lux at the comb
reaches the comb intersection line. This stop switch intersection line measured at floor level. )
shal l be reachable from inside the escalator/moving )
walk. - 6.2 Machinery Spaces Outside the Truss
)
6.1.6 In the case of successive escalators and moving The following shall be ensured:
)
walks without intermediate exits, they shall have the a) A safe access for persons to machinery spaces
same capacity. )
shall be provided.
6.1.7 Where it is possible for people to come into b) Machine1y spaces shall be lockable and only )
contact with the outer edge of a handrail at a landing accessible to authorized persons. )
and can be drawn into a hazardous sihtation, such as c) Machi nery spaces shal l be provided with )
toppling over a balustrade, appropriate preventative permanently installed electric Iighting on the
measures shall be taken (for example, see Fig. 5). following basis: )
Some examples arc: l) Minimum of 200 lux at floor level in }
working areas; and
a) Prevention of entry into the space by the )
2) Minimum of 50 lux at floor level in access
placement of permanent barri ers. )
routes leading to these working areas.
b) Increas ing the height of the building structure d) Emergency lighting shall be installed to allow )
of the fixed balustrade in the hazard area by the safe evacuation of al l personnel working )
at least 100 mm above the handrail level and in any machinery space.
posit ioned between 80 mm and 120 mm from NOTE - Emergency lighting is not intended for
)
the outer edge of the handrail conti nuation of maintenance or other activities. )
6.1.8 The surrounding space of the escalator or moving e) The di mensions of machinery spaces shall be
)
walk shall be illuminated, especially in the vicinity of sufficient to permit easy and safe working on
the combs. equipment, especially the electrica l )
equipment. In particular these shall be )
NOTE - Information should be exchanged between the
manufacturer and the customer.
provided at least a clear height of 2.00 m at
)
)
)
80 to 120 80 to 120
)
c c )
.E 0
0
0
0 .E
...... ......
0 0
0 )
0
0
..... ..... 0
......
...... 1.{) 1.{)
N N )
- ,...- 1-- )
1- r-
)
120 max. 2oim< x.

E----~ir
I lb )
I
I
----- I
. ===~
L _ _ _ __ _
)
I
I
)

I
) I

)
)
)
All dimensions in millimetrcs.
FIG. 5 EXAM PLE OF B ARRIERS AT LANDINGS )
.,
PART 8llUI LDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 13
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS ) ,

)
' ).
.)
)
I
r,
)

)
)

)
)
T1
)

)
DETAIL AT A
)
)
Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause
)
X4 ~2.3 0 m 6.1.1
) X5~ 0.30 m 6. 1.4
o: = Angle of inclination

)
FIG . 6 E scA L ATOR ( ELEVATION), P RrNCI PA L D IMENSIONS
)
working areas, and a clear horizontal area in
)
front of the control panels and the cabinet~ .
This area is defined as fo llows:
1) Depth, measured : A t least 0.70 m;
from the external
)
surface of the
) enc losures
) 2) Width, the greater of : 0. 50 m or the fu ll
) the following va lues width of the
cabinet or panel.
)
A clear horizontal area of at least 0. 50 m x
) 0.60 m for maintenance and inspecti on of
) moving patts at points where this is necessary.
) f) The c lear height for movement sha ll not be
) less than 1.80 m. The access ways to the clear
spaces shall have a width of at least 0.50 m.
) Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause This value may be red uced to 0 .40 m where
) Y 1 2 ~25 m m 6.1.2 there are no mo ving parts . This 'full he ight for
mo vement is taken to the underside of the
) FJG . 7 HANDRAIL - S ECTION AL VIEW structural roofbeams and measured from both,
)
14 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6
)

)
 .. y
)

)
')
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
Key Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause
1 Anti-climbing device (see 6.3)
)
Y13, Y14 , Y15, Y16 6.3
2 Access restriction device (see 6.3) )
Y17::, 100 mm 6.3
3 Anti-slide device (see 6.3) )
4 Vertical deflector (see 6.1.4) xs::, 0.30 m 6.1.4
)
X9 =(1 000 ±50) mm 6.3
X10 =25 mm to150 mm 6.3
X11 ::, 20 mm

L5::, 1 000 mm
6.3
6.3
)
)
I
FIG. 8 ANTI-MISUSE DEVICES

I) the floor of the access area; and
2) the floor of the worki ng area.
g) In machinery spaces the clear height shall
under no circumstances be less than 2.0 m.
h)
escalator or moving walk. The dimensions of balustrade
shall be as fo llows. ) I
In the inclined section the ve1tical height Xl from step )
nose or pallet surface or belt surface to top of the

j)
3 pin plug with socket for the maintenance
propose.
Machinery spaces shall not accommodate
handrai l shall be not less than 0.90 m and not exceed
1.10 m (see Fig. 9).
The balustrades shall have no parts on which a person
:I.
)
equ ipment not re lated to the esca lato r or will normally stand.
moving walk. >.I
6.3 Balustrade
Appropriate measures shal l be taken to discourage )lI'
people from climbing on the outsides of the balustrade
if there is a danger of people fa lling from them.
) ·1 :
Balustrades shall be instal led on each side of the
) ·I

PART 8 BU ILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 iNSTALLATION Of LifTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 15 )
SB ESCALATORS AN D MOVING WALKS
)
) I
 l
)

)
)
To ensure this, on escalators and moving walks, devices The above mentioned also app lies to adj acent
') (see l in Fig. 8) shall be provided on the lower outer escalators/inclined moving walks when the distance
) decking at a point I 000 ±50 mm above the floor level Y I 6 between the centrelines of the handrails is greater
(see X9 in Fig. 8) w here the bottom of ·the device than 400 mm.
) intersects with the balustrade decking and shall extend
) to a length L5 of at least 1 000 mm parallel with the 6.4 Installation
balustrade decking where no stepping is possible. The The following needs to be planned and carried out on
)
device shall extend to at least a height in line with the site to ensure easy installation of escalators and moving
) top of the handrail not conflicting with the requirements walks.
) of Y I0 and Y 12 (see Fig. 4 and Fig. 7).
6.4.1 Insta/fatiol7 Timing
) Where escalators or mov ing walks are located adjacent
to walls, devices (see 2 in Fig. 8) to restrict access to To prevent damage to the esca lator during the
) construct ion phase, the timing of installation and
the ba lustrade decking shal l be provided at the top and
) bottom ends of these wa lls when the lower outer assembly should be as close as possible to the opening
decking width Y I 3 exceeds I 25 mm. On adjacent date. lt should, however, proceed completion of the
) floor so as to dispense with the need to take further
parallel arrangements, this protection shall be provided
) when the comb ined balus trade decking width Y 14 measures to protect floor coverings. Ensure that the
exceeds 125 mm. The device shall extend to the height prov isiona l floors along the transpo rt route in the
)
X IO (see Fig. 8). building can comfortably cope with the load weight.
)
All exposed fastener heads for the devices should be 6.4.2 Transport to the Assembly Site
)
of the vandal resistant type. A suitable unloading area shall be available in front of
) the building. The access routes to the building shall be
Where handrail level balustrade decking are provided
) between escalators/inclined moving walks and adjacent level and negotiable by heavy duty rollers. Along the
walls, anti-slide de vices (see 3 in Fig. 8) shall be entire transport route to the assembly site, ' the free
)
provided on the balustrade decking when the distance height shall not be less than the minimum specified in
) Y 15 between the structure of the building (wall) and the manufacturer plan (also goes for pipes and other
) the centre! ine of the handrail is greater than 300 mm. attachments fitted by others to the ceiling structure).
These devices shall consist of objects fastened to the 6.4.3 Access Openings, Transport Route and Load
) balustrade decking, no closer than 100 mm to the Capacity
) handrail (see Y 17) and spaced no greater than I 800 mm
apart. The height X II s hall be not less than 20 mm. Normally, escalators are moved in through openings at
) the side of the building at ground level. Optionally,
The devices shall have no sharp corners or edges (see
) Fig. 8). suitable roof openings should be provided, in order to
)

)
)
)
)
)

)
)
Principal Dimensions Ref to Clause
)
0.9 m :::X1 ::: 1.10 m 6.3
)
) fiG. 9 ESCALATOR (ELEVATION), P RINCIPAL DIM ENSIONS

)
16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
)
 ) f

l
bring the escalators by crane. It is important that the p
route to the assembly locat ion within the bui ldi ng is ')
free of obstacles and level, and the ceiling can support )
a load. Otherwise the appropriate weight distribution
shall be catered to. )
Q
6.4.4 Special Delive1y
Some escalators are so long that they have to be
installed in sections. In this case, the escalator may have J
r
to be manufactured in split form and assembled on site.
)
j
6.4.5 Ceiling Openings f
R
Manufact11rer should noti fy the location and size of the
f:
required ceiling openi ngs on the installation drawing. NOTE- P, Q, R = Based on Manufacturing Drawing ~
Builder shall supervise the precise implementation of f
these.
FlU. 10 TO!' AND BOTTOM SUPPORTS i,.
the centre o f the supporting points. For systems with II
6.4.6 Top and Bottom Supports several supporting structures, plan for additional pi ck- !
While designing the support recess, the support loads up points above the intermediate supports. All pick-up )
shall be ta ken into accou nt. They are shown on the points shall be capable of taking a load strain (see
Fig. 12). J:
installatio n drawing given by the manufactu rer. At those I•
locations where the supports of escalator (or moving 6.4.8. l Installation with a frame l,
walk) will be placed, the support shal l be able to bear r"
the weight of the escalator including traffic load. When If no assembly holes can be provided, the escalators I
I

preparing the supporting structures the measurements and moving walks should be lifted to their final location ) I
'
indica ted on manufacturer's installation plans shall be by means of especially sturdy girder construction. In ) I
precisely adhered to (see Fig. I0). this case, ceiling load strain shall bear the capac ity as
per the manufacturer's instructi on. )
6.4.7 Interm ediate Supports )
6.4.8.2 Installation with li}iing gear
\n tem1ediate supports are needed on escalators with a
considerable travel height and on long moving walks. Holes with a I 00 mm diameter are to be made through
The manufacturer shall infom1 the bu ilder about the the ceiling, according to manufacturer instmctions. )
installation plan of the location of the intermediate These are used by insta llation team for fixi ng the Iifling )
supports and load to include the additional required gear. In this way escalator or moving walk is si mply
space in construction plan (see Fig. I I). lifted upwards from floor to floor. The load strain of
every pick-up point shall be mai ntained as per the )
6.4.8 Hoisting Arrangement manufacturer instruction.
) I
It has to be ensured that pick-up points for hoisting 6.4.8.3 Installation with crane assembly
and supporting the escalator shall be fitted securely )
during assembly. These should be located exactly above Where a suitable roof opening is available or the site is '1I
)
located outdoor li ft the escalator or moving ·wa lk by
)
)
)
)
)
)
I~ITERMED!'.TE SUPPORT
)
)
)
)

FIG . II I NT ERM EDIATE SU PPORTS

) I
) I

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LI FTS, ESC ALATORS Ai':D MOVING WALKS: t7
)
SB ESCA LATORS AND MOVI:'-/G WALKS
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
2 NUTS WITH WASHERS

.
2 DRILL HOLES IN
THE CONCRETE
STABLE CO~!;B_E'!5. I
~
·· . /~ STEEL TUBE
l
)
_j--r/ " WOODEN BEAM
100X 100 mm
)

)
)
)

FIG. 12 PICK-UP POINTS

)
) crane and place it on the supports provided. The builder escalator handrail from railing has to be at least 80 mm . .
is responsible for ensuring for all local authori ty For adjacent escalators, the distance between the edges
)
approvals. of the handrails shall be at least 160 mm (see Y 11
) in Fig. 4).
6.4.8.4 Permanent hoisting hooks shall be provided by
) the builder in the top slab fo r hoisti ng the escalator as 6.5 E lectrical Req uirement
)
per the load requirement.
6.5.1 The electrical installations shall be in acco rdance
) 6.4.9 Sprinkler Piping with Part 8 'Building Services, Section 2 Electrical and
) An optional safety feature is the installation of a Allied Installations' of the Code and good practices
sprinkler piping within the escalator or moving walk [8-SB( l )].
)
(see Fig. 13). 6.5.2 Power Supply
)
) Power supply cable with 3 phase 415 _+1~~::::, V and

) earthing to be laid up to escalator control panel and a

s in gle phase 230 V supply for lighting may be
) necessary, and shall be provided by the concerned party.
) 6.5.3 Protection
)
Suitable over load and short circuit protection and earth
leakage protection needs to be provided in ensuring
protection to the power system.
)

>. 7 FIRE PROTECTION

) Fi re protection and building requirement differ with
F IG. 13 SPR INKLER PIPING the application/ use of building. For specific
)
requirements for fire protection, Part 4 ' Fire and Life
) 6.4.10 Oil Separator Sa fety' of the Code shall be referred. Tt is recommended
) !'hat escalato rs and moving walks are made of non-
A type-proofed oil separator is essential for escalators
combustib le material that do not create additional
) and moving walks which are exposed to the weather.
hazard in case of fire.
At the construction site, a recess sha ll be provided for
)
the oil separator in the escalato r pit. To limit the danger caused by overh.eating, VGntilation ·
} for the spaces that contain the motors and gears shall
6.4.11 Railings
)
be provided. Extinguishi ng systems can be installed in
In the threshold areas of the escalators, railings have these areas. In case sprinklers are used, their integration
) to be insta lled by the builder. The distance to the and fixation into the escalator and moving walk sha ll
)

) 18 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6

)
1 --------------------..~· )
•
be done by taking into consideration the special needs 8.3 Step, PaiJet or Belt )
of the machine.
For escalators and moving walks, the nominal width
Accumulation of materials (such. as grease, oil, dust, shall be not less than 0.58 m and not exceed l.l 0 m.
paper) represent a fire risk. Therefore it should be For moving walks with an angle of inclination up to 6°,
possib le to clean the underside enclosure. If s uch widths up to 1.65 m are permitted.
cleaning is not possible, other precautions (such as )
8.3.1 Step Treads and Pallets
installation of sprinkler system) shall be provided to
avoid the fire hazard. It is recommended that as far as The step depth in the di rection of travel sha ll not be
possible, escalators and moving walks are not used in less than 0.38 m. The step he ight s hall not exceed
case of emergency situations. 0.24 m. The surface of the step treads shall have grooves
in the direction of the movement, with which the teeth
8 MINIMUM TECHNICAL AND SAFETY of the combs mesh. They shall be sensibly horizontal
REQUIREMENTS in the usable area of the escalator. The step risers shall
8.1 General be cleated and the surface of the cleat shall be smooth. )
The ends of the step tread shall mesh with the cleating
The safety requirements of escalators and moving walks of the next step riser.
shall comply with good practice in accordance with
The width of the grooves shall be at least 5 mm and ~
thi s Subsection. Certain esca lators and moving walks
are subject to special operationa l and environmental shall not exceed 7 mm. The depth of the grooves shall )
conditions. not be less than 10 mm. The web w idth sha ll be at least )
2.5 mm but not exceed 5 mm.
8.2 Supporting Structures (Truss) and E nclosure )
8.3.2 Belts
The truss shall be designed to safely sustain steps and )
The belts shall have grooves in the direction of travel
running gear in its guides. All mechanically moving pm1s )
with which the teeth of the comb mesh. The width of
of the escalator or moving walk shall be completely
the grooves shall be at least 4.5 mm and shall not exceed )
enclosed within imperforate panels or walls. Exceptions
7 mm. The depth of grooves shal l not be less than 5 mm.
are the accessible s teps, the accessible pallets, the )
The web width shall be at least 4.5 mm but not exceed
accessible belt and that part of the handrail available for
8 mm. Splicing of tread way belt shall be such as to )
the user. Apertures for ventil ation are permitted.
provide continuous unbroken tread way surface. )
However, it shall not be possible to pass a straight rigid
rod I 0 mm in diameter through the enclosure and to touch 8.4 Driving Machine and Brake )
any moving part tlu·ough a ventilation apet1ure.
8.4.1 A driving machi ne shall not drive more than one )
The supporting structure shall be designed in a way escalator or moving walk. )
that it can support the dead weight of the escalator or
moving walk plus a rated load of 5 000 N/m2. Based 8.4.2 The speed of an unloaded escalator shall not )
on the rated load, the maximum calculated or measured deviate by more than ± 5 percent from nom inal speed
at nominal frequency and nominal voltage. The nominal )
deflect ion sha ll not exceed 1/750 of the distance
between the supports. Angle of inclination of an speed oftbe escalator shall not exceed 0.75 m/s for an )
escalator from the horizontal shall not exceed 30°, but angle of in clination up to 30° and 0.5 m/s for an )
for rises not exceeding 6 m and nom inal speed not escalator with an angle of inclination of more than 30°
exceeding 0.5 m/s the angle of inclination is permitted but within 35°. The nominal speed of moving walk shall )
to be increased to 35°. not exceed 0.75 m/s . )
Deviating from the above nominal speed up to 0.90 m/s )
Rise S/Jeed Angle oflnclination
is permitted provided the width of the pallets or the
111 m/s )
belt does not exceed 1.10 m and at the land ings, the
Standard Option pallets or the belt move horizontally for a length of at )
least 1.60 m before entering the combs. )
~6 ~ 0.5 30° 35°
~ 6 > 0.5 30° 8.4.3 The driving machine sha ll be connected to main )
>6 ~ 0.5 300 drive shaft, preferably by non- friction driving elements
>6 > 0.5 30° such as by gear wheels, shaft, coupling, multiplex chain, )
two or more single chains. Where friction elements are )
The angle of inclination of mov ing walks shall not used such as trapezo idal belts (fla t belts arc not
)
exceed 12°. permitted) an auxiliary brake shall be used.
)
Safety fac tors of all dri ving elements shall be at least
)
PAin 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECT ION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND i\IOV ING WALKS: 19
)
SB ESCALATORS A~D i\ IOV ING WALKS
)
(")
)
) 5 for static calculations. In the case of trapezoidal belts, 8.6 Belt Drive
,
) at least 3 belts shall be applied.
The belt shall be dri ven by drums and be tensioned
) 8.4.4 Braking System continuously and automatically. Springs working in
tension are not permitted for the tensioning device.
) Escalators and moving walks shall have an operational
When weights are used for tensioning they shall be
) braking system by means of which they can be brought
safely retained should their suspension break. The
to rest with a uniform deceleration and maintained
) factor of safety of the belt including splicing shall be
stationary; there shall be no intentional delay in the
at least 5 for the dynamic forces.
) application of the braking system. If the control system
starts a braking sequence immediately to bring the 8.7 Balustrade
)
escalators/moving walk to a stop, this is not considered
) as an intentional delay. A device shall be provided to 8.7.1 Balustrades shall be installed to comply with the
monitor the lifting of the braking system after starting requirements of6.3.
the escalator/moving wa lk. 8.7.2 The horizontal distance (measured at light angles
Operational braking shall be effected by an electro- to the direction of travel) between the interior panel at
mechanical brake or by other means. Where no electro- lower points shall be equal to or less than the horizontal
) mechanical operational brake is used, an auxiliary brake distance measured at points higher up.
shall be provided. 8.7.3 The parts of the ba lustrade facing the steps shall
)
8.4.4.1 Auxiliwy brake be smooth. Covers or strips not in the direction of travel
) shall not project more than 3 mm . T hey shall be
) Escalators and inclined moving walks shall be equipped sufficiently rigid and have rounded or bevelled edges.
with auxiliary brake(s) if: Cover or strips of such nature are not petmi tted at the
)
a) the connection between the operational brake skirting. Cover joints in the direction of travel (in
and the dri ving sprockets of the steps/pallets particular between the skirting and balustrade interior
) or the drum of the belt is not accomplished by panelling) shall be arranged and fo rmed in such a
shafts, gear wheels, multiplex chains, or more manner to eliminate the ri sk of injury caused by
) trapping.
than one single chain;
) b) the operati o nal bra ke is no t an elec tro- Gap between interior panels of the balustrade shall not
) mechanical brake; be wider than 4 nun. The edges shall be rounded off or
c) the rise exceeds 6 m; or bevelled. The ba lustrade interior panelling sha ll have
) adequate mechanical strength and rigidity. When a force
d) escalators or mov ing wa lks are part of a public
transport/service system. of 500 N is applied at any point of the panell ing at
)
right angles on an area of2 500 mm 2 , there shall be no
The connection between the auxiliary brake and the gap greater than 4 mm and no permanent deformation
) driving sprockets of the steps/pallets or the drum of (setting tolerance however, are permitted).
the belt shall be accomplished by shafts, gear wheels,
) If glass is used fo r the interior panel it sha ll be
multipl ex chains or more than one single chai n. It is
) not permissible for the connection to comprise friction toughened glass. [n case of spli nter free one layer safety
dri ves, that is, clutches. (tempered) glass, the minimum thickness shall be 6 mm.
)
When multi-layer glass balustrades are used, they shall
) 8.5 Steps and Pallets Drive be laminated toughened glass, the thickness of at least
one layer shall also be not less than 6 111111.
The steps of esca lators shall be dri ven by at least two
} chains of which at least one shall be located on each 8.8 Skirting
side of the step. The pallets of moving walks may be
) permitted to be driven by only one chain , if the parallel The ski rting shall be vertical, plain and sufficiently
) movement of the pallets in the usable area is ensured rigid. Where the skirting of escalators or moving walks
by other mechanical measures. is placed bes ide the steps and pall ets or the belt the
) horizontal clearance shall not exceed 4 111111 at either
The step chain design shall be of nominally infinite side, or 7 mm for the sum of clearances measured at
)
fatigue life. both sides at two directly opposite points.
)
The safety factor against breaking of each chain shall Where the skirting of111oving walks finishes above the
) be at least 5. When more than one cha in is used it is pallets or the belt, the clearance shall not exceed 4 mm
) assumed that the load is equall y distributed over the measured vertically from the tread surface. Motion of
chains. the pallets or the belt in lateral direction shall not cause
)
)
20 NATIONA L llU ILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
 )
)
a gap between the sides of the pallets or the belt and At nominal speeds above 0.65 tn/s this length shall be
the vertical projection of the skirting at least 1.60 m measured from point Tl (see Fig. 6 and '>
detail A). )
8.8. 1 Requirements for Skirt DeJlectors
A vertica l difference in level between two consecutive }
The deflectors shall be designed with rounded edges.
steps of 4 mm is permitted. )
Fastening heads and joint connections shall not extend
into the path of travel. They shall consist of a rigid and 8.10.1.2 For escalators, the radius of curvature in the )
a flex ible part (for example, brushes and rubber upper transition from incline to horizontal shall be,
)
profiles). They shall have a minimtim projection of
a) at least 1.00 m for nominal speeds v S 0.5 m/s )
.33 mm and a maximum of 50 mm from the vertical
(inclination of maximum 35°);
face of the skitt panels. The terminal end piece shall )
be tapered to give a flush interface with the skirting. b) at least 1.50 m for no mi nal speeds
The terminal end piece of any deflector device shall 0.5 m/ s < v S 0.65 m/s (in c li nation of )
end not less than 50 111111 and maximum 150 111m prior maximum 30°); and )
to the comb inte rsection line. c) at least 2.60 m for nominal speeds
)
v > 0.65 m/s (incl ination of maximum 30°).
8.9 Handrails )
The radius of curvature in the lower transition from
Each balustrade shall be provided wi th a hand rail incl ine to horizontal of the escalator shall be: )
moving, on the top of each bal ustrade, in the same
l) a t leas t 1.00 m fo r nomi nal spee ds )
direction and at the same speed, within tolerance of
v S 0.65 tn/s; and )
+~ percent, as the steps, pallets or belt. Each moving 2) at least 2 .00 m for nomina l speeds
)
handrail shall extend at normal handrail he ight not less v > 0.65 m/s.
than 300 mm beyond the line of point of comb plate )
8.10.1.3 For belt moving: walks, the radi us of curvature
teeth at the upper and lower landi ngs. Hand or finger )
in the transition from incline to horizontal shall be at
guards shall be provided at the points where handrai ls
least 0.40 m. )
enter the balustrade.
For pallet moving walks, it is not necessary to dete1111ine )
The width of handrail shall be between 70 111111 and
the radius of curvat ure because, on account of the
I 00 mm. The distance between the handrail and the edge )
max imu m pe rmiss ible di stance between two
of the balustrade shall not exceed 50 mm. The handrail
consecutive pallets, it will always be suffic iently large. )
shall be a minimum of 80 mm horizontally and 25 mm
vertically away from adjacent stu-faces (see Fig. 5). The 8.10.1.4 At the upper landings of moving wa lks with )
distance between centreline ofhandrai ls shall not exceed an inc lination of more than 6°, the pallets or belt sha ll )
the di stance between the ski11ing by more than 0.45 m. move for a length of at least 0.40 m at a maximum
The handrail shall be guided and tensioned in such a angle of 6° before entering or a rter leaving the comb. )
way that it does not leave its guides during nonnaluse. )
8.11 Comb Plates
8.10 Landing )
There shall be a comb plate at the entrance and at the
The landing area (that is, comb plate and floor plate) exit of every escalator. The comb plate teeth shall be )
of escalator shall have a surface that provides a secure meshed with and set into the tread surface so that the )
foot hold (combs are exempted from thi s) for a points of the teeth are always below the upper surface
mi nimum distance of 0.85 m measured from the root of the treads. The comb plates shal l be adjustable. )
of the comb teeth. Combs shall be easily replaceable. )
8.1 0. 1 Co1~jiguration of Steps, Pallets and Belts 8.12 Speed Governor )
8.1 0.1.1 At the upper and lower landing, the steps of )
8.1 2.1 Where speed control devices are used for this
the esca lator shall be guided in such a way that the purpose, they shall have switched off the escalator )
front edges of the steps leav ing the comb and the rear before the speed exceeds 1.2 times the nominal speed.
edges of the steps entering the comb are moving )
Th is requirement may not be applied if the design
horizontally for a length of at least 0. 80 m measured prevents the excess ive speed.
from point T I (see Fig. 6 and detail A) .
8.12.2 Escalators and inclined (a 2: 6°) moving walks
At nom inal speeds above 0.50 m/s and not more than s hal l be equipped in such a way that they stop
0.65 m/s or rises above 6 m, this length shall be at least automatica lly by the time the steps and pallets or the
1.2 0 111 , measured from point T I (see Fig. 6 and belt change from the pre-set direct ion of travel.
detai l A).

PART 813U lLDING SERVI CES - SECTION 5 J:-;STA LLATI ON OF LI FTS, ESCALATORS AND ~ lO V I NG WALI<S: 21
513 ESCA L ATORS AND i\IOVJNG WALI<S )
 )
)

)
8.12.3 For operation and safety devices, electrical work,
) The minimum diameter of the signs shall be
precautions and tests, reference may be made to good
80 m m.
) practice [8-58(2)].
) 8.13 Inspection Control
)
Escalators o r moving wa lks shall be equipped with
) inspectio n contro ls· to permit operation d u ring
maintenance or repair or inspecti o n b y means of
> portable and manually operated control devices. At least
) one portable control device shall be provided for each
escalator or moving walk.
)
) For this purpose, one inspection outlet for the
connection of flexib le cable of the portable manua lly
) operated control dev ice shall be prov ided at least at
) each land ing , for example, in the driving station and F 1G. 14 MANDATORY AcTION S IGN
th e return station in the truss. The length of the cable 'SMALL CHILDREN SHALL BE HELD FIRMLY'
) shall be at least 3.00 m. Inspection outlets shall be
) located in such a way that any point of the esca lator or
mov ing wa lk can be reached with the cable.
)

) 8.14 Information for Use

) 8.14. 1 General

) All escalators and mov ing walks arc requi red to be

provided with documentation that sha ll ·include an
) ins truction handbook re lating to use, ma inte nance,
) ins pection , periodic checks and rescue operations.
Info rmation fo r use s hal l cover, se p a rate ly or in
)
combina tion, transport, assembly and installation, F IG. 15 MANDATORY A CTION SIGN
) commissioning, use (setting, teac h ing/programming, 'PETS SHALL BE CARRIED'
operation, c leaning, fault finding and maintenance) of
)
th e escalator and moving wa lk, and, if necessa ry,
) de-commiss ioning, disma ntling and di sposal.
) 8.14.2 Signals and Waming Devices
) 8.14.2.1 Plates, inscriptions and notices for use
a) General- A ll s igns, inscriptions and notices
) for use shall be of durable material, placed in
a conspicuous pos ition a nd written in clearly
) legible characters in English as well as in local
) language.
b) Safety signs near the entrances of escalators F1a. 16 MANDATORY AcTION S IGN
'UsE THE HANDRAI L'
or moving walks - The fo llowing mandatory
) action signs and prohibition s igns for the user
} shall be fi xed in the vicinity oft he e ntrances:

) I) Small children shall be held firml y (see

Fig. 14);
)
2) Pets shall be carried (see Fig. 15);
) 3) Use the ha ndrail (see Fig. 16); and
) 4) Push chairs not permitted (see Fig. 17).
When required by local conditions, prohibition
)
sig ns, for example, 'Transportation of bulky
and heavy loads not permitted' and mandatory
action s ig ns like 'Use pcrmit~ecl only w ith F IG. 17 PROH IBITION S IGN
'PusH CHAIRs NoT P ERMITTED'
footwear', shall be necessitated .
)
22 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016

)
 ~

.1)
Stop devices shall be coloured red either on b) are suitable for intensive use, regularly
' .,1I
the device itself or in its immediate vicinity operating for approximately 140 hlweek with 'l
and be marked with the inscription 'STOP'. a load reaching 100 percent of the brake load $
During maintenance, repair, inspection or for a total duration of at least 0.5 h during any ) 1 .~
similar work, the access to the escalator or time interval of 3 h. ~-·
moving walk shall be barred to unauthorized It is recommended to install auxiliary brakes also for
persons by devices which shall bear the notice
'No Access' or the 'No Entry' indicator, and
rises less than 6 m. Auxiliary brakes shall be mandatory
for public transport. The load conditions and additional
\ [1!
j
be available in immediate area. 'I
NOTE - The safety sign (see Fig. 18) shall be
safety feature s should be agreed to between the
manufacturer and the owner reflecting the traffic levels
)1
-~
affixed prominently near the entrances of
escalators or moving walks which are inclined which exist.
) ~}
above 6°:
9.2 Measures to Prevent Access of Shopping Trolleys ,,.,
) ~
and Baggage Carts i:)
•
{
9.2.1 General
~
If there is a reasonable foreseeable risk that shopping 4
trolleys and/o r baggage carts can be taken onto
escalators or moving walks, adequate measures shall
be ta ke n to elim inate risks and access sha ll be
prevented, if the following conditions are given:
a) For escalators - Where shopping trolleys
or baggage carts are avai h ble in the area
around; and where sh opping troll eys or
FIG. 18 WHEEL CHAIR U s ERS NoT PERMITTED baggage catts are in an area not close to the
escalator but il is reasonably foreseeable that
c) Instructions for hand winding devices- If a
they are taken onto the escalator.
hand winding device is provided, operating
instmctions for use shall be available in the b) For moving walks - Where shopping trolleys
vicinity. The direction of travel of the escalator or baggage catts are not intended to be used
or moving walk shall be indicated clearly. on a moving walk.
d) Notices on the access doors to machine1y 9.2.2 Barriers
spaces outside the truss, dJ ,ving and return
If barriers are used, the following requirements shall
stations - On access doors to machinery
be fulfilled: .
spaces outside the truss, and driving and return
stations, a notice sha ll be fixed with the
inscription reading, 'MACHINE RY
a) Barri er shall be installed at the entrance only.
An installation at the exit is not permitted in
, ..
,•
·\
9

SPACE - DANGER' and 'ACCESS the unrestricted area.

PROHIBITED TO UNAUTHORIZED
PERSONS '.
9 SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
If escalators or moving walks are intended to be operated
under special conditions, such as directly exposed to the
weather or explosive atmosphere, or in exceptional cases
serve as emergency exits, appropriate design criteria,
components, materials and instmctions fo r use should
be used that satisfy the paiticular conditions.
9.1 Escalators or Moving Walks for P ublic
Transport
For escalators and moving walks for public transp01t
which,
a) are part of a public transport system including
entrance and exit points; or
b) Design of the barrier shall not create another
risk.
c) Free e ntrance width betwee n e nds of the
newe ls and barriers and between barriers
itself, shall be at least 500 mm and less than
the width of the type of shopping trolley or
baggage cart to be used.
d) Height of the barrier shall be between 900 mm
and l 100 mm.
e) BatTier and its fixation have to withstand the
following load: At a height of 200 mm a
horizontal force of3 000 N applies. This force
results from an impact of a c hass is of a
shopping trolley/baggage cart loaded with
160 kg moving with a speed of 1.00 m/s.
f) Barrier shall be ftxed preferably at the building

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 23
58 ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
)
)

)
structures. It is also permitted to fix it at the mm, provided that the guiding barrier or traffic
floor plate. In that case, when the defined column is of a round shape and is positioned
) outside of the outer edge of the handrail and
forces apply, there shall be no permanent
) deformation and increased/additional gaps. an additional barrier is installed between the
g) If the escalator/moving walk is dedicated to guiding barrier or traffic column and the
operate in both directions, the presence of the vertical centre line of the balustrade newel
removable barrier s hall be electrica lly The additional barrier shall have a lateral
) monitored preventing wrong positioning of the distance between 80 mm and 120 mm of the
barrier resulting in operati on towards the handrail outer edge and shall close at least the
) ~
barrier, except when under maintenance area between the actual lowest point of the
) condition. handrai l entry into the ne we l a nd the
)
balustrade decking profile and shall have filled
9.2.3 Fixed Devices inlets with gaps less than 25 mm
)
)

)
Where fixed devices such as guiding barriers and/or
traffic columns are necessmy in the unrestricted area,
their design shall not create another risk. The following
requirements shall be complied with:
In addition, the following specific requirements shall
apply:
1) Devices and its fixat ion shall withstand a
'I
{
) horizontal force of 1 kN/m applied to the top
a) Guiding barriers or traffic columns shall have of the device.
a minimum horizontal distance (radius) of
2) Barrier shall be fiXed preferably at the building
500 rnm to any point of the handrail and shall
structures. It is also penn itted to fix it at the
be positioned outside of the centre line of the
) floor plate. In that case, when the defined
handrail.
forces app ly, there shall be no permanent

) b) Minimum .horizontal distance (radius) to any
po int of the handrail may be reduced to
300 mm, provided that the guiding baniers or
) height of the handrail level.
traffic columns are positioned outside of the
centre lines of the handrails and an additional
)
barrie r is ins talled between the guiding
) barriers or traffic columns and the vertical
) centre line of the balustrade newel.
The additional barrier shall have a lateral
)
distance between 80 mm and 120 mm of the
) handrail outer edge and shall close at least the
) area between the actual lowest point of the
ha ndrai l e ntry into the newe l and the
)
balustrade decking profile and shall have fi lled
) inlets with gaps less than 25 mm.
~t
deformation and increased/additional gaps.
3) Height of traffic columns shall be at least the
I
4) Height of guiding barriers shall be at least the
height of the balustrade deck ing.
5) If fixed devices are p laced inside th e
unrestricted area, the size of the unrestricted
area shall remain the same and in this case be
extended in the length.
6) Guiding barriers and traffic columns are not
considered as structural measures that block
the exit.
NOTE - For fi xed devices in lhe immediate environment of
the unrestricted area lhese requirements also apply.

) c) Minimum horizontal distance (radius) to any

9.3 Escala tors and Moving Walks Subj ect to Seismic
point of the handrai l may be reduced to
Conditions
180 mm, provided that the guiding barrier or
) traffic column is pos itioned outside of the 9.3.1 Stmctural Requirements
outer edge of the handrail and an additional
) a) General - Esca lators and moving walks, if
barrier is installed between the guiding barrier
) or traffic column and the vertical centre li ne specified to meet specified seismic conditions
of the balustrade newel. s ha ll comp ly wi th the re levant safety'
)
requirements and/or protective measures as
The addi tional barrier shall have a lateral
) listed below.
distance between 80 mm and 120 mm of the
) handrail outer edge and shall close at least the b) Pit/support - Pit and suppo1t conditions are
area between the actual lowest point of the to be secured in that way that the escalator
) and moving walk under seismic condition is
han dra il e ntry into th e newe l and the
) balush·ade decking profil e and shall have fi lled not subjected to constraint. One support has
inlets with gaps less than 25 mm. to be executed as fixed support the other
)
su pp orts are to be executed as movable
d) Minimum hori zontal distance (radius) to any
) support in horizontal direction. The suppmting
point of the handrail may be reduced to 100
)
condi tions need to be simply statical ly

J 24 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016


determinate.
Escalator and moving walk shall be retained
on the supports in vertical direction by
adequate measures so that the unit cannot jump
off the supports under seismic conditions.
c) Arrangem e nt - The length and the
movability of the escalator and moving walk
have to be chosen in accordance with the
building movement between two storeys of the
building. The mtn11num a llowab le
compensation length of the movable support
of the escalator and moving walk has to be
chosen ~arne as the maximum allowed storey
drift of the building.
d) Mechanical safety devices.for escalators and
moving walks - If the design of the escalator
and moving walk does not allow the safe
situation in the pit or support an additional
safety device need to be applied so that the
escalator and moving walk cannot fall off the
support.
9.3.2 Design Requirements
It is assumed that negotiations have been made for each
contract between the customer and the supplier/installer
about the peak ground acceleration to be considered.
The building designer or owner shall provide the design
acceleration which shall be docum ented in the
information. Client and supplier/contractor have to
agree on one co mmon accele ration va lue. The
acceleration value need to be communicated between
all participants of the contract. Also,
a) the design of the truss for the escalators and
moving walks shall be sufficiently executed
for the amb ient seismic condition. The
stmctural design shall provide a dissipation
capacity to withstand a des ign- re leva nt
eatthquake of the region where it is located.
b) Dri ve and co ntrol unit - Machinery
[including conh·ol cabinet(s) and drive system,
machine, main switch(es), and means for
emergency operations], free-wheeling switch
shall be designed and anchored to prevent
overturning and displacement as a result of
the .forces imposed on them includ ing forces
generated by the design acceleration.
c) Electrical in stallation and other equip-
11/ ent - In case the buildin g where the
escalator and moving walk will be installed is
equipped with a seismic detector/sensor, the
electrical system of the unit shall provide an
interface for the connection and shall stop the
escalator and moving walk in case of seismic
activity.
PART 8 BUILDlNG SERVICES- SECTIONS INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS:
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
- --------- r
)
9.4 Escalator/Moving Walk Interface with Building )
Management System (BMS)
Where required, a means to interface, monitor and
control be provided by the escalator/moving walk
manufacturer, which should become the part of building
management system. Following information and
controls, but not limited to these, may be provided e ither
through potential fi·ee contacts or building automation
interface device s uitable for providing necessary \
escalator/moving walk information over accepted
)
communication protocols:
)
a) Monitoring signals:
)
l) Power status,
)
2) Running up/down (Escalator),
3) Running forward/backward (Moving )
walk),
)
4) Under maintenance,
)
5) Under fault, and
)
6) Emergency ' STOP ' pressed.
b) Remote operation - Escalator or moving walk l
shall not be started or stopped from remote )
monitoring station using remote signal, unless
the pmticular escalator/moving walk operation )
is visible/monitored from the remote station. )
10 P ERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR )
ESCALATORS AND MOVll'IG WALKS )
10.1 It is necessary to have uniformity in the definition, )
measurement, processing and expression of vibration
)
and noise signals that comprise escalator and moving
walk ride quality. The aim of such uniformity is to )
benefit escalator and moving walk users by reducing )
variability in the results of ride quality measurements
caused by differences in the methods of acquiring and )
quantifying the signal s. Experience indicates th at )
passenger perception and sound pressure levels
)
measured while travelling on an escalator or moving
walk can be influenced by the presence of extraneous )
no ise a nd vibra ti on sources and by acou stic
characteristics of the environment in which the unit is
installed and operated. Additionally, the proximity of )
the escalator or mov ing walk to strong re fl ectin g )
surfaces such as walls, ceilings or diagonally opposite
units can also influence the sound press ure leve l )
measured. These influences can cause a sound pressure
level measurement to significantly overestimate the
}
sound level emitted exclusively by the unit. In order to
add ress this iss ue, this Subsec tion de fines the )
methodology fo r measuring vibration and sound )
pressure leve l that corresponds to passenger percept ion
and addi tiona lly defi nes the methods that should be
used, if further understanding of tl~e result is requ ired
in order to quantify vibration and noise emi tted by the
25
)
)

)
unit as compared to the background or environmental n) Escalator/moving walk lighting details;
) contributions. p) Electric supply: power volts a.c./d.c.; phase;
) cycles; wire system;
10.2 Measm·ement of Escalator and Moving Walk
) q) Proposed date for commencement on site;
Ride Quality
r) Additional items, ifrequired;
Escalator and moving walk should be measured in both s) Details of maintenance, schedu le and circuit
running directions except where the unit is designed to diagram where .so specified; and
operate in one direction only. The measurements should
) t) Details of voice announcements, visual
be carried out under following conditions where,
contrast, tactile indicators and warn ing
escalator and moving walk shall,
signage.
a) be assembled complete ly, adjusted and
operating in accordance to the requirement; 11.2 Additional Items
b) have reached normal operating temperature; The enquiry should state any additional items required
c) be measured in unloaded condition; beyond those specified in good practice [8-58(2)], such
d) be measured after starting sequence has been as interface requirements, seismic design, etc.
) comp leted. Tf the unit operates at different
11.3 Finishes
speeds, all the speeds shall be measured;
)
e) have finished star/delta changeover, if used, Finishes should be specified at the enquiry stage or
) before starting the measurement; provisional sums should be included for them. Finishes
) f) have vibration mea surements made by to be considered may include step lighting, handrail
aligning the axis of transducer to the axis of colour, handrail li ghting, balustrade material, step
) colour, truss cladding details (weight to be considered).
entire escalator or moving wa lk; and
) g) have the noise measured at measuring distance 11.4 Tnclusions and Excl usions
) to the floor/surface of steps and pallets of
1.55 ± 0.075 Ill. A number of peripheral items are associated with
) escalators/moving walk insta llation, of which some
) 11 ESCALATOR AND MOVlNG WALK should always be provided by the builder and some
ENQUIRY OR INVITATION TO TENDER are best included by the manufacturer. The requirements
)
11.1 A period of two to four weeks is n01mally sufficient vary to some extent with the type of installation.
) for return of tenders. This should be extended, if large It is important that the limits of responsibi lity are clearly
) numbers of escalators/mov in g wa lks or s pecial understood, and the enqu iry documents should be
requirements are involved. The enquiry documents specific in this respect.
)
should be kept to the essential minimum , and should
) be s trictly confined to material relevant to th e The esca lators/moving wa lk manufacturer should
escalators/moving walk works and to the particular include items, such as,
)
project concerned. a) tracks,
)
When enquiring for and ordering the escalators/moving b) drive unit,
) c) controller,
walks, the particulars given below should be furnished:
) d) broken chain,
a) Type(s) of escalator/moving walk;
) b) Number of esca lators/moving walks; e) stop switches at both ends,
) c) Location of esca lators/moving walks (indoor Q balustrade,
or outdoor); g) handrail,
)
d) Capac ity/usage type (persons per day/heavy h) steps/step drive assembly,
)
duty, medium duty, light duty); j) saree/skirt guard,
) e) Angle of inclination, in degree; k) step demarcation lights,
) f) Rise (travel), in m; m) mi ssing steps,
g) Nominal speed, in m/s; n) comb plate,
)
h) Step width, in m; p) flat steps,
)
j) Number of flat steps (2 or 3); q) comb plate switches/skirt switches,
k) Balustrade details; r) landing steps (anti-slip material),
m) Construction, design, fini shes details; s) hl.ISS,

)
26 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
 --------------------.rT )
)
{ t) guarantee of equipment, and particulars such as dimensions, steel work requirements
,
u) scaffolding for installation. and loading imposed on structure. Such drawings sha ll
include the following details: )
The escalators/moving walk manufacturer shou ld
exclude the supply and fixing of the items or as per the a) Posi tion and sizes of all holes and cuttings, )
contract conditions as follows: b) Loads on beams and stiUcture,

i
)
l) Hoisting hook/beam fixing, c) Escalator/moving walk pits and associated )
equipment,
2) Truss cladding, )
d) End supports requirement including layout,
3) Temporary guarding,
e) Hoisting facilities and access requirement for )

I
4) Cutting and mak ing goods,
delivery of equipment, )
5) Working lights/permanent electricity supplies,
and f) Builder's work, and )
6) Site painting of steel work. g) Power and ventilation requirement.
)
For more detailed discussion of the requirements for 12.4 Approval of Layo ut Drawings )
site preparation and work by other trades, reference
The contractor shall commence actual production of )
should be made to relevant provisions of the Code and
equipment after approval of drawings submitted by
other good practices. )
co ntrac to r. Where the contract provides for the
Facilities for the use of the main contractor's crane
sho uld be provided to assis t in install ing heavy
equi pment in addition to other unloading faci lities on
pui·chaser 's choice of decorative fini shes, colours, etc,
the decisions should be communicated as early as
possible, and preferab ly not later than the time of
)
,
site in the course of erecti on. The main contractor approval of drawings. )
should be instructed to include these faci li ties in his )
own bi ll of quantities. 12.5 Programme ofWorl<s
)
The contractor shall submit a detailed programme
J 1.5 Site Programme )
showing intended method and stages together with
The enquiry should indicate as accurately as possible period of time estimated for each stage. The programme )
the contract programme as it affects the manufacturer, shall include the following: )
in particular the target date for con~pletion, construction
schedule, site preparedness, the avai labili ty of crane a) Date of commencement and complet ion of )
for hoisting, coordination detai ls (w ith other contractors every stage of the works in li ne w ith the
)
like BMS interfacing, CCTV interfacing, etc). build ing constntction programme;
b) Date of expected completion ofbui ldcr's work ) '
12 ACCEPTANCE OF TE N DER AN D requ irements; )
SU BSEQUENT PROCED URE c) Date of delivery of equipment and materials
to site;
) .
12.1 Order
) I
d) Date of requirement of tempora ry and
The owner places an order with the selected contractor

)I
permanent e lectricity supply; and
for supply and installation of escalator/moving walk.
c) Date of completion, commiss ioning and
12.2 The general arrangement drawings supplied by testing.
owner with the tender documents,
a) arc provided for the supplier 's guidance and
The contractor shall ensure the work in accordance with ) ~
the criticality of adherence of insta llation dimensions

~t
infonnation when tendering; and supports as ind icated in layout.
b) should the anangement and dimensions shown

be inadequate to properly install the equipment
as specified then necessary amendments shall
be issued by client; and
c) any amendments issued afte r the
commencement of contract shall be subject
to the agreement and approval.
12.3 Layout Drawings
The contractor shall furnish proposed layout giving
~
12.6 Electricity S upply to Escalators/Moving Walk
Operation of the machine under power is required from )
a comparatively early stage of installation for most
efficient working, and power supply shal l be furnished )
accordingly. Whilst temporary power supply may be
sufficient for erection purposes, final testing and setting
up can only be carried out with the permanent power
supply connected. For th is reason, the timely provision
of the permanent power supply is important.

1':\RT 8 BUILDING SERV ICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND i\ IOV ING WALKS: 27
5B ESCALATO RS AND i\IOVING WALKS
) .
 )
)
)
) 13 COORDINATION OF SITE WORK
) 13.1 Preparatory Work on Site
) 13.1.1 It is expected for the escalator/moving walk
)
supplier to make periodic visits to the site to check
progress on the construction and discuss relevant
) matters with the owner. The contractor should assure
) himself that all building work has been completed in
accordance with his requirements. Immediately before
the time for erection to commence, the contractor
) should check that site conditions are fit to permit
erection to proceed.
)
13.1.2 Building works to be completed before the
)
erection work, includes the following:
) Applying Provisions of the Code' of the Code.
a) Providing adequate access to the well-way to
) allow for setting the equipment in place.
) b) lfthe project is not ready for placement at the
time of delivery, providing dry storage area
) as the work proceeds, and it is essential that the
located close to well-way.
) c) Providing protection of a ll floor openings
) adjacent to and in the general area of escalator/
moving walk.
)
d) Providing safety com pi iant stairwell access to
) floors.
) e) Providing c lear unobstructed wo rkspace
adjacent to well-way.
)
f) Providing safety compliant overhead and floor
) opening protection.
) g) Providing barricades to prevent the entrance
) of unauthori zed personnel to construction
area.
) PROCEDURES
h) Drying and cleaning of pit and floor openings
) with proper dimensions.
) j) Providing properly lo ca ted sup ports of
adequate strength for the truss at the landings
including intermediate supports, if required.
k) Providing suitable floor fill and patching of
) flooring including floor covering, adjacent to
the landing plates of the escalator/moving
) walk; all floor fini shing to be completed a fter
installation of the landing plates.
m) Providing flooring with li ttle slope in direction
)
out\¥ards of the escalator to prevent ingress
) of water, etc, into the escalator.
13.2 Delivery of Material
)
The co ntractor s hould adv ise the owner when
) equipment is ready for dispatch, so that the owner can
) make arrangements on site to rece ive and un load as
near as possible to the well-way.
) form part of a pre-completed test sheet. Furthermore,
13.3 Storage
) wiring diagrams (current flow chart with legend or
) Adequate provis ion should be made by the owner for
J 28
)
)
--
s toring, protecting and preserving aga ins t loss,
deterioration of or damage to all material on the s ite.
Attention is drawn to the adverse effect of damp
conditions on electrical equipment.
13.4 Site Meetings
The contractor s hall coordinate his proposed
programme of work with that of the building contractor
and all other contractors and sub-contractors in order
to adhere to the latest overall construction programme
and in order to achieve efficient and safe working on
site. In large sites, regular meetings of all parties are
beneficial for successful progress of work. See also
Part 0 ' Integrated Approach - Prerequisite for
13.5 Service of Other Trades
The contractor m ay require the services of other trades
contractor should g ive du e notice to the building
contractor of the demands to be made on other trades,
so that be can plan accordingly.
13.6 Connecting to Power Supply
The contractor should g ive prior notice to the owner of
the date the power supply is required, so that suitable
arrangeme nts for connection can be made. During
erection, necessary e lectrical power shall be provided
for illumination, operation of required tools and hoist
and for starting, testing and adjustment
14 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
14.1 General
Escalators and moving walks shall be inspected, before
their firs t use; after major modifications; and at regular
intervals. Such inspections and tests s hould be made
by a competent person.
14. ~Constructional Ins pection and Acceptance
lnspection and Test
14.2.1 The constru ct ional inspection and acceptan ce
inspection and test shall be carried out at the job-site
on completion of the escalator or moving walk. During
inspection and tests, precautions sha ll be taken so that
escalators or moving walks cannot be set in motion
without the knowledge and consent of the person(s)
performing such work.
For the constructional inspection and accep tance
inspection and test, the data s pecified in 14.4 should
layout drawings, description of the equipment a nd
explanations, and a terminal connection chart) which
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF l NDlA 2016
 )
)
permit a check of compliance with the safety riser'. For the purpose of a test, the total brake load is )
requirements, shall be provided. permitted to be d istributed over two-thirds of the
)
number of steps thus obtained.
The constructional ins pection .co mprises the
14.2.5 Stopping Distances .for Moving Walks )
exa mination of the completed installation for
conformity with the required data and with regard to )
The stopping distances for unloaded and horizontally
proper workmanship as specified hereunder.
or downward moving loaded moving walks shall be as )
14.2.2 The acceptance inspection and test comprises, given in Table 7. )
a) overall visual inspection; )
Table 7 Stopping Distances for Moving Walks
b) functional test; (Clause 14.2.5) )
I c) test of electric safety devices w ith regard to
Sl Nominal Speed, v Stopping Distance shall be )

I
their effective operation; and
No. m/s Between
d) test of the brake(s) of the escalator or moving ( I) (2) (3) )
walk under no load, for compliance with the i) 0.50 0 .20 m and 1.00 m )
prescribed stopping distances. ii) 0.65 0.30 m and 1.30 m
iii) 0 .75 0.40 m and ·1.50 m )
14.2.3 Stopping Distancesfor Escalator iv) 0.90 0.55 m and 1.70 m
)
The stopping distances for unloaded and downward
moving loaded escalators shall be as g iven in Table 6. )
For intermedi ate speeds, the stopping distances shall )
For intermediate speeds the stopping distances shall be interpolated. ·
be interpolated. )
The stopping distances shall be measured from the time
The stopping distances shall be measured from the time the electTic device for stopping is actuated )
the electric stopping device is actuated. )
NOTE - It is recommended to achieve the shortest possible
NOTE - It is recommended to achieve the shortest possible slopping distance within the given deceleration limit. For
)
s topping distance within the givt:n decelera ti on limit a nd moving walks, a brake test under no load is sufficient.
stopping distances for escalator. )
14.2.6 Brake Load.for Moving walks
Additionally, fo r escalators, a test of the stopping )
di stances under brake load is required unless the To determine the brake load for moving walks which
stopping distances can be verifi ed by other methods. in their le ng th overcome seve ral inclinations )
(differences in level), only the downward running )
Table 6 Stopping Distances for Escalators sections shall be considered. For loaded moving walks,
the manufacturer shall prove the stopping distances by )
(Clause 14.2.3)
calculation (see table). )
Sl Nomi nal Speed, v Stopping Distance shall be
No. m/s Between Nominal Width Brake Load per )
(I) (2) (3) 0.4111 Le11gth )
kg
i) 0.50 0.20 m and 1.00 m )
ii) 0.65 0.30 m and 1.30 m Up to 0.60 m 50
)
iii) 0.75 0.40 m and 1.50 m More than 0.60 m up to 0.80 m 75
More than 0.80 m up to 1. 10 m 100 )
14.2.4 Brake Load.for Escalators More than 1.10 m up to 1.40 rn 125
)
More than 1.40 m up to 1.65 m 150
For determining the brake load for escalators, the )
following relation shall be used: )
An examination of the brake adjus tment accordi ng to
Nominal Width Brake Load the calcul ation is required. Calcul ation of the stopping )
per Step distances for loaded moving walks (see together with
adj ustmen t data) is also necessary. )
kg
)
Up to 0.60 m 60 Measurement of the insulation resistance of the different
More than 0.60 m up to 0.80 m 90 circuits between conductors and eatth shall also be done. )
More than 0.80 m up to 1. 10 m 120 For this measurement, the electronic components shall )
be disco nnected. T his includes a test of the electric
The number of steps to be considered is determined by continui ty of the connection between the eatth tenninal(s) )
'Rise d ivided by maximum vis ible height of the step in the dri ving station and the different parts of the ) I

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 I NSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOV ING WALKS: 29
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS )
)
)
)
)
escalator or moving walk, liable to be li ve accidentally. e) Test certificate for the breaking strength of the
belt;
) 14.3 Inspection and Test after Major Moditications f) Test certificate sliding coefficients for ski1t ing;
) A major modification is a change of the location, a g) Test certificate for anti-slip properties of tread
change of the speed, of the electric safety devices, o f surfaces (steps, pallets, floor and comb plates
)
the braking system, of the drive, of the control, of the witho ut combs);
) step band, of the truss and of the ba lustrades. Wherever h) Test certificate for s toppi ng distances and
applicab le, the principles set fotth for the constructional deceleration values; and
)
inspection and acceptance inspection and test should j) Test certificate fo r handrai l breaking strength
apply to the new environmental conditions, modified (for public service esca lators and pub lic
components and other components which are affected. service passenger moving walks).
The replacement of parts w ith parts of same design is
14.5 Escalator Site C hecks and Inspection List
no t considered to be a major modification.
)
Sui table site checklist/ inspection list may be used. A
14.4 Specific Data, Test Reports and Cer tificates typical list is g iven at Annex A .
The fo llowing documentation sho uld be held by the
14.6 Escalator C ommissioning and Acceptance Tests
manufacturer:
)
a) Stress ana lys is o f the tru ss o r equ ivale nt 14.6.1 Escalator Details
)
certificate by a competent person; · Typical details to be provided are g iven below:
) b) Proof by calculation of sufficient breakage
a) Name of station
) res istance of the pa rts directly dri ving the
b) Location
steps, pallets or the belt, fo r example, step
) c) Escalator No. and job No.
chains, racks;
d) Drawing No.
) c) Ca lculation of th e stopp ing dis tances fo r e) Rise
) loaded moving walks together with adj ustmen t f) Type of balustrade : SS I G lass -
data; Tick (..f)
)
d) Test certi !icate for steps or t)allets; g) Manufacturer 's Sl No.
)
14.6.2 General Inspection
)
A ty pical general inspeciion list is given below:
)
) Sl Item Metlwd/ Result
No. Requirement
)
(I) (2) (3) (4)
)
i) All unwanted material have been removed Visua l check
) ii) Escalato r (i ncluding steps, handrai ls, floor plate, Visual check
) c ladding, etc) has been cleaned
iii) Proper barricading of the area has been Vi sual check
) clone prior to testing
) iv) Emergency signage to be fixed at the emergency stop; Visua l check
safety labels placed at top/bottom newel end
v) Check provision of ' D~nger Sign' plate on the Visual check
esca lato r contro l pane l

14.6.3 Electrical Test

A typica l check list of electri cal tests is given below:
Sf Item Test Recommended lnstmm en t/ Aleasured Result
) No . Procedure Result Sf No. Value

) (I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (5) (7)

i) Insulation Shall be tested between > o.5 Mn
resistance lines co nnected to gether (M·ega O hm)
test and earth at 500 V d.c .
)
30 NATIONAL BUILDI NG CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
fl 14.6.4 Functional Tests on Safety Switches and Devices e) Specific maintenance inshl.ICtions provided by
)

)
the manufacturer of safety components; and )
A typical check list is given at Annex B.
f) In case o f co mponents other than safety )
f components, where maintenance is necessary,
15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE )
the maintenance instmctions provided by the
15. 1 General manufacturer of these components . )
The ins tallation shall be maintai ned in good working )
order in accordance with the installer's instructions.
15.3 Informa tion to be Included in the Maintenance
Instructions )
To this effect, regular maintenance of the installation
shall be carried out to ensure, in particular, the safety 15.3.1 General )
,I of the installation. The safety of an installation shall )
take into account the ability to be maintained without The maintenance instructions shall contain informat ion
causing injury or damage to health. r e latin g to the tas k s of bo th the owner and the )
maintenance organization, respectively.
\ Regular maintenance o f the installation shall be canied )
out to ensure the reliability of the installation. The 15.3.2 Information to the Owner of the Installation
)
ac cess and th e assoc iated enviro nm ent s ha ll be The in formation re lating to the tasks of the owner of )
maintained in good working order in accordance w ith the installat io n shall include the followi ng:
the installer 's instructi ons. )
a) Need for the owner to keep the installation in
The instructions for maintenance of an installation shall a safe operating condition. To fulfil this, the )
be provided by the installer, afler completion of the owner shall use a maintenance organiza tio n )
insta ll ation as a resu lt of a risk assessment. T he com pl y ing wi th the requ irem ents of thi s
in stmctions for maintenance of an instaliation shall be )
Subsection.
provided by the manufacturer, when placed on the NOTE - It is recommended to inform the owner )
market, and be the result of a risk assessment. of the insta ll atio n about the nee d to usc a
)
maintenance organization with adequate a nd
In order that the aim of the maintenance instructions proper insurance cover provided by an insurance )
can be achieved, they shall be fo nnulated so that they company.
can be c learly and easily understood by competent )
b) Need for the owner to take care of appl icable
maintenance person. The competent maintenance regulation(s) and other requirements, where )
person w ithin the maintenance o rganiza tion shall be
relevan t, and the ir implications on )
continuo usly updated. maintenance.
The installer/manufacturer shall provide maintenance
)
c) Need for planned maintenance to be carried
instmctio ns intended for the owner o f the installatio n out by a maintenance organization, at the latest )
(see 15.3.2) including the information intended for the w hen the installation is put into service or if )
maintenance organization (see 15.3.3). the installation is to remain unused for a lo ng
period of time before f irst being put into )
NOT E - The owner o f the installation should be informed
that the qualification of the maintenance organization is in service. )
conformi ty with the regulation applicable in the location in d) Imp01tance fo r the owner of the installation
which the installation operates. )
to have the same maintenance o rganization in
15.2 Elements to be Taken into Acco unt for the case of seve r-al instal lations having ) I
Maintenance Instructions common well/spaces and/or machine room. )
e) Need fo r the owner to put the installation out
When preparing the content of the maintenance )
of service in case of dangerous s ihtations.
instructi ons (see 4.3 and 5) the following elements shall )
t) Need fo r the ow ne r of the installation to
be taken into account:
inform the maintenance organization, )
a) Specifi cations and th e intended use of the 1) imm ed iate ly about any perce ived
installat ion (type of installatio n, performance, )
abnormal operation of the installation or
etc); abnorma l c h a nge in its direct )
b) Environment in which the insta llat ion and its env iro nment; )
components are install ed (weather conditions, 2) immediately after putting the insta llat ion
vandalism, etc); )
out of service in the case of a dangerous
c) Any restriction ofuse; situation; )
d) Result of risk assessment (see 5) for every 3) after any rescue inte rvention by their )
wo rkin g area and fo r every task undertaken; authorized and instructed perso n(s);
)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTIONS INSTALLATION OF LifTS, ESCALATO RS AND MOV ING WALKS: 31
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
)
)
I
)

)
4) before any modification related to the accompany the maintenance persons to
) installation and/or its environment or use; the installation; and
) NOTE - The owner of the install at ion iv) if nece ssary, perso nal protectiv e
should obtain from the company carrying out equipment to be used in the access ways,
) the relevant modification the maintenance
and, possibly, where this equipment can
in s tructi ons for the maintenance
)
organization.
be found.
) The information shall be made available also
5) before any authorized third party
on site to the maintenance organization.
) inspection or works other than
maintenance works are carried out on the k) Need for the owner of the installation to ensure
installation; that the name and the telephone number of
6) before taking the installation out of the maintenance organization are always
service for a prolonged period of time; available to the user of the installation,
) permanently affixed and clearly visible.
and
) 7) before putting the installation back into m) Need for the owner ofthe installation to ensure
) service after a prolonged period of non- that the keys of machine room doors (trap
operating time. doors) and of inspection and emergency doors
) (trap doors), if any, are permanently available
g) Need for the owner of the installation to take
) in the building and are used only by persons
into consideration the consequences of the risk
authorized to gain access .
) assessment carried out by the maintenance
organization. n) Need for the owner of the installation to
) provide, in all circumstances, safe access to
h) Need for the owner of the installation to make
) the building and to the installation for the
sure that the risk assessment for maintenance
maintenance organization involved in the
) is carried out:
rescue of persons. ·
I) if the maintenance .o rganization is
) p) Need for the owner of the installation to keep
replaced;
the access to working areas and working
) 2) if the use of the building and/or the rooms safe and free for the mainte nance
) installation changes; persons and to inform th e maintenance
)
3) after a major modifi cat ion of the organization about any hazard or change in
installation or of the building; and the workplace . and/or the access ways
) 4) if it is the case, after an accident involving (lighting, obstructions, ground conditions,
) the installation. etc).
) j) Need for the building owner to ensure, through q) In addition to those examinations and tests (for
a risk assessment, that: escalators/moving walk) which the owner of
) the installation entrusts to the maintenance
I) their premises are safe and free from risk
) to health as far as is practicable. This organization, the need for the owner to cany
includes access to the pre mises and out periodically, in their own interests, include
)
installation equipment, and articles or the following:
) sub stances used ac cording to the I) A full travel in both directions, when they
) regulation for the use of work equipment exist, to assess any changes in the quality
at the workplace; of the ride or damage to the equipment.
)
2) the persons us ing the premises are 2) Typical items to be checked to ensure that
informed about any remaining risks; and they are in place, undamaged and
) 3) any action to be done as a consequence functioning correctly are,
of his risk assessment is carried out. i) all lighting and indicators;
)
Regarding the access ways to areas reserved ii) emergency stopping device;
) to maintenance persons, the need for the owner iii) hand rails;
) of the installation to inform the maintenance iv) ski rting/deflector devices;
organization, in particular about,
) v) combs;
i) the access ways to be used and fire
)
vi) safety signs/pictograms;
evacuating procedures from the building;
vii) approx imati on of speed between
) ii) the place where the keys of the reserved
handrail and steps/pallets;
areas can be found ;
) viii) steps/pallets;
iii) if necessa ry, the persons who shall
)
32 NATIONAL BUILDING C ODE OF INDIA 2016
)
)
 )
)
ix) balustrade and panels; h) Need to maintain the competency of )
x) head guard and decking; maintenance persons.
j) Need to carry out the main te na nce )
xi) safe and unobstructed access to ently
and exit areas. periodically. In determining the frequency of )
15.3.3 Information for the Maintenance Organization maintenance interventions, the following non-
)
exhaustive list should be considered:
The information relating to the tasks of the maintenance l) Operating time and any non-operating )
organization shall include the following: periods of time; )
a) Need to carry out the work of maintenance in 2) Age and condition of the installation;
)
conformity with the maintenance instructions 3) Location and type of building in which
and based on systematic maintenance checks. the installation is installed, as well as the )
After these checks, the maintenance needs of the users; and )
organization shall decide in conformity with 4) Local environment where the installation
the maintenance instructions what is required )
is situated, as wel l as ex te rnal
to be done. A list of typical examples of environmental elements, for example, )
maintenance c hecks to maintain the weather conditions (rain, heat, cold, etc)
installation is shown in Annex C. )
or vandalism.
NOTE - Due to the ract that the components can )
be different in des ign and operation, it is thererore
k) Need to provide a 24 h, all year round call-
not possible to give speci fi c gu idelines in this out service for rescue of persons. )
Subsection. m) Need to keep records of the result of each )
b) Need to update the original maintenance intervention due to a failure of the installation.
instructi ons, if the installation cha nges its These records shall include the type of fai lures )
intende d use and/or the environmenta l in order to detect any repetition. They shall )
conditions existing on the completion of the be available to the owner of the installation
installation. on request. )
NOTE - The maintenance organization should n) Need to put out of service the installation, if )
be provided by the owner or the installation with the ma intenance organization is aware of a )
the re levant main te nance instruc ti ons where dangerous situation, detecte d during the
modi tications arc carried out on the installation. maintenance, which cannot be elimi nated )
c) Need for the maintenance organization to immediately, and to infonn the owner of the )
ensure that a risk assessment for any working installation of the need to keep it out of service
area and for any maintenance operation has until repaired. )
been carried out taking into account the p) Need to be organized to provide the necessary )
installer's maintenance instructi ons and all spare parts for any repair. )
in formation supplied by the owner of the q) Possible need for attendance of a competent
installation. maintenance person(s), given reasonable )
d) Need for the maintenance organi zation to notice, for any inspection carried out by an )
infonn the owner of the installation about any authorized thi rd party or for building
work to be carried ou t as a consequence of a )
maintenance works to be carried out in the
risk assessment especially for the access and/ a reas reserved for the maintenance )
or the environment related lo the building/ organization. )
installation. r) Need to info rm in due time, the owner of the
c) Need to carry out a maintenance plan so that ins tal lation about necessary progress ive )
preventive maintenance is suitable for the upgrading of the installation. )
installation and maintenance time is as short s) Need to organize rescue operations, even with )
as reasonably practicable, without reduci ng sub-contractor(s), and to make provision for
the safety of persons, in order to minimize the circumstances such as fire, pan ic, etc. )
non-operational time of the installation. )
15.4 Mainten ance Contract
f) Need to adapt the plan for maintenance so as
to take account of any predictable fai lures, for It is recommended that the ma intenance is carried out )
example, those due to misuse, mishandling, by original equipment manufacture r (OEM). Any )
deterioration, etc. maintenance contract should include the following at a
)
g) Need to carry out maintenance operations by minimum, to ensure that escalators/moving walk is
competent maintenance persons and provided always maintained/operated in the safe working )
with the necessary tools and equipment. condition:

PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 33 ) .
58 ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS

)
)
)

) a) All batteries used for emergency operations, 15.5.2 Information for the Maintenance Organization
b) All safety switches/devices, For safe mainte nance and to prov ide r e le vant
) c) Handrail system components including instmctions, it is necessary, first of all, to identify the
handrails, maintenance operations.
)
d) Operational and auxiliary brake, and
) In particular, maintenance operations are,
e) Combs.
) a) those operations considered necessary for a
15.5 Risk Assessment correct and safe functioning of the installation
)
15.5.1 General and its components after the completion of the
) installation; and
Before an installation is placed on the market, it is
) b) those operations considered necessary during
necessary that the installer/manufacturer canies out a
) the ' life' of some components, determining,
risk assessment. Every risk shall be limited as much as
as far as possible, the time or condition after
) reasonably poss ible by means of safety measures and
which the funct ioning or the integrity of the
suitab le instructions. The instructions can never replace
) component is no longer ensured even if
a safety measure which can be provided to reduce the
) con ectly maintained.
risk.
) It is necessary to determine the different interventio n In carrying out specific maintenance operations, if it is
procedures of the maintenance operations and to necessary to neutralize som e safety functions (for
)
detennine the appropriate safety measures for each of exa mple, an e lectric safety device), th e hazard
) identificatio n shall be taken into account for such a
th ese procedures.
) situation.
The use of diagnostic systems may support fault finding,
) im prove the maintainability of the installation and It is necessary to inform and warn the maintenance
reduce the expos ure of maintenance persons to hazards. persons about: (a) residual risks, that is, those fo r w hich
)
risk reductio n by design and safeguarding techniques
) Safety in main tenance operations of the installation is are not there or not completely effective; and (b) risks
ensured by adopting safety measures and providing
) that arise from the necessary removal of certain guards
instructions. Safety measures on the installation and in·
to carry out specific maintenance ope rations. T he
) the bui lding shall be provided by the installer and by
ma intenance instructions and warnings shall prescribe
the owner of the installation, respecti vely.
) the procedures and operating m odes intended to
) For any working area, it is necessary to identify the list overcome these risks and, if it is necessary, to specify
of the specific hazards related to hea lth and safety and personal protective equ ipment, instruments, tools and
) to carry out a r isk assessme nt for any maintena nce provis ions to be used.
) operation, including access to the working area.
15.6 Ma rld ngs, Signs, Pictograms and W ritten
) For th is purpose, the fo llowin g sho uld be taken into Warnings
account:
)
If the risk assessment of the maintenance organization
a) Presence of one or more mai ntenance persons
indicates that additional specific warnings are required
in a work ing area;
for the purpose of mai ntenance, these shal l be affixed
b) Foreseeable actions of persons o the r than directly on the insta llation/component or, in the close
) maintenance persons (for example, person vicinity, when this is not possible . Markings, s igns,
)
sw itc hin g o n or off power ci rcui ts and pictogram s and written warnings shal l be readily
dependent circuits or lighting c ircuits or try ing und e rstand ab le an d una m biguous. Read il y
) to use the installa tion during maintenance
understandable s igns and pictograms shall be used in
) operations, etc); and
preference to written warnings.
). c) Possibl e states of the installat ion (normal o r
abno rmal due to a foreseeab le fail ure of its Signs o r written warnings can·ying o nly the words
com ponent parts, externa l di s turbances, ' D ANGER ' sha ll no t be used. Infonnation affixed
) disturbance of its power supply, etc). directly on th e insta ll at ion/ compo ne nt s hall be
permanent and legible.
) Annex D g ives a list of examp les of e lements to be
take n in to acco un t in any ri s k assessmen t f or Any markings, s igns, pictograms and written warnin gs
)
maintenance operati ons. However, several methods are affi xed on the install ation shall be rene wed if they
) ava ilable for the systematic assessment of risk. become illegible.
)
34 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)

)
 ____________________......... . .r ~

15.7 Form a t of th e Ma in te na nc e In structi on the appropriate safety measure.

Handbook
Type and size of print shall ensure the best possible )
The ma inte nance instructi on handbook for any legib ility. Safety warnings and/or precautions shall be
install ation shall contain at the front at least the
following:
emphasised through the use of colours or symbols and/
or large print.
'
)

)
a) Type of installation, with its serial number, to Documents giving instructions for maintenance shall
which the instructions apply; be produced in durable form (that is, they sha ll be able )
b) Title of the handbook; to survive frequent handling) or triplicate copies shall )
c) Date of issue; be provided.
)
d) Nam e a nd address o f th e in stall e r/ 15.8 Maintenance Record and Annual Inspection
manufacturer; and )
e) Name of the publisher, when di fferent from Maintenance organization is required to maintain a log )
book at the equi pment to record of maintenance and
the installet-/manu facturer. )
repair work carried out on the equipment. fn addition,
In the handbook, the layout diagram and latest wiring diagram is requ ired )
I) all units used shall be Sf units; to be maintained at the equipment by ma intenance
)
organization. Maintenance organization is required to
2) all pages shall be numbered; and
carry out annual inspection of the installation and certify )
3) all references to other documents shall be in tha t escalator is in safe for operation. Owner of the
fu ll. )
insta ll atio n is respons ible for ensuring that any
deficiencies found during the annual inspection are )
Warnings shall state the hazard, the related risks and
rectified before the equ ipment is put back in service. }
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)

PART 8 BUILDI NG SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATI ON OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WA LKS: 35
SR ESCALATO RS AND MO VI NG WALKS
)
)
)
) ANNEXA
) (Clause 14.5)
)
TYPICAL ESCALATOR SITE CHECKLIST/INSPECTION LIST
)
Sl Items Frequency Requirement Value Value Result
)
No. and Method Required Measured
)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
)
i) Definitio n of datum 100 percent Check whether Y ES/NO
)
and insta llation of (Visual check) metal
) bearing plate plate and
isolation rubber
)
pad provided at
) both top and
bottom escalator
)
support no tches
) ii) Intennediate I 00 percent Check whether
) support (Visual check) both support
points are loaded
) by ensuring: YES/NO

a) Tightness of
)
bolts and locking
) of check-nut
) b) Check for any YES/NO
sag by holding a
) thread from the
) nose of top-most
step to the nose
) of bottom- most
) step (excluding
flat steps)
)
iii) Alignment of truss I 00 percent Check horizontal
) and end suppo rts (V isual check) level using spirit-
) level o n step:
a) Top suppo rt OK/NOT OK
)
b) Botto m OK/NOT O K
) support
) c) Middle level OK/NOT O K
) iv) Alig nment of dri ve Random Alig nment : O K/NOT OK
top/reverse/bottom/ (Visua l check) Factory setting
)
tension carriage Check ti ghtness OK/NOT OK
) of
nuts and bolts
v) A lig nment of track Rando m Alignment : O K/NOT OK
brackets (Visual check) Factory
setting
Check tig htness OK/NOT OK
of
nuts and bolts
) vi) Alignment of Rando m (Visual Alignment : OK/NOT OK
) incl ined tracks check) Factory setti ng

)
36 NATIONAL BUILD ING CODE OF INDIA 201 6
)
)
 )
ANNEX A- (Continued)
~
)
Sl Items Frequency Requirement Value Value Result
No. and Method Required Measured )

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) )

Check tightness )
OK/NOT OK
of nuts and bolts )
vii) Installation Random (Visual Alignment: OK/NOT OK )
and alignment of check) Factory
upper and setting )
lower newe l wheels Check tightness OK/NOT OK )
of )
nuts and bolts
)
viii) Alignment of Randomly at a) Clearance 2 mm, M~ax
skirting brackets and number of between comb )
panels locations plate and skitt
)
(Measure using b) Distance (I 000 + 7) mm
taper gauge/ between skitt )
tape) panel )
c) Clearance One side 4 )
between skirt and mm, both sides
step total 7 mm )
d) Levelness of 0.5 mm, Max )
skirt joint
)
e) Clearance of 0.5 mm, Max
skirt joint )
ix) Installati on of step Randomly at a) Visual check OK/NOT OK )
chain and steps number of chain joint - )
locations (Visual Step chain joint
check) link plate fixed )
properly )
b) Step assembly OK/NOT OK
)
(random check
10 pieces) - )
Circlip of step
)
chain is properly
secured in its )
position )
c) No step OK/NOT OK
)
transverse
movement )
(random check
)
I 0 pieces)
d) Co lour on YES/ NO )
Step, As per )
specifications
)
x) Installation of Randomly at Check tightness
balustrade number of of nuts and bolts OK/NOT OK )
steelworks locations (Visual )
check and by
using )
spanner/screw
driver)
)
)
PART 8 BUILDING SE RVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCA LATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 37
SB ESCA LATORS AND MOVING WA LKS
) ANNEX A - (Continued)
-l
)
SJ Items Frequency Requirement Value Value Result
No. and Method Requit-ed Measured
)
(l) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
)
xi) Glass balustrade I 00 percent a) Gap between 4mm
) (Measure the glass panels OK/NOT OK
) using tapper
gauge/visual
) check)
) b) Provision of YES/NO
rubber pad
)
between the glass
xii) Stainless steel I 00 percent a) Gap between OK/NOT OK
) balustrade (Measure using the panel (inner)
feeler)
gauge)
b) Visual check OK/NOT OK
the outer
)
cladding
) xiii) Alignment of Randomly at Handrail guide OK/NOT OK
) handrail tracks number of joints fitted
locations (By without sharp
) feeling the edges edges
) at joints)
xiv) Installation of 100 percent Check whether OK/NOT OK
top decking panels, (Visual check) all decking and
) inner panels, skirting skirt panels are
rclums and kick provided
J plates prop<' rly
) xv) Jnstallation of upper 100 percent Check whether OK/NOT OK
) and (Visual check) comb plates and
lower comb plates fl oor plates are
) and provided
) access floor covers properly
xvi) Floor plate I00 percent a) No tripping YES/NO
)
(V isual hazard on floor
) check/tape/ plate
stainless steel b) Clearance 2 mm, Max.
)
ruler) between floor YES/NO
) plate and frame
) c) Clearance 6-8 mm
between comb YES/NO
)
plate and f:l oor
) plate
) xv ii) Alignment of main 100 percent Sagging of 10-20 mm
drive chain, handrail (Tape/stainless handrail drive YES/NO
) drive chains steel ruler) chain
) Sagging of drive 10-20 mm
)
chain YES/NO
xviii) Alignment of 'over I00 percent Check whether YES/NO
) speed I under speed' (Visual check) the 'over speed'
) detection unit drive 'under speed'
chain sensor is
) prov ided
)
)
38 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
)
)
)
r Sl
No.
Items Frequency
and Method
ANNEX A - (Concluded)

Requirement Value
Required
Value
Measured
Result
)

)
{I) (2) (3) (4) (5) {6) (7)
)
xix) Cables are I 00 percent Check provision YES/NO
properly .laid in (Visual check) of proper )
raceway and arranged cable )
properly dressed. tray (or) flexible
The power and hose )
control wiring is Check provision YES/NO )
done properly with of labels/
ferruling and )
ferruling
identification tags )
Check for proper YES/NO
dressing of cables )
xx) Installation of I 00 percent Safety switches )
switches and wiring (Visual check) and limits
switches and its YES/NO )
location fixing )
arrangement to
be checked )
xxi) Installation of 100 percent Check whether )
lubrication system (Visual check) automatic )
lubrication YESINOINA
system is )
provided )
xxii) Earthing has I00 percent Check tightness YES/NO
)
been extended to all (Visual check) of earthing
relevant locations strips/wires )
xxiii) Installation of 100 percent Check, if YES/NO )
controller (Visual check) controller is tixed )
properly( for
tightness, )
straightness) )
xxiv) Installation of I 00 percent Check whether YES/NO )
escalator cladding (Visual check) cladding and
and decking decking have )
been provided )
properly
)
xxv) Others: I 00 percent YES/NO
Over lapped type (Visual check) )
joints of
)
drip pan
xxvi) The clear height Measuring tape At all points shall YES/NO )
above the steps be not less than )
2.30 m
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
PARTS BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION S INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 39 )
58 ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
) I
)

)
-
)
) ANNEXB
(Clause 14.6.4)
TYPICAL CHECK LIST FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS ON SAFETY SWITCHES AND DEVICES
)
Sl Check Point Method Value Measured Result
) No. Required Value
)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
)
i) The over speed protection Tripping the over speed OK/NOT OK
) devices device manually
} ii) The handrail Test operation of handrail OK/NOT OK Left:
) tension malfunction tension/broken handrail OK/NOT OK Right:
devices/broken handrail switch
monitor
iii) The broken drive chain Tripping the broken drive OK/NOT OK
protection chain device manually by
)
hand
) iv) Broken step chain monitor Tripping the broken step OK/NOT OK Left: t
) chain device manually under OK/NOT OK Right:
the step chain spring at 2
locations in the bottom pit
) v) Emergency stop switch Push the button OK/NOT OK Top:
OK/NOT OK Intermediate
level: tl
) t
OK/NOT OK Bottom: '
)

)
vi) Direction key switch
(Statt switch)
OK/NOT OK Top: l
OK/NOT OK Bottom:
) vii) Traffic ballard OK/NOT OK 1;
) viii) Traffic light working Check for conect movement Ok!NOTOK Top: l
) indication OK/NOT OK Bottom:
(Up/Down) visual check
) ix) Provision of Visual check OK/NOT OK
) comb light
) x) Phase failure/ Visual check simulate the OK/NOT OK
Phase reversal protection fu nction device
)
xi) Hand rail inlet monitor In the handrail inlet at 4 OK/NOT OK Bottom Left:
) locations; trip manually OK/NOT OK Bottom Right:
) OK/NOT OK Top Right:
) OK/NOT OK Top Left:
xii) Skirt panel deflection Trip manually OK/NOT OK Bottom Left:
safety switch
) OK/NOT OK Bottom Right:

)
OK/NOT OK Top Right:
OK/NOT OK Top Left:
)
xiii) Step sag monitor Trip manually OK/NOT OK Top:
)
OK/NOT OK Bottom:
xiv) Comb plate safety device Trip manually OK/NOT OK Top Left:
) OK/NOT OK Top Right:
) OK/NOT OK Bottom Lefl::
)
40 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 201 6
)

)
)
 ANNEX B- (Concluded)

Sl Check Point Method Value Measured Result

No. Required Value

(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

OK/NOT OK Bottom Right:
xv) Floor plate open switch Open floor plate- manually OK/NOT OK Top:
OK/NOT OK Bottom:
xvi) Step missing monitor Simulate function of sensor OK/NOT OK Top:
-manually OK/NOT OK Bottom:
xvii) Float safety switch Trip manually OK/NOT OK
xviii) Handrail speed monitor Simulate change in speed OK/NOT OK Left:
manually OK/NOT OK Right:
xix) Step up-thrust monitor Trip manually OK/NOT OK Top:
OK/NOT OK Bottom:
xx) Brake open detect switch Trip manually OK/NOT OK Left:
OK/NOT OK Right:
xxi) Provision to measure the Visual check, provision of Yes/No
braking distance sensor/encoder
xxii) Sprinkler:
a) Connected to main Yes/No/NA
system
b) Number of sprinkler Yes/No!NA
heads provided
xx iii) Hand winding unit (Check Escalators should move Yes/No
for proper operation) easily in downward
direction
xxiv) Details of gear box:
a) Gear box make
b) Sl No.
c) Reduction ratio
'i
d) Check gear oil level 1_:
xxv) Details of motor: I
f

a) Manufacturer ~.
I~
·,

b) Motor Sl No. 1'1-

c) kW Rating •.·!
d) Cti!Tent rati·ng '·
'
e) RPM I;
\'!
.,
f) Insulation class
1•4
I~
l
I:·:
1I'''1
I
r! i.
!• ·I
1
)' :I
..:
,,
t'
'\
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES - SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 41 ,.
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
(

)
) ..
)
ANNEXC
)
[(Clause 15.3 .3(a)]
TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF MAINTENANCE CHECKS TO MAINTAIN THE INSTALLATION

) C-t ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS

) Sl Component Checks
No.
)
( I) (2) (3)
)
i) Controller Check cabinet is clean, dry and free fi·om dust
) ii) Gear box Check gear and associated parts .
) Check lubrication
iii) Drive motor Check bearings for wear
)
Check lubrication
iv) Brake Check braking system
)
Check parts for wear
) v) Auxiliary brake Check braking system
) Check parts for wear
vi) Intermediate gear box Check gear and associated parts
Check lubrication
)
vii) Main drive chain Check for tension and wear
Check lubrication
viii) Step/pallet chain Check for tension and wear
) Check lubrication
)
ix) Step/pallet Check step/pallet and step/pallet wheels for integrity
x) Conveyor belt Check for cond ition and tension
)
xi) Drive belt Check for condition and tension
)
xii) Clearances Check step to step and step to skirting clearances
) xiii) Combs Check condition
) Check meshing with steps, pallets or belt
) xiv) Comb plate Check clearances and operation
xv) Handrails Check for free running and condition
)
Check tension
)
Check synchronization between step/pallet band and the handrail
) xvi) Track system Check for condition and wear
) Check fixings
) xvii) Safety devices Check operation
xviii) De flector devices Check condition
xix) Lighting Check operation
)
xx) Display Check operation
) xx i) Signs/pictograms Check condition
xxii) Balustrade Check condition of panels
Check fixings of interior claddings
)
)

)
)

)
42 NATIONAL DUILDI NG CODE OF INDI A 20 16

)
 - - - - - - - - -; ·
)

ANNEXD )

(Clause 15.5.1) )

EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT IN ANY RISK ASSESSMENT )

FOR MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS )
)
D-J ESCALATORS/MOVING WALKS
)
Elements Machinery On Inside Upper Control Machine
)
Spaces Step/ Step/ and Cabinet Room
Pallet Pallet Lower (External )
nand Band Landing Drives)
)
Access and entty R R R R R R
}
Inadequate lighting (including R R R R R R
)
access)
Falls/slips R R R R R R )

Falling on machine NR R NR R NR NR )
Falling over balustrade NR R NR R NR NR )
Contact with moving machinery R R R R R R )
Indirect contact with machinery R R R R R R )
Crushing and shearing (step to R R R NR NR NR
)
step or comb/step to skirting)
Gaps in balustrade NR R NR NR NR NR )

Intersecti on between fl oors NR R· NR NR NR NR )

and/or escalators )
Persons on the step band NR R NR R NR NR
)
Safety switches and emergency R R R R R R
stopping device(s) )

lnspection control R R R R R R )
Intersection between fixed and NR R NR NR NR NR )
moving parts )
Unintentional stari/stop R R R R R R
)
Machine moving (other than on R R R R R R
power) )

More than one maintenance R R R R R R )

person working )
Manual operation R NR R R R R
)
Falling objects R R R R NR R
)
Unexpected water/cli1t R R R R R R
)
Contamination by oil and grease R R R R NR R
Dangerous substances R R R R R R )
Fire R NR R NR R R )
\
Missing step/pallet R R R R NR NR )
)
'R' = Relevant and 'NR' = Not relevant
)
)
) r

PART 8 BUILDI NG SERVICES- SECTION 5 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS: 43
SB ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS

)
) --
)

)
LIST OF STANDARDS
)
) The following list records those standards which are In the following li st, the number appearing in the first
acceptable as 'good practice' and 'accepted standards' column within parantheses indicates the number of
in the fulfilment of the requirements of the Code. The reference in this Subsection.
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
IS No. Title
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
(I) 732: 1989 Code of prac tice for e lectrical
be used by the Authority for conformance with the
) wiring installation
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
)
(2) 4591 : 1968 Code of practice for installation
) and maintenance of escalators
)

)
)

)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)

)
)

)
)
)

)
)
)
44 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF lNDIA 2016